Anda di halaman 1dari 400

PL7 Junior/Pro

Premium PLC Applications


Process Control

35002677 00

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E eng V4.0

Related Documentation

Related Documentation
Document set

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This manual consists of 8 volumes:


l Volume 1
l Shared application-specific functions
l Discrete application
l AS-i installation
l MMI application
l Volume 2
l Counting application
l Volume 3
l Axis command application
l Volume 4
l Step by step axis command application
l Volume 5
l Electronic cam application
l Volume 6
l SERCOS application
l Volume 7
l Analog application
l PID control application
l Weighing application
l Volume 8
l Process control application

Related Documentation

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Table of Contents

About the book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Part I Introduction to the process control application13


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Chapter 1

Process control in an automated system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15


The place of the process control application in an automation application . . . . . 15

Chapter 2
2.1
2.2

Chapter 3

Hardware and software introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to the process control processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features of Processors with built-in process control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to the process control software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to select and configure the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to access process control application parametering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of loop controller parametering screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Runtime screens adjustment tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating control loops with XBT terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autotuning the control loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setpoint programmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17
19
19
20
20
21
23
25
27
28
31
32

Procedure for installing a process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
How to install a process control using PL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
How to install a process control with an XBT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Part II Installing the process control application. . . . . 37


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Chapter 4

Introduction to loop controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

4.1

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Definition and structure of a loop controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Structure of loop controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

Chapter 5
5.1

Description of the types of loop controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Types of process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Introduction to the process loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Introducing the single loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Introduction to the cascade loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Introduction to the Auto Selector loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Description of the processing branches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Introduction to built-in functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Process value processing branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Setpoint processing branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Feed forward processing branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Loop controller and command branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
The ON OFF 2 or 3 states loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
The PID or IMC loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
The Split Range or Heat / Cool (PID or IMC) loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Output processing branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Servo drive output branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
PWM branch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Loops summary table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
The setpoint programmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Description of the setpoint programmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Guaranteed dwell time of a setpoint programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Control outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Bumpless start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Executing a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
How to link a setpoint programmer to a control loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Parameters of the setpoint programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Operation initialization and monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Global parameters of control loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Description of the global parameters of process control loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Calculation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Functions of the process value branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Input format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
First order filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Square root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Function generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Scale limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Level alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

Chapter 6
6.1

6.2

Functions of the setpoint branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setpoint limiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracking setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feed forward branch functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leadlag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm on deviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of the loop controller branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ON OFF 2 states loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ON OFF 3 states loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed PID equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model loop controller parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autotuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autotuning parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autotuning process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autotuning operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aborting autotuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Split Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat/Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of the output branch,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating process examples of the Servo function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

101
101
102
104
105
107
109
111
113
113
114
116
118
120
120
121
123
126
129
132
135
138
140
142
145
147
148
149
154
157
160
160
161
164
167
169
171
173

Control loop configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the loop and the inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to configure a process control loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the inputs and outputs associated with the process control loops .
Configuring MMI ( Man-Machine Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175
177
177
178
179
181
7

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
How to associate the process control loops to the MMI (Man-Machine Interface)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Description of exchange zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Using the Man-Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Configuration in multi-station operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Chapter 7
7.1

7.2

7.3

Chapter 8

Control loop adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Adjust Feed forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Gain adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Leadlag adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
PID adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
PID parameter adjustment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Role and influence of the parameters of a PID during a loop adjustment . . . . . 200
Model loop controller adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Steps to follow to adjust the model loop controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Instructions for regulating Ks static gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Instructions for adjusting dead time or delay T_DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
How to regulate the time constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Debugging a process control loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Description of the debugging screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Modifying the parameters of each loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Functional modification of each loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Debugging the setpoint programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Chapter 9
9.1

9.2

Operating the process control loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Operating applications for XBT-F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Magelis applications offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Operating page models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Browsing in the various view formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
How to load an XBT-F application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
The XBT-F01 process control screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Monitoring screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Front panel screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Trend screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Parameter adjustment screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

9.3

9.4

Chapter 10
10.1

10.2
10.3

10.4

Chapter 11

Autotuning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setpoint programmer selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setpoint programmer runtime screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setpoint programmer adjustment screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the alarm pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 process control screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustment screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setpoint programmer selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setpoint programmer runtime screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setpoint programmer adjustment screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the alarm pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exchange tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter setting zone for a loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic data zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm zone (loop only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XBT specific zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiplexing parameter setting zone for a setpoint programmer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

236
237
238
240
241
242
242
243
245
247
249
251
254
255
256
256
257
263
264
265
268
272

Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273


At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating process control channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distribution of process control handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing pre- and post- processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitasking application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling process control operations according to PLC operating mode . . . . .
Handling process control operations according to the PLC operating mode . .
Common operating modes for process control loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop execution in manual and automatic modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autotuning and Tracking mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto / Manual and Manual / Auto switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Behavior of loops during I/O errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating modes for each process control loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process loop operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single loop operating modes (3 single loops) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cascade loop operating modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto selector loop operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

273
275
275
276
277
278
279
279
281
281
282
283
284
285
286
286
287
288
289
291

Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295


9

11.1

11.2

11.3

11.4

11.5

11.6

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Language objects associated with the process control channels . . . . . . . . . . . 297
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Double word "Order of Command" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Control loops command word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Setpoint programmer command word (%MWxy.i.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Summary of selection and command words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Language objects associated with the process loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Configuration language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Error and diagnostics language objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Language objects associated with the 3 single loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Configuration language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Default and diagnostics language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Language objects associated with the single loop cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Configuration language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Fault and diagnostics language objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Language objects associated with the self-selective loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Configuration language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Fault and diagnostics language objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Language objects associated with the setpoint programmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Configuration language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Fault and diagnostics language objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

10

About the book

At a Glance
Document Scope

This manual describes the software installation of the process control application in
Premium PLCs: PMX version < 5.0 and TSX version > 5.0.

Validity Note

The update of this documentation takes PL7 V4.0 functionality into account. Nevertheless, it can be used to install previous versions of PL7.

Revision History

Related
Documents

User Comments

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Rev. No.

Changes

First version

Title of Documentation

Reference Number

Hardware installation manual

TSX DM 57 40E

We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at
TECHCOMM@modicon.com

11

About the book

12

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to the process control application

At a Glance
Subject of this
part

This part introduces the principles of process control and the associated software
and hardware solutions.

Whats in this
part?

This Part contains the following Chapters:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Chapter

Chaptername

Page

Process control in an automated system

15

Hardware and software introduction

17

Procedure for installing a process control

33

13

Introduction

14

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control in an automated


system

The place of the process control application in an automation application


General
introduction

In Premium processors prior to version 5.0, the process control application was integrated in the processors with references PMX In version 5.0 and above, the process control application is integrated as standard in the TSX and PCX CPUs (See
Features of Processors with built-in process control, p. 19).
Processors possessing process control functionality software channels called process control channels which can be configured in order to perform process control
algorithms for industrial processes.
The processes are as follows:
l process loop,
l cascade loop,
l auto selector loop,
l single control loop,
l setpoint programmer.
The input/output interfaces required for process control processing are the analog
or discrete module channels of the PLC.
Control loop parameters are set during processor configuration via the application
screens.

Introduction to
the operator
dialog

The operator dialog needed for all process control is carried out via the:
l PL7 debug and adjustment screens,
l graphical pages of the magelis XBT-F Man-Machine interface terminals,
l graphical pages of the TXBT Windows Man-Machine Interface terminals.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

15

Introduction to process control in an automated system

16

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Hardware and software introduction

At a Glance
Subject of this
chapter

This chapter introduces the hardware solutions, which allow the implementation of
the process control application, built-in to the Premium programmable PLCs.

Whats in this
Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Section

Topic

Page

2.1

Introduction to the process control processors

19

2.2

Introduction to the process control software tools

20

17

Hardware and software introduction

18

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Hardware and software introduction

2.1

Introduction to the process control processors

Features of Processors with built-in process control


At a Glance

Processors used for process control have the same technical features as those described in the standard hardware manual. The features specific to process control
are:
l The number of process control channels,
l The process control functions supported.

Processor
features

This table gives the references and features of the processors, which support the
process control functions.
References

Number of process control channels

T PMX 57 102

Process control functions


Process loop without model
loop controller

T PMX 57 202
T PMX 57 352

10

T PMX 57 452
TSX P57 203
TSX P57 253
TSX P57 303

15

TSX P57 353


TSX P57 453

20

T PCX 57 203

15

Process loop
Setpoint programmer
3 single loops
Cascade loop
Auto selector loop

T PCX 57 353

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

19

Hardware and software introduction

2.2

Introduction to the process control software tools

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section introduces the PL7, XBT and run-time screens editor software used to
install the process control application.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

20

Topic

Page

How to select and configure the processor

21

How to access process control application parametering

23

Description of loop controller parametering screens

25

Runtime screens adjustment tools

27

Operating control loops with XBT terminals

28

Autotuning the control loops

31

Setpoint programmer

32

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Hardware and software introduction

How to select and configure the processor


At a Glance

Software installation generic to the applications is described in the manual Common


functions (See PL7 Junior/Pro Premium PLC Application Standard applications).
However the specifics, such as the selection of the processor and its configuration,
are described here.
Note: using process control in an application imposes a MAST task of the periodic
type.

How to select the


processor

This table describes the procedure for selecting the processor.


Step
1

Action
Select the command File New
Result: the following screen appears.
New
TSX Micro
TSX Premium

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Processors :
PCX 57203 V5.0...
PCX 57353 V5.0...
TSX 57103 V5.0...
TSX 57153 V5.0...
TSX 57203 V5.0...
TSX 57253 V5.0...
TSX 57303 V5.0...
TSX 57353 V5.0...
TSX 57453 V5.0...

Memory cards :
None
32 Kmots
64 Kmots
128 Kmots
128 Kmots-Storage

OK
Cancel

Select TSX Premium plus the desired processor type and version which has
the process control application built-in (See Features of Processors with builtin process control, p. 19).

Confirm your selection by clicking on OK.


Result: the PL7 software creates a new application with the selected processor.

21

Hardware and software introduction

How to configure
the processor

This table describes how to configure a periodic MAST task.


Step
1

Action
Open the hardware configuration editor from the application browser.
Result: the following screen appears.
Configuration
XMWI
XTI..

TSX 57303 V5.0 ...


0

P
S
Y
0

2
6
0
0

T
S
X
5
7
3
0
3

Double click on the processor module (avoid the Loops, Fipio or Comm zones).
Result: the following screen appears.
TSX 57303 [RACK 0

POSITION 0]

Configuration
Designation: PROCESSEUR TSX 57303
Operating mode
Run/Stop input
Memory protection

Tasks
MAST
Cyclic
Periodic

Automatic start inRun


%MWi reset on cold start
Memory card
None

22

Watchdog
FAST
Priode :
Watchdog

Fipio mode
Network cycle
time (calculated)
20 ms
Controlled
ms
Free
250 ms
Fipio mode
5 ms
Network cycle
time (calculated)
100 ms
Controlled
ms
Free

In the MAST tasks zone, select the Periodic button and indicate the period
value in ms.

Confirm the modification by clicking on the enable icon in the toolbar:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Hardware and software introduction

How to access process control application parametering


At a Glance

The method of software installation for process control channels is the same as that
used for PL7 application specific functions.
An application specific function has:
l dedicated screens,
l specific instructions,
l language objects (See Process control language objects, p. 295).
Installation of a process control starts with accessing the parametering screens,
consisting of:
l configuration screens (in offline and online mode),
l debug screens (in online mode).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

23

Hardware and software introduction

How to access
the configuration
screen

What to do to access the configuration screen


Step
1

Action
Open the hardware configuration editor from the application browser.
Result: the following screen appears.
Configuration
XMWI
XTI..

TSX 57303 V5.0 ...


0

P
S
Y
0

2
6
0
0

T
S
X
5
7
3
0
3

Double click on the Loops zone in the processor module.


Result: the following screen appears, the zone not displayed here is empty.
TSX 57303 [RACK 0 POSITION 0 ]
Configuration
Configuration du DOP
Dsignation : PROCESSEUR TSX P 57303
Symbole :
Rgulateur :
Rgulateur4

24

Fonction :
Aucune

Select a loop controller and an associated function.


Result: a description of the control loop and its features (See Description of
loop controller parametering screens, p. 25) appears.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Hardware and software introduction

Description of loop controller parametering screens


At a Glance

There are two types of loop control parametering screens:


l configuration screens,
l debug screens.

Illustration of the
configuration
screen

The configuration screen is as follows.

TSX 57303 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]


Configuration
Designation: PROCESSOR TSX P 57303
Symbol:
Loop Controller:
Loop controller4 - LOOP0
LOOP 0
Loop
Loop parameters
Process value
Setpoint
Loop controller
Feed Forward
Output 1

DOP configuration

Function:
Process loop

Standard
Single
PID
No
Analog

Functions
Instrumentation
Execution

Parameters
Loop name
Unit
Low scale (phy.)
High scale (phy.)

PV
SP1

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

0.0
100.0

OUT 1
R
L

Description of
the configuration
screen

LOOP0

0.0

P
I
D

0.0

The configuration screen is made up of three zones.


Zone

Description

Module zone: this zone indicates the module concerned,


Here the processor module as well as the type of screen: Configuration.

Channel zone: this zone has a menu for selecting a loop controller, as well as
a menu for selecting the function to be associated with the loop controller:
l a process loop,
l a cascade loop,
l an auto selector loop,
l three single loops,
l a setpoint programmer.

Parametering zone: this zone is used to select the calculation functions of each
processing branch. It consists of:
l a function selection zone,
l a display and parametering zone for the loop controller block diagram.

25

Hardware and software introduction

Illustration of the
debug screen.

The following is the debug screen.


TSX 57303 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]
Debug
Designation: PROCESSOR TSX P 57303

DOP configuration
DIAG...

Symbol:
Function:
Loop Controller:
Loop controller4 - LOOP0 Process loop
LOOP 0
Loop
Loop parameters
Process value
Setpoint
Loop controller
Feed Forward
Output 1
Loop Scale
Low: 0.0
PV
5000
SP1
63.0
FF
3547

Utilities which
can be accessed
via the debug
screen:

26

LL

Standard
Single
Heat / Cool
Yes
Analog

Alarms
DL

DH

LL

Parameters
Time constant (s)
Gain
Output

Functions
Format
Filter
Fct generator
Alarms
Simulation

DIAG...

HH

WARNING

10.0
1.0
4484.536

High: 100.0
44.845
R
L

P
I
D

45.0

28.585
0.0

OUT 1
2858
0
OUT 2

35.47

The following are the utilities that can be accessed via the debug screen:
l simulation of input values (process value, Feed forward, etc ),
l animation of the block diagram,
l modification of the adjustment parameters of calculation functions,
l modification and saving of all parameters,
l sending of autotuning and manual commands, etc.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Hardware and software introduction

Runtime screens adjustment tools


At a Glance

The runtime screens editor allows the use of bar charts and specific library objects
for the operation of control loops. Animation is automatic and is a simple process.
To find out which objects are available and how to use them, please refer to the
Runtime screens editor user manual (See RunTime Screens editor User manual).

Example of the
adjustment tools

Example of the process control interfaces offered by the runtime screens editor.
ON OFF 3

S/R Cascade

Text

Text

A
M
Text
PV SP OV1OV2
Unit
PV 0.000
SP 0.000
SP Internal
OUT *xxxxx
2 0.00
1 0.00

Text
THRESHOLD HIGH
THRESHOLD LOW
HYST

0.000
0.000
0.000

PV

0.000

SP

0.000

OUT

Unit
1 OUT 0

Auto Selective C P I D
Text
R
R L
F
AS C
A M
Text

Kp
Ti (s )
Td (s.)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

0.000 Te (s )
0.000 OUTBIAS
0.000 DBAND

0.000
0.000
0.000

PV
SP

0.000
0.000

OUT

#xxxx.x

Unit

27

Hardware and software introduction

Operating control loops with XBT terminals


At a Glance

Some Magelis XBT-F terminals are able to manage control loops.


Note: when these tools are used, to make the XBT/PLC dialog transparent, exchanges are made by default in the word zones %MW3228 to %MW3242 and
%MW3350 to %MW4090 (See Using the Man-Machine Interface, p. 185).
In addition to the services offered by the XBT-L1000 software and the Magelis terminals, the XBT-F terminal offers specialized pages to manage each control loop:
l control page,
l operating page,
l adjustment page,
l monitoring page,
l alarm page.

Control page

Control pages are used to control each control loop, manual mode, automatic mode,
autotuning, etc.
TC_0001
H

AUTO

DH

LOCAL

10000-

AT

PV
SP
OV

:
:
:

96.00
65.00
31.00

OV1

31.00

02

Operating page

Alarm page 1

AM

IR
ON

Operating pages are used to display the evolution of the setpoint and measurement.
TC_0001
AUTO

DH

LOCAL

AM
PV
SP

28

: 96.00
: 65.00

OV

31.00

OV1 :

31.00

LK

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Hardware and software introduction

Adjustment page

Adjustment pages are used to adjust the parameters of each loop: process control
coefficients, limits, etc.
TC_0001
H

AUTO
KP
TI (s)
TD (s)
O_BIAS
AT DBAND
KD
ORATE1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Monitoring page

DH

1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
10.0
0.0

LOCAL
SP_SUP
SP_INF
TS (s)
PV_H
PV_L
INTBND

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

100.0
0.0
0.30
95.0
5.0
0.0

Sa

Alarm page 1

ON

The monitoring page groups together the main information about the control loop
process. It is the process control operating input screen. It is used to access each
loops operating pages.
AUTO

TC_0003

LOCAL

100.0

AT

Pr

1/8

Ack

9/16

Sa

26mn
KP
TI (s)
TD (s)
O_BIAS
DBAND
INTBND
KD
2
2

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

20mn
1.0 KP Pr
:
:
0.0 TI Pr
:
0.0 TD Pr
0.0 ATSTEP
:
0.0 ATTMAX
:
:
0.0 ATPERF
10.0
:
Loop 1 Alarm (s)

:
:
:
:
:
:

10mn
1.0
0.0
0.0
10.00.
100.0.
0.50

SP_SUP
SP_INF
TS (s)
PV_H
PV_L
ORATE1

:
:
:
:
:
:

0.0
100.0 PV
0.0 SP
0.30 OV
95.0
5.0 OV1
0.0
06/05/98

:
:
:
:
:

60.0
20.0
40.0
40.0

AM

LR

DH

15:01:29
ON
06/051998

15:41

29

Hardware and software introduction

Alarm page

The alarm pages are linked to each loop (HH, H, L, LL). They are integrated into XBT
alarm management.
1

TC_0001

TC_0002

TC_0003

N1

4
5
AT

6
7
SPP

8
2

30

Alarm page 1

ON

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Hardware and software introduction

Autotuning the control loops


At a Glance

Autotuning is applied to most of the processes, such as temperature regulation, flow


regulation, pressure regulation, etc.
The loop controllers built into these control loops are used to calculate a set of adjustment parameters (Kp, Ti, Td) on autotune request.
These parameters can be accessed via:
l PL7 debug screens,
l an animation table,
l an adjustment screen specific to an XBT-F terminal.

XBT-F autotuning page

This page is used to autotune a control loop.


TC_0001
AUTO
KP
TI
TD

:
:
:

H DH
ACTUAL
1.0
0.0
0.0
:
Step
Tmax (s) :
:
Perf

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

LOCAL
PREV
1.0
0.0
0.0
10.0
100.0
0.50

Alarm page 1

Ack

AT

Sa

Pr
ON

31

Hardware and software introduction

Setpoint programmer
At a Glance

All process control channels can be configured using the setpoint programmer.
The features of a setpoint programmer are as follows:
l 1 to 6 profiles,
l a maximum of 48 segments distributed over the configured profiles,
l Profiles can be assigned to several control loops.
Note: when the setpoint programmer is interfaced to a single loop, the PV measurement tracking function can be used.

Note: the XBT-F terminal offers an adjustment page and an operating page specifically for the setpoint programmer. These pages are used to modify the desired
setpoint profiles.

Configuration
screen for a
setpoint
programmer

Profiles are assigned to a control loop via a configuration screen.


TSX 57353 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]
Configuration
Designation: PROCESSOR TSX P 57353
Symbol:
Loop Controller:
Loop controller 5 - SPP_1
Name: SPP_1
PROFIL_1

PROFIL_2

Function:
Setpoint programmer

PROFIL_3

Segments
Execution
Guaranteed Dwell Time at threshold 5.0
Segment x
SP x
VAL x
50.0
40.0
1 Ramp
50.0
20.0
2 Stage
80.0
40.0
3 Ramp
80.0
40.0
4 Stage

PV

DOP configuration

Task:
MAST

PROFIL_4

Segmentation:
8-8-8-8-8-8

PROFIL_5
PROFIL_6
Number of segments:
8

on 8

on Deviation on input
Unit
Pq S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7
Second
Second
Second
Second

%MF24

80.0

32

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Procedure for installing a process


control

At a Glance
Subject of this
chapter

This chapter describes the steps required to install a process control with the aid of
a Premium processor with the process control application built-in and an XBT terminal.

Whats in this
Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic

Page

How to install a process control using PL7

34

How to install a process control with an XBT

35

33

Procedure for installing a process control

How to install a process control using PL7


At a Glance

Installing a process control involves a certain number of steps as described in the


following procedure.

Procedure with
PL7

This table describes the steps to be carried out to install a process control using the
PL7 software.
Step

34

Action

Mode

Configure the processor using the application browser.


l Hardware configuration
l Software configuration

Configure the process control channels.


l Select type of loop
l Select calculation functions
l Enter the configuration parameters
l ...

If necessary, symbolize the variables associated with


the control loops using the variables editor.

Program the PLC applications by creating specialized


PL7 on or offline
program sections.

Transfer the application to the PLC to debug the program and each application-specific function (I/O, process control, communication etc.).

Debug and adjust the control loops by modifying and


saving the values of the control loop adjustment parameters.

Print the application documentation that contains in- PL7 on or offline


formation relating to the different application-specific
functions (including process control functions): configuration parameters, adjustment parameters, etc.

PL7 offline

PL7 online

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Procedure for installing a process control

How to install a process control with an XBT


At a Glance

An XBT terminal is generally used to install the Man-Machine interface in a process


control. Process control algorithms, acquisition and command are carried out via
and adjustment, operation and monitoring are carried out via the graphic pages of
an XBT-F. The steps of this installation are shown in the following table.

Procedure using
an XBT

This table describes the steps to follow to install a process control using an XBT
terminal.
Step

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Action

Program the XBT application using the XBT-L1000 software, the directory tree
of pages, contents, dialog tables, etc.

Transfer the application to the XBT in order to debug the control loops.

Debug and adjust the control loops by modifying and saving the control loop adjustment parameter values, using the preset pages and XBT application pages.

Work in runtime in order to control the process loops of the machine using the
XBT preset pages.

35

Procedure for installing a process control

36

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Installing the process control


application

II

At a Glance
Aim of this Part

This part describes the different control loops and functions, as well as their installation, from configuration to debugging.

Whats in this
part?

This Part contains the following Chapters:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Chapter

Chaptername

Page

Introduction to loop controllers

39

Calculation functions

83

Control loop configuration

175

Control loop adjustment

189

Debugging a process control loop

211

Operating the process control loops

219

10

Operating modes

273

11

Process control language objects

295

37

Installation

38

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

At a Glance
Subject of this
Chapter

This chapter introduces the different loop controllers:


l types,
l structure,
l processing branches,
l parameters.

Whats in this
Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Section

Topic

Page

4.1

Definition and structure of a loop controller

41

4.2

Description of the types of loop controllers

42

4.3

Description of the processing branches

48

4.4

The setpoint programmer

68

4.5

Global parameters of control loops

81

39

Introduction to loop controllers

40

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

4.1

Definition and structure of a loop controller

Structure of loop controllers


At a Glance

Loop controller is a generic term used to designate a processor process control


channel. A loop controller can be made up of several control loops.
Example: a master loop and a slave loop.
A loop controller is thus made up of control loops, themselves made up of:
l branches or blocks (process value processing, etc.) made up of:
l calculation functions (gain, filtering, square root, etc.) which are defined by a
certain number of parameters.
The PL7 configuration screen is allows you to carry out this hierarchical breakdown.

Illustration

This figure represents a configuration screen, which allows this hierarchical breakdown, as well as the parametering of the process control channels.
1
Loop Controller (Channel)

Process control type

Loop

Branch

Function

6
Parameter

7
Loop schema

Description

This table describes the hierarchical structure of a process control channel.


Number

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Description

Module zone (processor)

Channel or loop controller zone

Loop tab

List of branches

List of functions

List of parameters

Process control loop block diagram

41

Introduction to loop controllers

4.2

Description of the types of loop controllers

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section introduces the different loop controllers as well as their structure.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

42

Topic

Page

Types of process control

43

Introduction to the process loop

44

Introducing the single loop

45

Introduction to the cascade loop

46

Introduction to the Auto Selector loop

47

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Types of process control


At a Glance

For a process control channel, it is possible to select from 5 predefined profiles:


l a process loop,
l three single loops,
l a cascade loop,
l an auto selector loop,
l a setpoint programmer (See The setpoint programmer, p. 68).
Each loop offers default parameters, with the exception of the setpoint programmer.
The use of the different functions built into the algorithms (square root, function generator, etc.) is predefined, as is the initial value of each parameter.

Description of
the control loops

The control loops are made up 5 processing branches which will create the required
algorithm:
l the process value processing branch,
l the Feed forward processing branch,
l the setpoint processing branch,
l the loop controller branch,
l the output processing branch.
The operation of each processing branch (See Description of the processing
branches, p. 48) is the same, irrespective of the process control type which is selected.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

43

Introduction to loop controllers

Introduction to the process loop


At a Glance

The process loop is a loop with only one loop controller.

Loop diagram

This schema illustrates the process paths of the process loop.


Autotuning

Processing
setpoint

Setpoint

Process value

Processing
process value

Feed forward

Loop controller
and
command
processing

Auto

Manual

Processing
output

Processing
Feed forward

Manual command
Tracking

44

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Introducing the single loop


At a Glance

The single loop profile automatically links three single loops to the loop controller,
in order to increase the number of loops. These loops operate independently of each
other.

Loop diagram

This schema illustrates the process branches for the single loop.
Autotuning

Processing
setpoint

Setpoint

Process value

Processing
process value

Loop controller
and
command
processing

Auto

Processing
output
Manual

Manual command
Tracking

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

45

Introduction to loop controllers

Introduction to the cascade loop


At a Glance

The cascade loop is made up of two dependent loops: a master loop and a slave
loop. The master loop output is the setpoint for the slave loop.

Loop diagram

This schema illustrates the process paths of the cascade loop.


Autotuning

Setpoint

Process value

Processing
setpoint
Processing
process value

Autotuning
Loop controller
and
command
processing

Setpoint

Process
value

Feed forward

Loop controller
and
command
processing

Output

Processing
Feed forward

Manual command
Manual command
Tracking

46

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Introduction to the Auto Selector loop


At a Glance

The Auto Selector loop, which is also called the restricted loop is made up of two
parallel loops:
l the main loop,
l the secondary loop.
The output is selected according to a precise algorithm.
The secondary loop is a single loop.

Loop diagram

This schema illustrates the process paths of the Auto Selector loop.
Autotuning

Setpoint

Process value

Feed forward
Setpoint

Process value

Processing
setpoint
Processing
process value
Feed
forward
Processing
setpoint
Processing
process value

Loop controller
and
processing
command

Autotuning

S
E
L
E
C
T
I
O
N

Processing
output

Loop controller
and
processing
command

Manual command
Tracking

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

47

Introduction to loop controllers

4.3

Description of the processing branches

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section introduces the different processing branches that make up the loop controller loops.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

48

Topic

Page

Introduction to built-in functions

49

Process value processing branch

53

Setpoint processing branch

55

Feed forward processing branch

57

Loop controller and command branch

58

The ON OFF 2 or 3 states loop controller

59

The PID or IMC loop controller

60

The Split Range or Heat / Cool (PID or IMC) loop controller

61

Output processing branch

63

Servo drive output branch

64

PWM branch output

66

Loops summary table

67

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Introduction to built-in functions


At a Glance

The processing branches each have calculation functions built-in. These calculation
functions are represented in the block diagram by icons. Each type of branch has
specific calculation functions.

Process value
branch

List of calculation functions.


Icon

Description
First order filtering

Square root

Function generator

Scale limiter

Alarms on level

Totalizer

Set to scale

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

49

Introduction to loop controllers

Setpoint branch

List of calculation functions.


Icon

Description
Selection

Ratio

Setpoint limiter

SP
Track

Process value setpoint tracker

Speed limiter

Set to scale

50

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Loop controller

List of calculation functions.


Icon

Description
2 state ON OFF

3 state ON OFF

P
I
D

PID

I
M
C

Internal model loop controller

P
I
D

Heat / Cool

I
M1 2
C

P
I
D

Split Range

I 1 2
M
C

Feed Forward
branch

List of calculation functions.


Icon

Description
Set to scale

LL

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Leadlag

51

Introduction to loop controllers

Output loop
controller

List of calculation functions.


Icon

Description
Set to scale

Analog output

PWM

Servo drive output

Pulse output

Output limiter

52

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Process value processing branch


At a Glance

There are two types of process value:


l Standard process value,
l External process value.
The external process value allows you to input to the loop controller a process value
PV which has been processed outside the control loop. This solution is offered for
cases where calculation of the process value requires specific or customized functions which are not available in standard process value processing.

Standard
process value

Block diagram of the standard process value branch.


Simulation

Function
generator

%MW,
Filter

%IWxy.i

PV_SIM

Totalizer
Limiter

FILT_OUT

SQR_OUT

Scales

OUT_TOT
PV

Alarms

l The first order filtering function has a gain coefficient.


l There are four thresholds for the Alarms on process value block with a hysteresis of 1% of the full scale.

l Two input formats may be used: unipolar or bipolar.


l There is no bump when switching to simulated mode; the initial simulation value
retained is the last process value read.

l The function generator has scaling built-in.


l It is possible to limit the process value to the scale limits.
External process
value

Block diagram of the external process value branch.


Simulation

Totalizer

OUT_TOT

%MF,
Limiter

PV

%MFxy.i
Alarms

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

53

Introduction to loop controllers

How the
initialization
works

l On start-up, the associated data is first updated before the launch of the first process of this branch.

l If the process value input address is not set, processing is performed on the simulated value initially set to zero.

l On initialization, there is a consistency check on the configuration entered. If


there is a problem with the configuration, the loop remains in a state of initialization.
Operation of
execution check

The two serious faults checked by process value processing are parameter and internal calculation errors (division by zero, overflow, etc.).
If

Then

a serious error has been detected

the loop processing switches to fallback state :


l the value of the calculated process value PV is
frozen,
l the control loop outputs are frozen.

the error disappears

the loop resumes in the previous operating mode,


without bumps on the outputs.

there is a serious error on process val- the loop remains in its initialization position and does
ue processing during a cold start
not start.
the scale values are incorrect (nonfloating value) during a cold start

the loop remains in its initialization position and does


not start.

following an error, the loop remains in the problem must be eliminated so that it will start auits initialization position and does not tomatically.
start.
there is an error on the scale values
during operation.

54

the process value processing is performed with the


former, correct scale values which are replaced in the
current parameters of the scale. The scale parameters are updated when the check is correct.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Setpoint processing branch


At a Glance

There are four types of setpoint:


l the ratio setpoint,
l the selection setpoint,
l the single setpoint (remote with scaling),
l the setpoint programmer.
Only the two last setpoints can be used with the 3 single loops or the Auto Selector
loop.

Definition

A local setpoint is a setpoint written by a Man-Machine Interface.


A remote setpoint is a setpoint produced by a process.

Block diagram of
the branch

Block diagram of the setpoint processing branch.


Limiter

Programmer

Limiter
Remote/Local

OR

Input
Remote 1

Ratio

SP

OR
Input
Remote 2

Selection

speed

Scale
OR
Scale

l The local value tracks the value of the remote setpoint in order to avoid bumps
on the change of operation.

l If the address of the remote setpoint is not given, local mode is forced.
l To avoid changes which are too abrupt, the speed of the setpoint can be limited.
l By default, the setpoint is limited to the loop scale. A more restrictive limit can be
fixed.

l When the loop controller is in manual mode, the setpoint can track the process
value.
How the
initialization
works

l On start-up, the associated data is first updated before the launch of the first process of this branch.

l If the process value input address is not set, processing is performed on the simulated value initially set to zero.

l On initialization, there is a consistency check on the configuration entered. If


there is a problem with the configuration, the loop remains in a state of initialization.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

55

Introduction to loop controllers

Operation of
execution check

56

The two faults checked by setpoint processing are parameter errors (not written in
floating point format) and internal calculation errors (division by zero, overflow, etc.).
When such a fault appears:
l The result of the SP setpoint processing is frozen.
l Warnings are displayed.
l These errors are not considered to be serious at the level of the control loop; loop
controller and output value calculation is performed with the value of the frozen
setpoint.
l Calculation of the SP setpoint restarts as soon as the fault disappears.
l Other faults associated with the built-in setpoint functions are indicated. They are
detailed in the description of each function (See Calculation functions, p. 83).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Feed forward processing branch


At a Glance

In a classic process control using PID, the loop controller reacts to the variations to
the process output (closed loop process control). For this reason, if there is a disruption, the loop controller does not begin to react until the process value moves away
from the setpoint.
The Feed Forward function is used to compensate for a measurable disruption as
soon as it appears.
This open loop function anticipates the effect of the disruption: this is therefore referred to as an anticipating action (or Feed forward).

Block diagram of
the branch

Block diagram of the Feed forward processing branch.


Simulation
%MW,

FF_SIM

Leadlag

Scale

OUT_FF

%IWxy.i

How the
initialization
works

If the Feed forward branch address is not defined, processing is performed on the
simulated value initially set to zero.

Operation of
execution check

The two faults checked by setpoint processing are parameter errors (not written in
floating point format) and internal calculation errors (division by zero, overflow, etc.).
When such a fault appears:
l The result of the processing of this setpoint is frozen.
l These errors are not considered to be serious at the level of the control loop, loop
controller and output value calculation is performed with the frozen Feed forward
value.
l Specific warnings are displayed.
l The value OUT_FF on the loop controller input is updated as soon as the fault
disappears.
l Other faults associated with the built-in setpoint functions are indicated. They are
detailed in the description of each function (See Calculation functions, p. 83).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

57

Introduction to loop controllers

Loop controller and command branch


At a Glance

58

There are 8 types of loop controller:


l Autotuning PID loop controller,
l Discrete mode loop controller:
l 2 states,
l 3 states,
l Heat/Cool PID loop controller,
l Split Range PID loop controller,
l Internal model loop controller,
l Heat/Cool internal model loop controller,
l Split Range internal model loop controller,

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

The ON OFF 2 or 3 states loop controller


At a Glance

This type of branch contains only the ON OFF function with 2 or 3 states according
to the selection. It is available in the process loops and 3 single loops. When this
type of branch is selected, there is neither an output branch, nor a Feed forward
branch.
The loop controller output is copied into the status bit STS_RAISE1 for the ON OFF
2 states loop controller and also into the status bit STS_LOWER1 for the ON OFF 3
states loop controller.
The internal variables are updated by recognizing the previous value of the command.

Block diagram of
the 2 states loop
controller

Block diagram of the branch with an ON OFF 2 states loop controller.


Auto/Manu
PV
SP

STS_RAISE1

ON OFF
2 states

%M, %Q

Updating of internal variables

Block diagram of
the 3 states loop
controller

Block diagram of the branch with an ON OFF 3 states loop controller.


Auto/Manu
PV
SP

ON OFF
3 states

STS_RAISE1

%M, %Q

STS_LOWER1

%M, %Q

Updating of internal variables

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

59

Introduction to loop controllers

The PID or IMC loop controller


At a Glance

The diagram below illustrates the standard PID branch. There are variants, depending on the loops. Each variant is dealt with in the description of the different loops
(See Operating modes for each process control loop, p. 286).
For certain functions, the internal variables are updated by recognizing the previous
value of the command. This enables switching to be made without bumps and enables integral action overflow to be avoided by recognizing the output limitations.
The output limitations apply in all loop controller operating modes.
Note: the RCPY input (external input address) only exists on the model loop controller.

Note: in manual mode, if the gradient limit is used, the OUT_MAN value (target value before limitation) may temporarily be different from the command applied on
output.

Block diagram of
the PID or IMC
loop controller

Block diagram of the PID or IMC loop controller.


Calculate
enabling

Updating of internal variables

OUTD

OUT_SUP
Autotuning
Auto/Manu
PV
SP
RCPY
OUT_FF

Autotuning

PID
or
IMC

Limiter

Gradient
limiter

OUT_INF

OUT_RATE

OUT_MAN

Tracking

TR_I

60

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

The Split Range or Heat / Cool (PID or IMC) loop controller


At a Glance

The IMC function is identical to the IMC single loop controller.


The PID function is identical to the PID single loop controller.
The only differences are:
l the absence of autotuning,
l the limiting of OUT_MAN between 0 and 100,
l the value of OUT_BIAS is fixed at 0 and cannot be parameterized.
The OUT_MAN command is recalibrated according to the limitations which are applied (as with a single PID), in order to avoid problems with overflow of the integral
action and with the operation of the Split Range or Heat/Cool function.
Each output of the Split Range or Heat/Cool function has its own limitations with regard to level and gradient.
The operating mode acts on the output of the OUT_MAN loop controller.

Block diagram of
the Split Range
or Heat/Cool loop
controller

Block diagram of the Split Range or Heat/Cool loop controller (PID or IMC).
100.0
Auto/Manu

0.0
PV
SP
RCPY
OUT_FF
TR_I

How the
initialization
works

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Limiter

PID
or
IMC

OUT_MAN
Tracking

Split Range
or
Heat / Cool

OUT_RATE
Gradient
limiter
Gradient
limiter
OUT_RATE2

OUT1_SUP
Limiter
OUT1_INF
OUT2_SUP
Limiter
OUT2_INF

OUT1
OUT2

l There is a consistency check on the configuration selected. If there is a problem


with the configuration:
l the loop remains in initialization state,
l the error is indicated in the status words.
l On cold start-up, the parameters and input values PV, SP, etc. associated with
this branch are first updated before the launch of the first loop controller process.
l It is possible to select the initial loop controller operating modes, by creating parameters in the configuration screen or by sending commands in a sequential
program. The loop can thus start in manual or automatic mode.

61

Introduction to loop controllers

Operation of
execution check

62

The two faults checked by setpoint processing are parameter errors (not written in
floating point format) and internal calculation errors (division by zero, overflow, etc.).
When such a fault appears:
l Loop controller processing goes into a fallback position:
l the calculated value of the OUT command is frozen,
l the control loop outputs are maintained.
l The state returns to normal as soon as the fault disappears. The loop then starts
off again on the outputs without bumps.
l The input and output scale values are checked.
l In case of inconsistency on a cold start, the loop switches to serious error mode.
l Warnings are generated in the status words.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Output processing branch


At a Glance

There are three types of output:


l analog output,
l Servo drive output,
l PWM output (pulse modulation).
Whatever type of output is used, the OUT_MAN command calculated by the loop
controller crosses a limiter whose lower OUTi_INF and upper OUTi_SUP limits are
used to define the range of output variation. These limits define the output scale.

Analog output

Apart from the limitation aspect, there is no function specific to this process. The calculated floating point value is converted into an integer in order to be sent on an analog channel (%QW) or in a memory word (%MW).
There are two floating point formats:
l unipolar [ 0 , 10000], default format,
l bipolar [ -10000 , 10000].

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

63

Introduction to loop controllers

Servo drive output branch


At a Glance

This output is made up of a SERVO function with or without a copy of the actuators
position.
l After a Split Range or Heat/Cool PID, only the SERVO with copy position is available.
l With this type of output, the loop controller output scale must be OUTi_INF and
OUTi_SUP in the interval [ 0 , 100 ].
l Its output period is the task period.
l If the loop controller is in automatic mode, the SERVO output takes into account
the new loop controller output value in each sampling period. In the other modes,
it is in each cycle of the task.

Block diagram of
a SERVO output
with position
copy

Block diagram of a Servo drive output branch with position copy (RCPY).
Updating of internal variables

100.0
Autotuning

Limiter

Autotuning
Auto/Manu

0.0

PID
or
IMC

Gradient
limiter

RCPY

OUT_RATE
SERVO

OUT_MAN
Tracking

Information

The SERVO function inputs are the output OUT_MAN of the loop controller and the
position copy of the actuator RCPY.
When the SERVO output follows a Split Range or Heat/Cool function, the copy input
is indispensable. SERVO function inputs are then OUT1 or OUT2 and RCPY.

Block diagram of
a SERVO output
without position
copy

Block diagram of a Servo drive output branch without position copy (RCPY).
Enable
Calculation

Updating of internal variables

OUTD
100.0
Autotuning

Limiter

Autotuning
Auto/Manu

0.0

PID
or
IMC

SERVO

Gradient
limiter
OUT_RATE

OUT_MAN
Tracking

64

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Information

The Servo function entry is a variation of the OUTD command of the PID.
Note: OUTD is not affected by limiting output OUT_MAN. This can be used to perform a floating process control - the command calculated by the PID has no direct
link with the actual position of the actuator. In particular, it is possible to continue
opening or closing a motorized valve even when OUT_MAN is saturated.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

65

Introduction to loop controllers

PWM branch output


At a Glance

This output consists of a PWM function in which the input is the command:
l OUT_MAN in the case of a PID loop controller,
l OUT1 or OUT2 in the case of Heat/Cool or Split Range loop controllers.
With this type of output branch, the output scale must be OUTi_INF and OUTi_SUP
in the interval [ 0 , 100 ].
Its output period is the task period and is independent of the operating mode of the
loop controller.

How the
initialization
works

l On startup the parameters and output branch input value are updated before the
first processing.

l If the output address is not filled in, the processing is carried out but the output
conversion is not performed.

l There is a consistency check on the configuration entered. If there is a problem


with the configuration, the loop remains in initialization state.
Operation of
execution
control

66

The two faults checked by setpoint processing are parameter errors (not written in
floating point format) and internal calculation errors (division by zero, overshoot,
etc.). On appearance of such a fault:
l The result of the output is frozen.
l When an error disappears, the status reverts to normal and the output is recalculated without bumps.
l During a cold start, if the values of the scale are not correct (non-floating value),
the loop stays in its initialization position and does not restart. Therefore, the outputs conserve their initial value.
l The loop starts when the error disappears.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Loops summary table


Table

This table summarizes the elements associated with each type of loop.

Branch

Single loop Process


loop

Cascade loop

Auto selector loop

Master

Slave

Main

Secondary

Yes

Yes (1)(2)

No

Yes

No

Single standard process val- Yes


ue

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Feed Forward

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Single setpoint

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

SPP profile setpoint

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Process standard process


value

No

Selection setpoint

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Setpoint with ratio

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

ON OFF 2 states loop controller

Yes

Yes

No

No

ON OFF 3 states loop controller

Yes

Yes

No

No

PID loop controller

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Heat / Cool PID loop control- No


ler (2)(3)

Yes

Yes

No

Split Range PID loop control- No


ler

Yes

Yes

No

IMC loop controller

Yes

Yes (1)(3)

Yes (1)

Yes (1)

Yes (1)

Heat / Cool IMC loop control- No


ler (2)(3)

Yes

Yes (1)

Yes (1)

Yes (1)

Yes (1)

Split Range IMC loop controller

No

Yes

Yes (1)

Yes (1)

Yes (1)

Yes (1)

Analog output

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

SERVO output

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

PWM output

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(1) One loop controller, either master or slave.


(2) The totalizing function does not exist on the process value branch of the master
loop.
(3) The autotuning function is not built into the PID/IMC Heat/Cool loop controllers.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

67

Introduction to loop controllers

4.4

The setpoint programmer

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section describes the operation of the setpoint programmer.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

68

Topic

Page

Description of the setpoint programmer

69

Guaranteed dwell time of a setpoint programmer

71

Control outputs

73

Bumpless start

74

Executing a profile

76

How to link a setpoint programmer to a control loop

78

Parameters of the setpoint programmer

79

Operation initialization and monitoring

80

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Description of the setpoint programmer


At a Glance

The setpoint programmer generates a setpoint, which evolves over time according
to a parameterized profile:
l a maximum of 6 profiles can be configured, made up of a total of
l 48 segments numbered from 1 to 48.
The segments are defined by the following parameters:

l SPi (%MF), target setpoint,


l VALi (%MF), duration or slope of segment,
A segment can be configured as:

l a ramp,
l a step (in this case Spi = Spi-1).
Each segment can be configured in seconds, minutes or hours.
Illustration

This diagram illustrates the introductory remarks.


Setpoint

SPi
Si
SPi-1

VALi
Time

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

69

Introduction to loop controllers

Mapping
Profiles/Segments

The possible configurations are as follows:


l 1 profile with a maximum of 48 segments,
l 1 profile with a maximum of 32 segments and 1 profile with a maximum of 16 segments,
l 2 profiles with a maximum of 24 segments,
l 3 profiles with a maximum of 16 segments,
l 4 profiles with a maximum of 12 segments,
l 6 profiles with a maximum of 8 segments,
l 1 profile with 24 segments, 1 profile with 16 segments and 1 profile with 8 segments.

Memory
mapping of
parameters and
setpoints

The 48 target setpoints, as well as their associated duration, are stored in the words
%MFxy.i.50 to %MFxy.i.240 respectively. The number of configured profiles does
not alter this mapping.
For 3 profiles with 16 segments the mapping is as follows:
l the first setpoint of the first profile is in %MFxy.i.50 (SP1),
l the first setpoint of the second profile is in %MFxy.i.114 (SP17),
l the first setpoint of the third profile is in %MFxy.i.178 (SP33).
For 2 profiles with 24 segments the mapping is as follows:
l the first setpoint of the first profile is in %MFxy.i.50 (SP1),
l the first setpoint of the second profile is in %MFxy.i.146 (SP25),

70

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Guaranteed dwell time of a setpoint programmer


At a Glance

The reaction of a process to a setpoint change is more or less rapid. It does not necessarily follow the variation of the setpoint calculated by the programmer. However,
it is still possible to follow the evolution of a process value and to guarantee the period of dwell at the selected setpoint: downcounting of the dwell period starts when
the deviation between the setpoint and the process value is less than a defined
threshold THLD.
This guarantee can be obtained by:
l high deviation overflow,
l low deviation overflow,
l high and low setpoint deviation overflow,
In these cases, downcounting of the dwell period is frozen during each overflow.

Illustration

This figure illustrates the operation of the guaranteed dwell time.


Point from which the process is
considered as SP3

SP

+THLD
S4
SP3 = SP4
S3

-THLD
VAL4

SP
Process reaction (PV)

Time
VAL4

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

71

Introduction to loop controllers

Procedure for
configuring a
guaranteed dwell
time

72

To configure a guaranteed dwell time, follow the following steps.


Step

Action

Select a loop controller.

Select the Setpoint programmer function.

Select use of the function by checking the Guaranteed Dwell Time box.

Fill in the threshold value THLD and the type of overflow required:
l high deviation, PV > dwell + THLD
l low deviation, PV < dwell - THLD
l high deviation, PV > dwell + THLD or PV < dwell - THLD
l input deviation, deviation only at start of dwell.

In the GDT column, check the dwell on which this function is performed.

Enter the address of the process value to be monitored in the entry field PV.
Note: If the address of the process value is not entered, the Guaranteed Dwell
Time function is not used, even if the latter is configured. During execution, it
is possible to inhibit this function by command (See Executing a profile, p. 76).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Control outputs
At a Glance

The setpoint programmer has 8 logic bit outputs (%MWxy.i.3:X0 to X7), which can
be associated to the segments in order to generate discrete actions.
These outputs are called S0 to S7 on the PL7 configuration screen.

Illustration of the
configuration
screen

This illustration supplies an example of parametering for logic outputs associated to


the segments of a setpoint programmer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Timing diagram
of operation

Segment x
Ramp
Stage
Ramp
Stage
Ramp
Stage
Ramp

SP x

VAL x

50.0
50.0
80.0
80.0
40.0
40.0
10.0

40.0
20.0
40.0
40.0
35.0
40.0
20.0

Unit
Second
Second
Second
Second
Second
Second
Second

Pq S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7

This timing diagram describes the position of the outputs in relation to the current
segment.
Setpoint

SP3 = SP4
S4
S3

SP1 = SP2
S2
SP0

%MWxy.i.3:X0

S5
S6

S1

Time

0
Time
%MWxy.i.3:X1

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Time

73

Introduction to loop controllers

Bumpless start
At a Glance

A setpoint profile starts on an initial setpoint value SP0, defined in the Execution
tab. To avoid a bump on starting, the profile can start from the measured value PV
and rejoin the setpoint SP1 according to the characteristics of the first segment.
Before a profile starts, the calculated setpoint is, by default, equal to SP0 (or PV depending on the profile configuration). In cases where the selected profile is changed,
the calculated setpoint can be updated by performing the Reset command on this
profile.
This functionality is also used to carry out profile loop iterations. To select these
functions, simply check the corresponding boxes in the Execution tab window.

Timing diagram
of operation

This timing diagram describes the operation of a bumpless start.


Setpoint

PV

SP0

Segment 1

74

Segment 2

Segment 3

Time

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Execution
configuration
window

This figure shows an example of a configuration screen that is used to configure the
bumpless, start up and loop iteration functionality.
TSX 57203 [RACK 0 POSITION 0 ]
Configuration
Designation: PROCESSOR TSX P 57203
Symbol:
Loop Controller:
Loop controller 5 - SPP_0
Name: SPP_0
PROFIL_1

DOP configuration

Function:
Setpoint programmer

PROFIL_2

Execution
Segments
Start:
Setpoint
SP_0: 10.0
Process value (bumpless)

Task:
MAST

Segmentation:
16-16-16

PROFIL_3
Number of segments:
Execute
3
Execute to infinity
Resume at segment no.:

16

on 16

times
1

Bumpless

PV
100.0

0.0

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

75

Introduction to loop controllers

Executing a profile
At a Glance

A profile can be:


l executed once,
l reproduced a certain number of times,
l continuously relooped.
The number of repetitions is set in the word NB_RT_PFi whose limits are 1 and
32767.
Note: the first loop iteration segment is not necessarily the first of the profile; its
configuration is carried out in the configuration screen, in the Execution tab. The
point is to be able to define, for a given profile, segments which will only execute
once on start up (initialization segments).

How to launch a
profile execution
command

76

The following table indicates the steps to follow to launch the execution of a profile
using a software command.
Step

Action

Assign the value of the command to the word %MWxy.i.7.


Note: the list of commands is given in the following table.

Indicate the number of the profile concerned in the double word %MDxy.i.8 (1
to 6).

Launch the command WRITE_CMD %CHyx.i.


Note: transmission of this command is done by explicit exchange (See Introduction, p. 298).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Profile execution
commands

Only one profile can be launched and executed at any given moment. The following
table shows the commands corresponding to the hexadecimal value assigned to the
word %MWxy.i.7.
Command

Hexadecimal value

Comment

START

16#0002

Triggers execution of the selected profile.

STOP

16#0003

Stops execution of the selected profile.

RESET

16#0001

Reinitializes the setpoint programmer and


makes it await START.

NEXT

16#0006

Jumps to the following segment.

BACK

16#0007

Jumps to the previous segment.

HOLD

16#0004

Freezes setpoint evolution and time lapse.

DEHOLD

16#0005

Unfreezes the profile in progress.

HOLD_PG

16#0008

Inhibits the guaranteed dwell time function on


the profile in progress.

DEHOLD_PG

16#0009

Activates the guaranteed dwell time function on


the profile in progress.

Conditions of
execution

The commands have conditions of execution:


l the RESET command is always accepted,
l the START command is only accepted if the programmer is running,
l the NEXT and BACK commands are refused if the profile is not frozen,
l the STOP command is refused if the programmer is in initialization mode,
l the HOLD_PG and DEHOLD_PG commands are refused if the function is not
used.

Control via the


master screen

Each profile can be controlled from its master screen, using the command buttons
below.

HOLD_PG/DEHOLD_PG
NEXT
BACK
RUN
INIT

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

HOLD

STOP

77

Introduction to loop controllers

How to link a setpoint programmer to a control loop


Procedure

The steps in the following table show how to associate a setpoint programmer to a
control loop.
Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration via the application browser.

Double click on the Loop block for the processor.

Select a loop controller.

Select Choose the required function.


Result: this type of screen appears:
LOOP 0
Loop
Loop parameters
Measurement
Setpoint
Loop controller
Feed Forward
Output 1

78

Standard
Hot/Cold
Yes
Analog

Functions
Scale
Limiter
Velocity limiter
Tracking

Parameters
Low input scale (phy)
High input scale (phy)

0.0
100.0

Select Programmer as the type of setpoint.

Enter as the setpoint input address (SP1 in the block schema) the output address of the setpoint programmer, that is %MFxy.i.20, where i is the number of
the loop controller selected as the setpoint programmer.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

Parameters of the setpoint programmer


Internal
parameters

Table of internal function parameters.

Meaning

Type of data

Variation range

Default value

R/W

Number of reiterations of pro- NB_RT_PFi


file number i

Word

0/32767

R/W

Value of the guaranteed dwell THLD_PFi


time threshold of profile number i

Floating point

0.0/3.4 E38

0.0

R/W

Value of initial setpoint of pro- SPO_PFi


file number i

Floating point

-3.4 E38/3.4 E38

0.0

R/W

Setpoint to be reached by
segment number i

SPi

Floating point

-3.4 E38/3.4 E38

0.0

R/W

Value of the time or speed for


segment number i

VALi

Floating point

-3.4 E38/3.4 E38

0.0

R/W

Variation range

Default value

R/W

Output
parameters

Symbolization

Table of output function parameters.

Meaning

Symbolization

Type of data

Current number of profile

CUR_PF

Word

0/32767

Number of current segment

SEG_OUT

Word

0/32767

Number of current iteration

CUR_ITER

Word

0/32767

Value of calculated setpoint

SP

Floating point

-3.4 E38/3.4 E38

Value of total time elapsed (in- TOTAL_TIME


cluding frozen time)

Floating point

0.0/3.4 E38

Value of ime elapsed on the


segment in progress (including frozen time)

Floating point

0.0/3.4 E38

0.0/3.4 E38

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

CUR_TIME

79

Introduction to loop controllers

Operation initialization and monitoring


How the
initialization
works

On initialization, there is a coherence check on the configuration entered. If there is


a problem with the configuration, the setpoint programmer indicates the error and
remains in initialization state.

Operation of
execution check

The two serious faults checked by the process value processing are parameter errors (not written in floating point format) and internal calculation errors (division by
zero, overshoot, etc.).
If

Then

an error in the calculation of the setpoint has been detected

the result of the setpoint is frozen

the error disappears

normal status is resumed.

a ramp has two identical setpoints

a warning is displayed, calculation of the setpoint


continues to be performed. There is an immediate
switch to the next segment if the programmer is on
the faulty segment.

a ramp has a rising or falling speed of a warning is displayed, calculation of the setpoint
zero (0.0)
continues to be performed. The calculated setpoint is
frozen if the programmer is on the faulty segment.
a dwell has two distinct setpoints

a warning is displayed, calculation of the setpoint


continues to be performed. There is a rise or a fall depending on the setpoint values if the programmer is
on the faulty segment.

the guaranteed dwell time is configured with a threshold value of 0.0

a warning is displayed, calculation of the setpoint


continues to be performed. Processing of the guaranteed dwell time is suppressed if the programmer is on
the faulty segment.

l When the setpoint programmer is on the faulty segment, an additional warning is


displayed with the following message: "Error on current segment".

l Caution, for these warnings to be displayed, it is imperative that the execution


time for each segment is greater than the execution time of the PLC task.

80

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Introduction to loop controllers

4.5

Global parameters of control loops

Description of the global parameters of process control loops


At a Glance

Some of the general parameters associated with the control channels can be
classed in two categories:
l parameters linked to loop execution,
l parameters which characterize the process control loop.

Execution
parameters

This table describes control loop execution parameters.


Parameter

Description

Task

The process control channels must be assigned to a PLC task, either


MAST or FAST. The MAST task is selected by default, the FAST task
must be selected when you want to improve the sampling speed and
execution priority.

Sampling period

This is the processing period of the loop controller in automatic mode.


The default value is 0.3 seconds. This value must be a modulo of the
task period. Otherwise, the process control processing period will be
to the nearest modulo.
Example: T_MAST = 0.1 s, T_ECH = 0.124 s T_ECH true = 0.1 s
If

Then

the sampling period is less than the


task period

the true sampling period is automatically fixed to that of the


task period.

Period calculations are made taking into account the true value of
T_ECH. If the task processing execution time exceeds the theoretical
period, the %S19 bit shows this error.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

81

Introduction to loop controllers

Instrumentation
parameters

82

This table describes process control loop instrumentation parameters.


Parameter

Description

Name

This name is included in the constants (%KW) and can be given to each
loop. It is made up of a maximum of eight characters and is automatically
retrieved by the runtime screens dedicated to controlling the XBTs.

Unit

This parameter, made up of a maximum of 6 characters, is included in the


constants (%KW). These characters define the process control loop unit
(Example: DEGRE). This parameter is retrieved automatically by the runtime screens dedicated to controlling the XBTs.

Application ID

This parameter is used to identify the process control loop configuration. To


check their authenticity, these application IDs can be compared with each
other. They are a digital representation of the configuration constants of the
loop.

High scale
Low scale

These thresholds define the physical scale in which the loop exerts its control. The upstream branch calculations (process value and setpoint) are
both set to the same scale.
Note: in the setpoint branch there is a scale function which gives the scale
range of the variable defined when the setpoint was input. This function is
useful when process loops are chained to produce a cascade. By default,
this scale must be identical to the physical scale defined by the loop.
Note: it is also possible to set the output branch (See Output scaling, p.
169) to a specific scale.

Double word
"order of command"

The order of command double word (See Double word "Order of Command", p. 300) is used to manage the loop operation. It replaces the use of
the WRITE_CMD function. For the first 16 bits, this double word is identical
to the status word of the process control loop.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

At a Glance
Subject of this
Chapter

This chapter describes the calculation functions of the different processing branches:
l Functions of the process value branch,
l Functions of the setpoint branch,
l Functions of the Feed forward branch,
l Functions of the loop controller branch,
l Functions of the output branch.

Whats in this
Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Sections:


Section
5.1

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic
Functions of the process value branch

Page
85

5.2

Functions of the setpoint branch

101

5.3

Feed forward branch functions

113

5.4

Functions of the loop controller branch

120

5.5

Functions of the output branch,

160

83

Calculation functions

84

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

5.1

Functions of the process value branch

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section describes the calculation functions of the process value processing
branch:
l Input format,
l Filter,
l Square root,
l Function generator,
l Scaling,
l Scale limiter,
l Alarms on level,
l Totalizer.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic

Page

Input format

86

First order filtering

88

Square root

90

Function generator

91

Scaling

94

Scale limiter

95

Level alarms

96

Totalizer

98

85

Calculation functions

Input format
Description

The "input format" function is used solely for a standard type process value. It provides the gross value of the analog input of the loop. For this, you must configure the
format to comply with the type of analog input channel.
Two range formats are possible:
l Unipolar: 0 to 10000 (selection by default),
l Bipolar: -10000 to +10000.

Process value
input address

You must define the process value input address on the on the PL7 process control
configuration screen. For a standard type process value, this must be an %IW input
word or an internal %MW word.
The input address is entered in the graphic section of the screen:
TSX 57303 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]
Configuration
Designation: PROCESSOR TSX P 57303
Symbol:
Loop Controller:
Loop Controller 4 LOOP0
LOOP 0
Loop
Loop parameters
Process value

DOP configuration

Function:
Process loop

Standard

PV
%MW1
SP1

Function
parameters

Parameters
Range

Functions
Format
Filter

Unipolar

OUT 1
%MW6

P
I

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Process value /
input

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

%IW
%MW

-32768 / 32767

Internal parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Range

PV_UNI_BIP

%KW bit

0 (Unipolar)

Output parameter:

86

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value R/W

Input enabled

PV_SIM

Word

-32768 / 32767

R/W

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Operation
monitoring

If you do not enter the input address, the value read is the simulation value. This value is initially at 0.

For an external
process value

For an external type process value, the "input format" function is not used, because
this is directly of integer type. This input is then recopied into the process value floating variable (PV) on entering the loop controller.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

87

Calculation functions

First order filtering


Description

This function performs first order filtering with a time constant T. The transfer function of the filer is as follows:
FILT_OUT = GAIN_FILT x

1
1 + pT_FILT

x PV_SIM

avec :
PV_SIM : Valeur dentre de la fonction
T_FILT : Constante de temps
FILT_OUT : Rsultat de la fonction
p : Oprateur de Laplace
GAIN_FILT : Coefficient de proportion
This first order filter is applied directly to the input process value.
Value of
PV_SIM and FILT_OUT

GAIN_FILTxPV_SIM
FILT_OUT

Time
T_FILT

88

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Function
parameters

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Input enabled

PV_SIM

Word

-32768 / 32767

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default val- R/W


ue

Filtering time
(ms)

T_FILT

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Gain

GAIN_FILT

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

1.0

R/W

Output parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Output value

FILT_OUT

Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38

Default
value

R/W

Note: If the function is not selected, the filter output value is the same is as its input
value.

Operation
monitoring

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management
of the process value branch. If the time constant is negative, its value is set at 0.0.

89

Calculation functions

Square root
Description

This function calculates the square root of a numerical size. The square root extract
is typically used to linearize an output process value produced by a deprimogenous
unit
The function performs the following calculation:
OUT = 100
OUT = 0

Function
parameters

FILT_OUT

if FILT_OUT > 0
if FILT_OUT < 0

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Function input FILT_OUT

Type

Limits

Default
value

R/W

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Default
value

R/W

Output parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Output value

SQRT_OUT

Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38

Note: If the function is not selected, the value of its output is the same as its input
value.

Operation
monitoring

90

There is no specific check dedicated to this function. The monitoring of the parameters is integrated into the error management of the process value branch.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Function generator
Description

The generator corrects the non-linear readings of the process value input signal.
Correcting this non-linearity is done via 7 linear adjacent segments, in variable increments, defined by the coordinates of their points.
The function also performs a scaling which is exclusive to the process value scaling
function, described below.
The output is calculated by the linear interpolation between the 2 points whose abcissae contain the input parameter value.
PV = f(x) = {(X1,Y1), , (X7,Y7)}
where:
X1 = 0 or -10000 and Y1= PV_INF (low limit of the loop scale),
X7 = 10000 et Y7= PV_SUP (high limit of the loop scale).
Function generation diagram:
PV

E7_OUT
E5_OUT, E6_OUT
PV_SUP
E4_OUT

E2_OUT, E3_OUT

PV_INF
0 or
-10000

E2_IN E3_IN E4_IN


E5_IN

E6_IN

E7_IN 10000

Outside the input scale, it is possible using configuration to extrapolate or limit the
value of the measurement value calculated on the process value scale.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

91

Calculation functions

Parameters

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Function input SQRT_OUT

Type

Limits

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Default value

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default
value

R/W

Extrapolation

EXTRAPOL

Bit constant

0 (no)

Abcissa 1

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0 or
-1000.0

Abscissa 2

E2_IN

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

1428.0

R/W

Abscissa 3

E3_IN

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

2857.0

R/W

Abscissa 4

E4_IN

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

4285.0

R/W

Abscissa 5

E5_IN

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

5714.0

R/W

Abscissa 6

E6_IN

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

7143.0

R/W

Abscissa 7

E7_IN

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

8571.0

R/W

Abscissa 8

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

10000.0

Coordinate 1

PV_INF

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Coordinate 2

E2_OUT

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

14.28

R/W

Coordinate 3

E3_OUT

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

28.57

R/W

Coordinate 4

E4_OUT

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

42.85

R/W

Coordinate 5

E5_OUT

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

57.14

R/W

Coordinate 6

E6_OUT

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

71.43

R/W

Coordinate 7

E7_OUT

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

85.71

R/W

Coordinate 8

PV_SUP

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Output parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Process value PV

Type

Limits

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Default value

R/W

Note: Parameters PV_INF and PV_SUP are defined within the global parameters
of the loop.

92

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Operation
monitoring

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

The monitoring of the parameters is integrated into the error management of the process value branch.
The coordinates of the abcissae must be ascending. For example, if Ej+1_IN <
Ej_IN, a warning message is displayed. Nonetheless the calculation is done with the
current parameters.

93

Calculation functions

Scaling
At a Glance

94

The process value branch is scaled automatically from the global parameters of the
loop: PV_INF and PV_SUP (See Description of the global parameters of process
control loops, p. 81).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Scale limiter
Description

This function is used to limit the process value in relation to the physical scale defined for the process control loop.
If this function is activated, the scaling is only done in the range PV_INF to PV_SUP.
Outside of this range, the output is limited to the scale values.
Value on limiter output:
PV on limiter output
PV_SUP

PV

PV_INF
Process value
PV_INF

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

PV PV_SUP

95

Calculation functions

Level alarms
Description

This function monitors the progress of the process value by comparing its value to
the 4 thresholds PV_LL, PV_L, PV_H and PV_HH.
Each alarm possesses an associated status bit.
These alarms are controlled by a fixed hysteresis of 1% in relation to the scale defined in the global parameters of the loop.
Alarms for crossing threshold PV_H or PV_L:
PV
PV_H
Hyst (1%)

t
STS_PV_H

t
PV

Hyst (1%)
PV_L
t
STS_PV_L

96

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Parameters

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Process value PV

Type

Limits

Default
value

R/W

Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38

Default
value

R/W

5.0

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Very low
threshold

PV_LL

Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38

Low threshold PV_L

Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38

5.0

R/W

High threshold

PV_H

Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38

95.0

R/W

Very high
threshold

PV_HH

Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38

95.0

R/W

Output parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default
value

R/W

Very low limit

STS_PV_LL_LIM

Bit

Low limit

STS_PV_L_LIM

Bit

High limit

STS_PV_H_LIM

Bit

Very high limit STS_PV_HH_LIM

Bit

Or alarms (*)

Bit

STS_ALARMS

(*) Or bit logic of alarms upon crossing threshold and alarms on deviation.
Operation
monitoring

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

The monitoring of the parameters is integrated into the error management of the process value branch.

97

Calculation functions

Totalizer
Description

This function includes the input value (typically a negative) according to time, and
returns a cumulative (typically a volume).
For this, it uses a partial internal accumulator Acc which includes the PV value and
is automatically reset to 0 each time it reaches an adjustable threshold THLD.
The number of resets is recorded in order to enable the recomposing of the global
cumulative OUT_TOT.

Function
principle

On each execution the accumulator Acc and the cumulative OUT_TOT are calculated using the algorithm:
Acc(new) = Acc(old) + PV. DT
SI Acc(new) >= THLD ALORS
Acc(new) = Acc(new) - THLD
CptInit = CptInit + 1
FINSI
OUT_TOT = CptInit x THLD + Acc(new)
where:
CptInit = number of resets
DT = task period
ACC (old) = value of accumulator Acc on the previous cycle

Adjusting the
integration
threshold THLD

Generally, integration threshold value corresponds to an easily determined process


characteristic (the capacity of a tank, for example). During a cycle, a status bit is set
to 1 each time the partial accumulator reaches the integration threshold.
The function can also be used to integrate small input value, even when the result
of the integration is very large. In this case, the values to be integrated may become
negligible to the accumulated value and are therefore no longer taken into consideration.
To avoid this, we advise you to limit the accumulator to a threshold THLD, so that
the value to be integrated is never negligible in relation to this partial accumulator.
When the threshold THLD is equal to 0, the function does not integrate a value and
the function remains fixed.

Time Base

In order to integrate the new process value, the relationship between the cumulative
value and the PV value must be less than 109.

98

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Associated
commands

Two commands are associated to the function:


l Reset: the OUT_TOT function output is set to 0, as are all the internal variables
(following a phase change in production, for example).
l Hold: integration is paused. The function output retains its former value.
In this mode the user can modify the cumulative value OUT_TOT, prompting a
new calculation of the internal variables. This allows the cumulative value to be
recalibrated (after an automation stop, for example).

Timing graph

Totalizer Function:
THLD

STS_THLD_TOT

OVER_TOT = 1

OVER_TOT = 1

OUT_TOT

THLD

Parameters

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Process value PV

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Default value

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Totalizing
threshold

THLD

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

1.0E38

R/W

%KW bit

Time Base (h) /

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Limits

99

Calculation functions

Output parameters:
Parameter

Operation
monitoring

100

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Totalizing val- OUT_TOT


ue

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

Threshold
reached

Bit

STS_THLD_TOT

The monitoring of the parameters is integrated into the error management of the process value branch.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

5.2

Functions of the setpoint branch

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section describes the calculation functions of the setpoint processing branch:
l Ratio,
l Selection,
l Scaling,
l Setpoint limiter,
l Tracking setpoint,
l Speed limiter

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic

Page

Ratio

102

Selection

104

Scaling

105

Setpoint limiter

107

Tracking setpoint

109

Speed limiter

111

101

Calculation functions

Ratio
Description

The Ratio function is used to carry out the report process control; in other words, to
assign a size to the value of the external input (control value).
The Ratio function calculates the loop controller setpoint according to the control value, by applying the following formula:
SP = RATIO x (SP Remote 1) + RATIO_BIAS
where:
SP Remote 1 = control value.
It is possible to define maximum and minimum limitations on the ratio reports.
Note: The size connected to the SP Remote 1 input is an external process value
rather than a setpoint.
Functional diagram of the Ratio function:
RATIO_MAX
RATIO

RATIO_BIAS
RATIO_MIN
+
X

Remote %MF

Parameters

SP

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Setpoint input /

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

%MFi

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Limits

Default value

R/W

Internal parameters:

102

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Ratio value

RATIO

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

1.0

R/W

Min ratio value

RATIO_MIN

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Max ratio value

RATIO_MAX

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Ratio bias

RATIO_BIAS

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Output parameters:
Parameter

Operation
monitoring

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Setpoint value SP

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Scale error

Bit

RATIO_WARN

Monitoring the parameters is integrated into the error management of the setpoint
branch.

103

Calculation functions

Selection
Description

The selection function is used to select a setpoint by comparing two numerical inputs. This selection can be:
l Max selection: the Remote 1 setpoint input is greater than the Remote 2 setpoint
input,
l Min selection: the Remote 1 setpoint input is smaller than the Remote 2 setpoint
input,
l "Switch" selection: the input is selected by an explicit command.
The switch is straightforward and is done without hysteresis.

Operation
monitoring

Monitoring this function is integrated into the error management of the setpoint
branch.

104

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Scaling
Description

This function is used to express a setpoint value in the process value scale defined
by PV_INF and PV_SUP (loop parameters).
It takes into account the input range of the setpoint (INP_INFRi, INP_SUPRi) and is
applied to the Remote 1 and Remote 2 setpoints.
The Scaling function performs the following calculation:
PV_SUP - PV_INF
SP = (IN - INP_INFRi) x
+PV_INF
INP_SUPRi - INP_INFRi
This function is optional and can be used to track two loops (to cascade two process
loops, for example).
In the absence of this function: INP_INFRi = PV_INF and INP_SUPRi = PV_SUP.
Functional diagram of the Scaling function:
10000

Process value

PV_SUP = 250C

0
Loop controller
INP_SUPRi = 250.0

Setpoint

INP_INFRi = 10.0

PV_INF = 10C

Changing the setpoint according to Remote setpoint input


SP
PV_SUP
SP

PV_INF
Remote Input
INP_INFRi %MF INP_SUPRi

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

105

Calculation functions

Parameters

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Setpoint input /

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

%MFi

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

R/W

Limits

Default value

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Low input
scale

INP_INFRi

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

High input
scale

INP_SUPRi

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Type

Default value

R/W

Output parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Setpoint value SP

Operation
monitoring

106

Limits

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management
of the setpoint branch. Si INP_INFRi >= INP_SUPRi, the setpoint output remains unchanged. An error bit is set to 1 in the status words.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Setpoint limiter
Description

When this function is activated, the scaling is only done in the range limits, defined
by the parameters SP_MIN and SP_MAX. When this function is not activated, the
setpoint value is limited to the physical scales of the regulation loop.
The interval (SP_MIN / SP_MAX) must be included in the interval (PV_INF /
PV_SUP).
The interval [SP_MIN / SP_MAX] must be in the interval (PV_INF / PV_SUP).
SP
PV_SUP
SP_MAX
SP

SP_MIN
PV_INF
INP_INFRi

Parameters

%MF INP_SUPRi

Remote
Input

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Setpoint value SP

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Default value

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Low setpoint
limit

SP_MIN

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

High setpoint
limit

SP_MAX

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Type

Default value

R/W

Output parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Setpoint value SP

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Limits

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

107

Calculation functions

Operation
monitoring

108

Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management
of the setpoint branch.
If SP_MIN >= SP_MAX, SP_MIN < PV_INF or SP_MAX > PV_SUP, the setpoint
output remains unchanged and a bit is set to state 1 in the status words.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Tracking setpoint
Description

In local setpoint mode and when the corrector is not in automatic mode, this function
prompts the tracking of the measurement by the local setpoint. This avoids bumps
on the corrector output when it returns to automatic mode.

Function not
configured

Change of the output when the function is not configured:


PV
SP
PV
SP

t
OUT
OUT
Setpoint change
t
Switch
into manual mode

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Switch
into Auto mode

109

Calculation functions

Function
configured

Change of the output when the function is configured:


PV
SP

PV
SP

t
OUT
OUT
Setpoint change
t
Switch
into manual mode

110

Switch
into Auto mode

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Speed limiter
Description

This function is used, when changing setpoint, to reach the new value while respecting a speed limit. Rising and descending speed limits can be different.
When the requested value on input is greater than the current value of the output
SP, the function increases the value of this output at the speed R_RATE, until the
value SP is equal to that requested.
If the value R_RATE is nil, there is no slope and SP is a direct copy of the input value.
When the input value changes as the slope is being generated the function attempts
to reach this new target.
Function diagram:
Setpoint

Rising ramp
RSP
Ramp:
falling

SP

Time

Parameters

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Setpoint value SP

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Default value

R/W

Internal parameters:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Rising speed
limit

R_RATE

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Descending
speed limit

D_RATE

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

111

Calculation functions

Output parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default
value

R/W

Limited setpoint value

SPEED_LM_OUT

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

R/W

Note: R_RATE and D_RATE at 0.0 mean there is no limit.


This function can be applied to the Remote setpoint and the local setpoint or only to
the local setpoint, according to the chosen configuration.
Operation
monitoring

112

Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management
of the setpoint branch.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

5.3

Feed forward branch functions

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section describes the calculation functions of the Feed forward processing
branch:
l Scaling,
l Leadlag,
l Alarm on deviation.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic

Page

Scaling

114

Leadlag

116

Alarm on deviation

118

113

Calculation functions

Scaling
Description

This function is used to change the scale of the digital value of the Feed forward input.
The Scaling function performs the following transfer function:
OUTFF = (FF - in_min) x

(OUTFF_SUP - OUTFF_INF)
+ OUTFF_INF
(in_max - in_min)

where:
in_min = 0 or -10000
in_max = 10000
Feed forward value:
High scale
(OUTFF_SUP)
OUTFF
Low scale
(OUTFF_INF)

Feed forward input


0 or -10000

Parameters

FF

10000

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Feed forward
input

%IW
%MW

-32768 / 32767

Limits

Default value

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Low scale

OUT_FF_INF

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

High scale

OUT_FF_SUP

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Default value

R/W

R/W

Output parameter:

114

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Feed forward
value

OUT_FF

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Operation
monitoring

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management
of the Feed forward branch.
There is no monitoring on the scale parameter order. The lower limit can have a
greater value than that of the upper limit.

115

Calculation functions

Leadlag
Description

The Leadlag function performs an advance/delay phase type transfer function. This
can be used to make a model of the influence of disruptions and therefore perform
a process control in an open loop by anticipation.
The Leadlag function performs the following transfer function:
OUTFF =

1 + p x T1_FF
1 + p x T2_FF

x FF

where:
FF = size of analog input: internal variable (disruption process value)
T1_FF = time constant corresponding to forward motion of phase
T2_FF = time constant corresponding to phase delay
p = Laplace operator
OUTFF = calculated size
For a graded input, the output response is a function of T1_FF and T2_FF (phase
advance or delay):
l If T1_FF > T2_FF, a phase advance is performed.
l If T1_FF < T2_FF, a phase delay is performed.
Phase advance

The Leadlag function is configured in phase advance (T1_FF > T2_FF): the output
OUTFF is ahead of the input.
Value of
OUTFF
Feed forward input
OUTFF

Time

116

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Phase delay

The Leadlag function is configured in phase delay (T1_FF < T2_FF): The output
OUTFF is behind the input.
Value of
OUTFF
Feed forward input

OUTFF (T1_FF = T2_FF/2)


OUTFF

OUTFF (T1_FF = 0)
Time

Parameters

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Feed forward
input

Limits

Default value

R/W

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Default value

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Time 1 (s)

T1_FF

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Time 2 (s)

T2_FF

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Default value

R/W

Output parameter:

Operation
monitoring

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Feed forward
value

OUTFF

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management
of the Feed forward branch.

117

Calculation functions

Alarm on deviation
Description

This function monitors changes in the deviation between the process value (PV) and
the setpoint (SP), by comparing these 2 values to 2 thresholds (high deviation
threshold and low deviation threshold).
These alarms are controlled by a fixed hysteresis of 1% of the full scale of the loop.
Note: The threshold values must be greater than the hysteresis (1%), otherwise
the alarms will still be active.
Alarm on deviation function diagram:
STS_DEV_H

Time

STS_DEV_L

Time

PV-SP
DEV_H

Hyst (1%)

Time

DEV_L

118

Hyst (1%)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Parameters

Input parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Measurement PV
value

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Setpoint value SP

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Type

Default value

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Limits

High deviation DEV_H


threshold

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

5.0

R/W

Low deviation
threshold

Floating point -3.4E38 / 0.0

-5.0

R/W

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

High limit

STS_DEV_H

Bit

Low limit

STS_DEV_L

Bit

Or alarms (*)

STS_ALARMS

Bit

DEV_L

Output parameters:
Parameter

Note: (*) Or alarms = Or bit logic on level alarms and alarms on dviation.

Operation
monitoring

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Monitoring the parameters is integrated into the error management of the Measurement branch.

119

Calculation functions

5.4

Functions of the loop controller branch

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section describes the calculation functions of the loop controller branch:
l ON OFF 2 states,
l ON OFF 3 states,
l PID,
l Model loop controller,
l Autotuning,
l Split Range,
l Heat/Cool,

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:


Topic
ON OFF 2 states loop controller

120

Page
121

ON OFF 3 states loop controller

123

PID

126

PID parameters

129

Detailed PID equations

132

Model loop controller

135

Model loop controller parameters

138

Autotuning

140

Autotuning parameters

142

Autotuning process

145

Autotuning operating modes

147

Diagnostics parameters

148

Aborting autotuning

149

Split Range

154

Heat/Cool

157

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

ON OFF 2 states loop controller


Description

The ON OFF 2 states loop controller is used to process simple process controls, for
which discrete 2 position monitoring is adequate.
Actuator control is performed according to process value/setpoint deviation in relation to 2 thresholds (a high threshold and a low threshold).
Functional diagram:
STS_RAISE1

PV-SP
ONOFF_H

Time

ONOFF_L

Parameters

Input parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Measurement PV
value

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Setpoint value SP

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Type

Default value

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Symbol

Limits

Low threshold ONOFF_L

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

-5.0

R/W

High threshold

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

5.0

R/W

ONOFF_H

121

Calculation functions

Output parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Command
status

STS_RAISE1

Bit

Auto_Manu
State

STS_M_A

Bit

Command

Bit

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Process value DEV


/ Setpoint deviation

Process value /
Setpoint
deviation

As soon as the Process value/Setpoint deviation (DEV = PV SP) becomes smaller


than the low threshold ONOFF_L, the logic output passes to state 1. If the deviation
starts to increase again, it must pass the threshold ONOFF_H for the output to pass
to state 0.
STS RAISE1
SP

%M, %Q

DEV_L

DEV_H

PV

Operating modes

The ON OFF 2 states loop controller has two operating modes:


l Automatic mode: the output is calculated by the loop controller.
l Manual mode: the loop controller does not set the output. You can directly modify
the value of the variable connected to the output.
On a cold start the output in manual mode is at state 0.

Operation
monitoring

An error in execution is signaled in the following cases:


l A non-floating input data item is detected on one of the parameters.
l A problem appears in the floating-point calculation.
l Low threshold > 0.
l High threshold < 0.
In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The regulation loop output is frozen and the faults are signaled in the status words.

122

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

ON OFF 3 states loop controller


Description

The ON OFF 3 states loop controller is used to process simple process controls, for
which discrete 3 position monitoring is adequate.
Control of the 2 actuators is performed according to the position of process value/
setpoint deviation in relation to 2 thresholds (a high threshold and a low threshold).
This threshold management integrates a parameterized hysteresis. This loop controller can, for example, be used to regulate, as discrete a heat /cool process.
For more complex process controls, it is preferable to use a PID loop controller.
Functional diagram:
STS_ RAISE1

STS_ LOWER1

DEV = PV - SP
ONOFF_H
HYST
Time

HYST
ONOFF_L

Parameters

Input parameters:
Parameter

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Process value PV

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Setpoint value SP

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

123

Calculation functions

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Low threshold ONOFF_L

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

-5.0

R/W

High threshold

ONOFF_H

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

5.0

R/W

Hysteresis

HYST

Floating point ONOFF_L /


ONOFF_H

0.0

R/W

Type

Default value

R/W

Output parameters:
Parameter

Operating modes

Symbol

Limits

Process value DEV


/ setpoint deviation

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

OUT1 command status

STS_RAISE1

Bit

OUT2 command status

STS_LOWER1

Bit

Auto_Man

STS_M_A

Bit

Command
value

OUT1

Bit

Command
value

OUT2

Bit

The ON OFF 3 states loop controller has two operating modes:


l Automatic mode: the STS_LOWER1 and STS_RAISE1 outputs are calculated by
the loop controller.
l Manual mode: the loop controller does not set the outputs. You are able to modify
directly the value of the variable connected to the STS_LOWER1 et
STS_RAISE1 outputs.
Operating modes and associated commands:
STS_RAISE1

SP

ONOFF_L

ONOFF_H

%M,%Q

HY
%M,%Q

PV
STS_LOWER1

124

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Operation
monitoring

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

An error in execution is signaled in the following cases:


l A non-floating input data item is detected on one of the parameters.
l A problem appears in the floating point calculation.
l Low threshold > 0.
l High threshold < 0.
In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The regulation loop output is frozen and the faults are signaled in the status words.

125

Calculation functions

PID
Description

The PID function executes a PID algorithm with a mixed (serial / parallel) or parallel
structure. It has the following functions:
l Calculation of proportional, integral and derivative actions in incremental or absolute format.
l Antisaturation of the integral action.
l Direct or inverse action.
l Derivative from the process value or from the deviation.
l Parametering of the transient gain of the derivative.
l Integral band
l Feed forward action to compensate for interference.
l Dead band on deviation.
l High and low limitation of the output signal.
l Limit of the gradient of the output signal.
l Output shifting, also called manual integrated.
l Selecting Automatic / Manual operating mode.
l Tracking Mode.
l Autotuning of the principle coefficients.

Transfer function

The PID transfer function depends on the structure used (mixed or parallel structure):
Mixed structure

1
td

p
OUT = kp 1 + ----------- + ---------------------------- IN
ti

p
td

1 + ------ p

kd
Parallel structure

1td p
------------------------------------OUT = kp +
+
IN
ti p
td-

----1
+

kd

= facteur dchelle =

OUT_SUP - OUT_INF
PV_SUP - PV_INF

Remarque : le paramtre utilisateur kp peut tre spcifi :


soit en chelle physique, alors kp = KP,
soit en chelle normalise, alors kp = KP

126

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

This diagram illustrates the principle of the mixed structure PID. It does not represent the implementation of the algorithm in incremental format.
OUTFF_INF

PV_SUP

DEV

Integral
action

SP
PV_INF

OUTFF

+
DBAND

+
Proportional action

ti, K,
INT_BAND

OUTFF_SUP

Functional
diagram of the
mixed PID

kp

Direct
Reverse +
+
OUTBIAS

Derivative
action

PV

td, kd, K
Manu / Auto
OUT_MAN
PV
Autotuning
SP
OUT_MAN
TR_I

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

OUT_SUP
Tracking

Limiter
OUT_INF

Gradient
limiter
OUTRATE

127

Calculation functions

Function
diagram of the
parallel PID

This diagram illustrates the principle of the PID parallel structure. It does not represent the implementation of the algorithm in incremental form.
OUTFF
Proportional
action
kp
PV_SUP

DEV
-

Integral
action

SP
PV_INF

OUTFF_INF

+
DBAND

OUTFF_SUP

+
Direct
Reverse +

ti, K, INT_BAND
OUTBIAS
Derivative
action

PV

td, kd, K
Manu / Auto
OUT_MAN
PV
Autotuning
SP
OUT_MAN
TR_I

128

OUT_SUP
Tracking

Limiter
OUT_INF

Gradient
limiter
OUTRATE

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

PID parameters
Mixed or parallel
structure

l When the loop controller has a mixed structure (default configuration), the pro-

Direct or inverse
action

The direction of the PID loop controller can be adapted to that of the actuator/process pair. The action can be defined in the opposite direction (default configuration)
or in the same direction.
If the action is direct a positive gap (PV SP) leads to an output increase.
If the action is inverse a positive gap (PV SP) leads to an output decrease.

Derivative action

The derivative action can act upon the process value or the gap.

Manu / Auto
switching

The absolute form of the algorithm allows Manu / Auto switching without bumps (See
Common operating modes for process control loops, p. 281).

Adjustment
Parameters

Internal parameters:

portional action is applied downstream of the integral and derived actions. The
gain K applied to these actions is then equal to kp (See PID, p. 126).
l When the loop controller has a parallel structure, the proportional action is applied parallel to the integral and derived actions. In this case the gain kp is not
applied to the integral and derived actions. The gain K is simply equal to the relation between the output scale and the process value scale.

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Lower limit of
the process
value scale

PV_INF

Default
value

R/W

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

High limit of the PV_SUP


process value
scale

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Lower limit of
the output
scale

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

High limit of the OUT_SUP


output scale

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Proportional
gain

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

1.0

R/W

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

OUT_INF

KP

Integration time TI
(s)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Limits

129

Calculation functions

Parameter

Dead band on
deviation

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default
value

R/W

Derivation time TD
(s)

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Derivative gain

KD

Floating point 1.0 / 3.4E38

10.0

R/W

Dead band on
deviation

DBAND

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Manual compensation of
the static gap

OUTBIAS

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Limiting the
output variation, in units s

OUTRATE

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Integral band

INT_BAND

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

The dead band on deviation (DBAND) is used to limit small recovery bumps to actuator to the function point. As long as the gap remains smaller than DBAND (in absolute value), the loop controller assumes it to be nil for its calculations.
Modified deviation

DEV
DBAND

Integral band

130

The integral band defines a zone (around the setpoint) in which the integral action
is calculated. When the process value / setpoint gap is greater than this band the
integral action is frozen.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

The integral band is limited to the proportional band (100 / Kp).


SP

Time
INT_BAND

BIAS on the
command

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

If the integral action is not used (Ti = 0), the use of BIAS on the PID command (OUTBIAS), is used to guarantee precision of the function point.
If Ti is different from 0, OUTBIAS is not taken into account.

131

Calculation functions

Detailed PID equations


Introduction

The PID algorithm uses the loop controller parameters (See PID parameters, p. 129)
as well as the intermediate variables and the following functions.
Intermediate variables and functions:
Variable/Function

Description

TermP

Proportional action value.

TermI

Integral action value.

TermD

Derived action value.

TermFF

Feed forward action value (disruption compensation).

(new)

Indicates a calculated value during the current execution of the


algorithm.

(old)

Indicates a value calculated during the previous execution of an


algorithm.

kp

Proportional gain. This user parameter can be specified either


on a physical scale or on a standardized scale:
Echelle physique : kp = KP
Echelle normalise : kp = . KP

Integral and derived action gains. The gain varies according to


the loop controller structure (mixed or parallel) and the presence of the proportional action:
Si la structure est mixte et kp <> 0, alors
K = kp
Si la structure est parallle ou kp = 0, alors
K = = facteur dchelle =

VAR

Direction

Variable used in the derived action formula. Its value depends


on the "Derived action" parameter:
l VAR = PV if the derived action is on the process value.
l VAR = DEV if the derived action is in the deviation.

l
l

132

OUT_SUP - OUT_INF
PV_SUP - PV_INF

Direction = +1 if action is direct. A positive deviation (PV SP) leads to an output increase.
Direction = -1 if action is inverse. A positive gap (PV - SP)
leads to an output decrease.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Absolute form of
the algorithm

Variable/Function

Description

T_ECH

Sampling period.

Fonction

(x(t)) = x(t) - x(t-1)

Limit function

Corrector output limit function.

If Ti = 0, the absolute form of the algorithm is used. The loop controllers are of type
P or PD.
OUT = TermP + TermD + TermFF + OUTBIAS
OUTD = OUTP(new) - OUTP(old)
OUT = limit (OUT) (not implemented)
TermP = sens kp DEV
td TermD ( old ) + sens K td kd ( VAR ( new ) VAR ( old ) )
TermD = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------kd dt + td

Incremental form
of the algorithm

If Ti <> 0, the incremental form of the algorithm is used. The loop controllers are of
type PID.
OUTD = TermP + TermI + TermD + TermFF
OUT = OUT(old) + OUTD(new), default mode
OUT = RCPY + OUTD(new), actuator position copy mode. This mode is used in certain special cases where the actuator position can be different from the calculated
output of the PID (SERVO output, cascaded loop or auto selector loop).
OUT = limit (OUT)
TermP = sens kp ( DEV )
td TermD ( old ) + sens K td kd ( VAR ( new ) VAR ( old ) )
TermD = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

kd dt + td

Antisaturation

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

The integral antisaturation mechanism is implicit in the algorithm.

133

Calculation functions

Pure integral
mode

The loop controller is able to work in pure integral mode (kp = 0). In this case the
equations are as follows:
OUTD = TermI + TermFF
OUT = OUT(old) + OUTD(new), default mode
OUT = RCPY + OUTD(new), actuator position copy mode
OUT = limit (OUT)
TermI = sens . . T_ECH/TI . DEV

Operation
monitoring

134

A running error is signaled in the following cases:


l A non-floating input datum is detected on one of the parameters.
l A problem appears in calculating in floating-point mode.
l The output scale is incoherent on cold start of the PLC (OUT_INF >= OUT_SUP).
In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the
faults are signaled in the status words.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Model loop controller


Description

The model loop controller is used where there are significant pure delays in relation
to the time constant of the process, a case which cannot be processed satisfactorily
by classic PID process control. The model loop controller is also useful for regulating
a non-linear process.
The model is first order + delay. Nevertheless, this loop controller can process any
stable or aperiodic process, whatever its order. The parameters to be given are:
l The static gain (delta process value/delta command ratio in open loop).
l The equivalent time constant (response time/3).
l The process pure delay value (estimated value).
l The time constant in open loop/time constant in closed loop ratio.

Diagram of the
principal

The diagram of principal of the model loop controller algorithm is as follows:


FF

SP

+
PV

1
Ks

OUTP

+
+

PROCESS

RCPY

DMO

Installing the
loop controller

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

MODEL
PROCESS

Installing the model loop controller is similar to installing a PID loop controller. The
adjustment of PID parameters KP, TI and TD being replaced by gain adjustment, the
time constant, the pure delay of the process model and the ratio of the time constants in open and closed loop.
The model loop controller has the same inputs and outputs as a PID (PV, RSP, FF,
OUTP). It also has the RCPY optional input (model external input) which can be
used to input the processs real input (the flow measured on output from a valve, for
example).

135

Calculation functions

Note: The DMO model output is not directly comparable to the PV process value.
At this level, the model does not take into account Ks static gain and possible compensation (BIAS).

Functions

The functions other than the command calculation are identical to those of the PID:
l Direct or inverse action.
l Feed forward action to compensate for disruptions.
l Dead band on deviation.
l High and low limit of the output signal.
l Limit of the output gradient.
l Selecting Automatic / Manual operating mode.
l Tracking Mode.
l Autotuning of the main coefficients.

Delay
management

In the processs used by this loop controller, the delay is either:


l Variable (transfer of matter according to the flow in a circuit, speed of the transport base, for example).
l Very large.
These two cases are processed using a register (buffer) of size which can be parameterized. According to the size of this register, it will be possible to sample either
all the sampling periods, one period in two, or one period in three etc.
It is possible to increase or decrease the delay T_DELAY during the execution of the
program. The new delay is applied instantly, as long as it is compatible with the size
of the register. The sampling period of the delay remains unchanged.
If the value of T_DELAY becomes too large compared to the size of the register it
becomes impossible to store enough input values to reach the required delay, if the
sampling is done in the same period. Therefore, the sampling period of the delay is
recalculated and the output is only valid after a time equal to the new delay. To avoid
this problem, you are advised to set the size of the register, taking into account the
possible increases in the delay T_DELAY.
If the delay decreases by default the sampling does not change. All the same, it is
possible to order a new sampling calculation if necessary.
In the case of a dynamic modification of the task time or the sampling period, the
output is only valid after a time equal to the delay.
All dynamic modifications of T_DELAY between 0 s and 30 s is taken into account
immediately without changing the sampling of the register.
Example

136

Sampling period

T_ECH = 300 ms

Size of delay register

50

Delay

T_DELAY = 25 s

Therefore, the delay register is sampled every 2 T_ECH

50 x 2 x 0,3 = 30 s > 25 s
TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Function
diagram

The function diagram of the model loop controller is as follows:


OUT_SUP
RCPY
Limiter

OUTFF
OUTFF_INF

OUT_INF

OUTFF_SUP
Model
Feed forward
1
1+OL_TIME.p

-T_DELAY.p
e

PV_SUP

DEV

1/Ks

SP
PV_INF

Direct
Reverse +

1+OL_TIME.p
OL_TIME .p
1+
CL_PERF

DBAND
PV

Manu / Auto
OUT_MAN
PV
Autotuning
SP
OUT_MAN
TR_I

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

OUT_SUP
Tracking

Limiter
OUT_INF

Gradient
limiter
OUTRATE

137

Calculation functions

Model loop controller parameters


Direct or inverse
action

The direction of the PID loop controller can be adapted to that of the actuator torque
/ process. The action can be defined in the opposite direction (default configuration)
or in the same direction.

Adjustment
Parameters

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Lower limit of
the output
scale

OUT_INF

High limit of
the output
scale

OUT_SUP

Default value

R/W

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Static gain of KS
the process in
open loop

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

1.0 (*)

R/W

Time constant OL_TIME


of the process
in open loop

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

1.0 (*)

R/W

Ratio of natural time constant (open


loop) to desired time
constant
(closed loop)

CL_PERF

Floating point 0,1 / 3.4E38

1.0

R/W

Current pure
delay of the
process(s)

T_DELAY

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Dead band on DBAND


deviation

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Command
copy input
(optional)

RCPY

%IW, %MW

-32768 / 32767

Model output
(optional)

DMO

%MF

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

%MF:n (**)

Delay register /
(obligatory)

138

Limits

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

(*) KS and OL_TIME cannot take the value 0 (inconsistent value). They will be
forced to the value 1.0.
(**) n corresponds to the size of the register and must be greater than 0.
Dead band on
deviation

Dead band on deviation is identical to the PID loop controller (See PID parameters,
p. 129).

Output
parameters

You can access the value of the command OUT_MAN, but also the delayed output
value of the DMO model.

Limits

The integrating processes are not managed by the model loop controller.
You can use a Servo drive without output copy because the model loop controller
does not implement an incremental algorithm (the command value is calculated and
then the command variation).

Operation
monitoring

A running error is signaled in the following cases:


l A non-floating point input data item is detected on one of the parameters.
l A problem appears in the floating-point calculation.
l The output scale is inconsistent on cold start of the PLC (OUT_INF >=
OUT_SUP).
In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the
faults are signaled in the status words.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

139

Calculation functions

Autotuning
Description

The autotuning function is used to gain time during the start-up of an installation by
guaranteeing a stable adjustment.
The autotuning algorithm is based on a method of Ziegler-Nichols type:
l Analysis of the procedure for checking if this is first order with delay. The length
of this analysis is 2.5 times the response time of open loops.
l Calculation of PID adjustment parameters (KP, TI, TD) or those of the model loop
controller (KS, T1, T_DELAY). The range of set parameters is moduled by performance criteria in order to prioritize the response time to disruptions or stability.

Process types

The algorithm processes the following process types:


l Single input and single output processes.
l Naturally stable processes or integrators.
l Asymmetric processes in the limits allowed by the PID algorithm.

Autotuning types

There are two possible autotuning types: warm or cold autotuning. The first phase
of autotuning is the same for each of these: Noise and stability test of the process of
length 0.5x AT_TMAX during which the outputs remain constant. The following
phases depend on the type of autotuning. The selection is made automatically by
the algorithm.

Cold autotuning

Cold autotuning is performed if the deviation between process value and setpoint
exceeds 40% and if the process value is less than 30%. Two scales in the same direction are then applied to the loop controller output (OUT_MAN). Each scale has a
length of AT_MAX.

140

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

When autotuning is complete, the loop assumes its previous operating mode.
SP
PV
AT_MAX

AT_MAX

AT_MAX/2
OUT_MAN

STS_AT_RUNNING

Time
Mode
Programmed
or Manual mode

Warm autotuning

Adjustment mode

Automatic
or Manual mode

If cold autotuning conditions are not fullfilled, warm autotuning is performed. A scale
is applied to the loop controller output (OUT_MAN), then an inverse scale. Each
scale has a length of AT_MAX.
When autotuning is complete, the loop assumes its previous operating mode.
AT_MAX/2

AT_MAX

AT_MAX

SP
PV
OUT_MAN
STS_AT_RUNNING

Mode
Programmed
or Manual mode

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment mode

Automatic
or Manual mode

141

Calculation functions

Autotuning parameters
Internal
parameters

Internal parameters of the autotuning function are as follows:


Parameter

Symbol

Type

Size of command division


(%)

AT_STEP

Duration of
the scale (s)

AT_TMAX

Limits

Default value

R/W

Floating point -100.0 / 100.0

10.0

R/W

Floating point 4,0 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Criteria for au- AT_PERF


totuning performance

Floating point 0.0 / 1.0

0.5

R/W

Proportional
gain

KP

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

1.0

R/W

Integral time
(s) (*)

TI

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Derivation
time (s) (**)

TD

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Model gain
(***)

KS

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

1.0

R/W

Model time
constant (s)
(***)

T1

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Model delay
(s) (***)

T_DELAY

Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

(*) According to the loop controller used (PID or model loop controller).
(**) See PID loop controller (See PID, p. 126).
(***) See model loop controller (See Model loop controller, p. 135).
Output
parameters

142

For the output parameters, the range of variation (limits) and default value have no
object. Therefore, these columns have not been given in the table in order to make
it more readable.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Output parameters of the autotuning function are as follows:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter

Symbol

Type

R/W

Value before proportional co-efficient autotuning


or model gain

KP_PREV

Floating
point

Value before integral co- TI_PREV


efficient autotuning or
time constant model

Floating
point

Value before derived co- TD_PREV


efficient autotuning or
model delay

Floating
point

Autotuning in progress

STS_AT_RUNNING

Bit

Autotuning failed

AT_FAILED

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
interrupted

AT_ABORTED

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
parameter error

AT_ERR_PARAM

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
system error or power
failure

AT_ERR_PWF_OR_SYS_FAILURE

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
AT_ERR_SATUR
process value or actuator
saturation

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
AT_ERR_DV_TOO_SMALL
insufficient process value
deviation

Bit

Autotuning Diagnostics
AT_ERR_TSAMP_HIGH
sampling period too large

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
inconsistent response

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
AT_ERR_NOT_STAB_INIT
process value initially unstable

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
scale period too small

AT_ERR_DV_TOO_SMALL

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
process value noise too
high

AT_ERR_NOISE_TOO_HIGH

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
division period too large

AT_ERR_TMAX_TOO_HIGH

Bit

AT_ERR_INCONSISTENT_RESPONSE

143

Calculation functions

144

Parameter

Symbol

Type

R/W

Autotuning diagnostics
overshoot > 10%

AT_WARN_OVERSHOOT

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
minimum phase undershoot

AT_WARN_UNDERSHOOT

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
procedure too non-symmetrical

AT_WARN_UNSYMETRICAL_PLANT

Bit

Autotuning diagnostics
integrating process

AT_WARN_INTEGRATING_PLANT

Bit

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Autotuning process
Adjustment
mode

Analysis of the process is divided into 3 stages:


l Noise and stability analysis of the process.
l First analysis of the response to a step function which provides a first identification model. From this first estimate a filter is calculated to be used in the second
analysis.
l A second analysis of the response to a second step function, refined by using a
data filter. A full process model is thus obtained.
After each of these two analyses, a set of loop controller parameters to be adjusted
is calculated. The equations giving these loop controller parameters are based on
the gain and the ratio of response time to process delay.
If the difference between these two analyses is too great, the models estimate is
rejected and autotuning fails. The loop controller output is set back to its value before the start of autotuning.
On a robust level, the algorithm must be capable of supporting the gain and time
constant changes in a ratio 2, without losing its stability. The asymmetrical processes are supported as long as they follow these constarints. If this is not the case, an
error is signaled by the diagnostics.

Step function
parametering

The 2 step functions applied to the output during the autotuning process are characterized by 2 parameters:
l The duration of the step function AT_TMAX, which must be greater than 4 s.
l The amplitude of the step function AT_STEP, which must be greater than 1% of
the output scale (OUT_INF, OUT_SUP).
The function also checks that the output does not go beyond the output scale limits.
This checking is done as the autotuning starts.

Maximum
duration of the
step function

The maximum value of AT_TMAX is limited by the task cycle time into which the loop
is configured. This value, in seconds, can be configured to a maximum of 65.5 x
task cycle time (en ms).
For example, if the task MAST = 50 ms, AT_TMAX = 65.5 x 50 = 3275 seconds
maximum.

Parameter
values

As an indication, the following table gives the parameter values for some classic process control types:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Scheme type

AT_TMAX (s)

AT_STEP (%)

Liquid flow or pressure

5 - 30

10 - 20

Gas pressure

60 - 300

10 - 20

145

Calculation functions

Performance
criterion

Scheme type

AT_TMAX (s)

AT_STEP (%)

Level

120 - 600

20

Steam temperature or pressure

600 - 3600

30 - 50

Composition

600 - 3600

30 - 50

The loop controller adjustment can be done according to the performance criterion
value AT_PERF.
The AT_PERF parameter varies between 0 and 1, which means it is possible to prioritize stability for AT_PERF close to 0 or to obtain a more dynamic adjustment (and
therefore to optimize response time to disruptions) by pushing AT_PERF towards 1.
Note: The parameters AT_PERF, AT_TMAX et AT_STEP are unique to each process control channel. There is therefore more than one set of parameters for the 3
single, cascade or auto-selector loop controllers. Consequently, for one process
control channel, one autotuning operation can be activated and executed at a given
instant.

146

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Autotuning operating modes


Autotuning
commands

Different commands are used to drive the autotuning function:


l Starting autotuning (%MWxy.i.11 = 16#000E)
This command is used to start the autotuning process. It can be directly activated
from the autotuning function grid.
l Stopping autotuning (%MWxy.i.11 = 16#000F)
This command is used to stop the autotuning process. In this case the PID parameters are not modified and a diagnostic is performed.
l Return to the previous tuning event (%MWxy.i.11 = 16#0010)
This command is used to swap the current loop controller parameters with the
previous ones (KP_PREV, TI_PREV, TD_PREV). This command is not allowed
if an autotuning event is in progress.

Autotuning
operating modes

At the start of autotuning, the loop controller can be in automatic or manual mode.
When the autotuning begins, it passes into adjustment mode and the output keeps
the last imposed or calculated value. At the end of the autotuning:
l If it has succeeded, the loop reverts to its previous mode (automatic or manual).
l If the autotuning has failed, the output is initialized to the value from before the
autotuning, the adjustments are not done and the loop reverts to its previous
mode (automatic or manual).
The direction of loop controller action is checked and compared with models gain
sign. If there is incompatibility an error is signaled.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

147

Calculation functions

Diagnostics parameters
Autotuning
diagnostics

For different reasons the autotuning process can:


l not be started,
l be aborted during execution,
l fail by proposing a set of parameters (or not) according to the cause of failure.

Acknowledgment

The diagnostics message acknowledgement function is accessible from the PL7


screen or by the acknowledgement commands.
Note: The diagnostics message is unique to each process control channel. There
is only one message for the 3 loops of the 3 single loop controllers, or for the 2
loops of the Cascade and Auto-selector loop controllers.

Reasons for the


autotuning not
starting

The following errors cause the autotuning not to start:


l Parameter error (Bit 2: AT_ERR_PARAM)
The possible causes of a parameter error are as follows:
l Duration of division too small (AT_MAX < 4 s).
l Amplitude too small (AT_STEP < 1% of output scale).
l Impossible test protocol. If the current output + n times the size of the scale (n
= 1 for a hot autotuning and n = 2 for a cold autotuning) is outside the output
scale (OUT_INF, OUT_SUP), the test protocol will no longer be applicable.
STEP_AMPL must be set to a value compatible with the current function point.
l Incorrect sampling period (Bit 6 : AT_ERR_TSAMP_HIGH)
If the sampling period is too large in relation to the length of the scale (greater
than AT_TMAX/25), the analysis of the response will not be precise enough and
the autotuning is inhibited. This case is specific to very quick process controls
(AT_TMAX increasing the processs stabilization time by some seconds). TMAX
can therefore be increased, as the algorithm is not very sensitive to this parameter (in a ratio from 1 to 3) or adjust the sampling period.

Reasons for the


autotuning
being aborted

Several causes lead to the autotuning abort (See Aborting autotuning, p. 149).

148

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Aborting autotuning
Stopping after a
system fault

Bit 3: AT_ERR_PWF_OR_SYS_FAILURE
Autotuning is aborted if a system PLC event appears, not allowing the sequence to
progress completely. For example, disconnection will automatically stop the autotuning function when the power returns.

Saturation of the
process value

Bit 4: AT_ERR_SATUR
If the process value leaves the interval of the full scale (PV_INF, PV_SUP), autotuning is aborted and the loop controller reverts to its previous mode. Predicting the future process value even allows the autotuning to be stopped before the overflow
occurs (when a first model has been identified).

Insuffiecient
variation

Bit 5: AT_ERR_DV_TOO_SMALL
The amplitude of the step function is not large enough to cause a significant process
reaction. Therefore it is possible to increase AT_STEP.
PV

PV < 2%

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

149

Calculation functions

Inconsistent
response

Bit 7: AT_ERR_INCONSISTENT_RESPONSE
The process response is inconsistent (gains of different sign). This can be due to a
significant disruption, coupling with other loops, etc. The autotuning is stopped and
a diagnostic is generated.
PV

Noise too high

Bit 10: AT_ERR_NOISE_TOO_HIGH


The process reaction to the step function is not large enough in relation to the noise.
Filter the process value or increase AT_STEP
PV

150

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Duration of the
division
(AT_TMAX) too
short

Bit 9: AT_ERR_TMAX_TOO_SMALL
The response is not stabilized until the initial command returns. The calculated parameters are therefore false.
PV

Division test

Process reaction

Process value
initially not
stabilized

Bit 8: AT_ERR_NOT_STAB_INIT
Starting autotuning happens while the process value was not stabilized. If the process value variation is significant in relation to the division, the test results will be
false.
PV

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

151

Calculation functions

Duration of division (AT_TMAX)


too long

Bit 11: AT_ERR_TMAX_TOO_HIGH


AT_TMAX determines the taking into account frequency of the process values which
are used to calculate the co-efficients. The AT_TMAX must be between 1 and 5
times the process ascent time.
PV

Large overshoot
process

Bit 12: AT_WARN_OVERSHOOT


This bit is positioned in state 1 if the reaction to a command division prompts an excessive process value overshoot (greater than 10%). The process does not correspond to the models treated by the algorithm.

Non-minimum
phase process

Bit 13: AT_WARN_UNDERSHOOT


This bit is positioned in state 1 if the reaction to a command scale prompts a response inversion in its initial phase (undershoot greater than 10%). The process
does not correspond to the models treated by the algorithm.

Non-symmetrical process

Bit 14: AT_WARN_UNSYMETRICAL_PLANT


The process is non-symmetrical.
PV

152

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Integrating
process

Bit 15: AT_WARN_INTEGRATING_PLANT


Either it is an integrating process or AT_TMAX is too small and the process nonsymmetrical. The calculated co-efficients correspond to the integrating process. If
this is not the case, restart autotuning having increased AT_TMAX.
PV

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

153

Calculation functions

Split Range
Description

This function is useful if two actuators are used to cover the whole print range of the
adjustment spectrum. It is placed downstream of the loop controller.
The Split Range function also has the following functions:
l It manages overlaps as well as dead bandwidths between the two actuators.
l Manual command and a manual order (consistent with a single PID) can be used.
The Split Range function is used to manage analog outputs as well as servo drives
with copy. It cannot be used to manage servo drives without copy.
When this function is used, the loop controller output scale must be (0.100).

Function
parametering

Parametering the function defines the characteristics of each actuator, in other


words, the way in which the two outputs should vary between the two thresholds.
The output value varies in a linear fashion. Outside the two thresholds, output is limited to pre-set thresholds.
Commands

OUT1_SUP
OUT2_SUP

OUT2

OUT1

OUT2_INF
OUT2_TH1

OUT1_INF
0% OUT1_TH1

OUT1_TH2

OUT_MAN (%)
OUT2_TH2 100%

with OUTi_THj: output i threshold j

154

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Function
parameters

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default val- R/W


ue

Command value

OUT_MAN

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

R/W

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Value of OUT1
OUT1_INF
for OUT_MAN =
OUT1_TH1

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

OUT1_SUP
Value of OUT1
for OUT_MAN =
OUT1_TH2

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Value of OUT2
OUT2_INF
for OUT_MAN =
OUT2_TH1

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Value of OUT2
OUT2_SUP
for OUT_MAN =
OUT2_TH2

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Input value for


which OUT1 =
OUT1_INF

OUT1_TH1

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

0.0

R/W

Input value for


which OUT1 =
OUT1_SUP

OUT1_TH2

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

50.0

R/W

Input value for


which OUT2 =
OUT2_INF

OUT2_TH1

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

50.0

R/W

Input value for


which OUT2 =
OUT2_INF

OUT2_TH2

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

100.0

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Symbol

155

Calculation functions

Output parameters:
Parameter

Operation
monitoring

156

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Limiting the out- OUTRATE


put 1 variation in
%/s

Floating
point

0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Limiting the out- OUTRATE2


put 2 variation in
%/s

Floating
point

0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

A running error is signaled in the following cases:


l A non-floating input datum is detected on one of the parameters.
l A problem appears in a calculation in floating point mode.
In all cases, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the
faults are signaled in the status words. A (warning) fault is also signaled if the
OUT1_TH1, OUT1_TH2, OUT2_TH1 and OUT2_TH2 thresholds are not between 0
and 100%.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Heat/Cool
Description

This function is useful if two opposing actuators are used to cover the whole range
of the adjustment spectrum. It is placed downstream of the loop controller.
The Heat/Cool function also has the following operating processes:
l It manages overlaps as well as dead bandwidths between the two actuators.
l Manual command and a manual order (consistent with a single PID) can be used.
The Heat/Cool function is used to manage analog outputs as well as servo drives
with copy. It cannot be used to manage servo drives without copy.
When this function is used, the loop controller output scale must be (0.100).

Function
parametering

Function parametering defines the characteristics of each actuator, in other words,


the way in which the two outputs should vary between the two thresholds.
The output value varies in a linear fashion. Outside the two thresholds, the output is
limited to pre-set thresholds.
Output 1 manages the "cool" and output 2 manages the "heat".
Commands

OUT1_SUP
OUT2_SUP

OUT1
OUT2

OUT2_INF
OUT1_INF

OUT_MAN (%)
0% OUT1_TH1

OUT1_TH2 OUT2_TH1

OUT2_TH2 100%

with OUTi_THj: output i threshold j

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

157

Calculation functions

Function
parameters

Input parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Command value

OUT_MAN

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

R/W

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Value of OUT1 for OUT1_INF


OUT_MAN =
OUT1_TH1

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Value of OUT1 for OUT1_SUP


OUT_MAN =
OUT1_TH2

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Value of OUT2 for OUT2_INF


OUT_MAN =
OUT2_TH1

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Value of OUT2 for OUT2_SUP


OUT_MAN =
OUT2_TH2

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Input value for


which OUT1 =
OUT1_INF

OUT1_TH1

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

50.0

R/W

Input value for


which OUT1 =
OUT1_SUP

OUT1_TH2

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

0.0

R/W

Input value for


which OUT2 =
OUT2_INF

OUT2_TH1

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

50.0

R/W

Input value for


which OUT2 =
OUT2_INF

OUT2_TH2

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

100.0

R/W

Internal parameters:
Parameter

158

Symbol

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Output parameters:

Operation
monitoring

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Limiting the output 1 variation in


%/s

OUTRATE

Floating
point

0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

Limiting the output 2 variation in


%/s

OUTRATE2

Floating
point

0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

A running error is signaled in the following cases:


l A non-floating input datum is detected on one of the parameters.
l A problem appears in a calculation in floating point mode.
In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the
faults are signaled in the status words. A (warning) fault is also signaled if the
OUT1_TH1, OUT1_TH2, OUT2_TH1 and OUT2_TH2 thresholds are not between 0
and 100%.

159

Calculation functions

5.5

Functions of the output branch,

At a Glance
Subject of this
section

This section describes the calculation functions of the output processing path:
l Servo,
l PWM,
l Output scaling,
l Output format.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

160

Topic

Page

Servo

161

Operating process examples of the Servo function

164

PWM

167

Output scaling

169

Output limiter

171

Output format

173

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Servo
Description

This function is used to perform process control with the electric servo drives with or
without copy position. It uses the loop controllers digital output to generate 2 logic
outputs, RAISE and LOWER.
When this function uses the copy position, it performs a loop control of the actuator
position. When the copy position is not used, the loop controller and the associated
servo function perform a floating point process control.
If the servo function is used, the loop controller output scale must be (0, 100).

Function
parameters

Input parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default val- R/W


ue

Command value OUT_MAN

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

Command value OUTi


(*)

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

Upper stop

Bit

Lower stop

Bit

Copy position

Floating
point

0.0 / 3.4E38

Command variation value

OUTD

Floating
point

-100.0 / 100.0

(*) With Heat/Cool or Split Range


Internal parameters:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default val- R/W


ue

Opening time
(s)

T_MOTORi

Floating
point

0.0 / 3.4E38

10.0

R/W

Minimum time
(s)

T_MINIi

Floating
point

0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

161

Calculation functions

Output parameters:

Servo with copy


position (RCPY)

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Open command status

STS_RAISEi

Bit

Close command status

STS_LOWERi

Bit

The Servo function operates differently, depending on whether the copy position is
used or not.
When the copy position is used, the Servo function generates a binary RAISE or
LOWER command for each new OUT_MAN output value produced by the loop controller. The duration of this command is proportional to the deviation between the
loop controller command and the copy position value, which then performs a loop
control proportional to the actuator position.
Note: When the calculated period exceeds the loop sampling period (in automatic
mode) or the task cycle time (in other operating modes), this is not stored for the
next cycles.

Servo without
copy position

If copy position is not used, the Servo function generates a binary RAISE or LOWER
command for each new command variation value produced by the loop controller.
The duration of this command is proportional to the output variation from the OUTD
loop controller.
Note: When the calculated period exceeds the loop sampling period (in automatic
mode) or the task cycle time (in other operating modes), the remaining application
period is added onto the new period calculation. This enables it to be processed on
several cycles.
The Servo function associated to the loop controller is used to perform a floating
point process control. The algorithm does not use the loop controllers absolute output, but the output variation. The RAISE output (or LOWER, depending on the variation sign) is set at 1 for a length of time proportional to the valve opening time
(T_MOTOR) and the OUTD variation value.

162

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Pulse period

The pulse period (T_IMP) to be applied to the output is calculated with the following
principle:
l An initial theoretical value is given by the formula:
T_IMP = (OUT_MAN - RCPY) (%) x T_MOTOR (with copy position)
T_IMP = (T_IMP + OUTD) (%) x T_MOTOR (without copy position)
l In order not to generate pulses that are too short, pulses are limited to a minimum
time period T_MINI.
l When the pulse time calculation gives a value less than T_MINI, the Servo function does not generate a pulse but stores the value for the next calculation. This
enables correct processing where the output variations of a loop controller are insignificant but lasting.
l Without copy position, it is advisable to connect and use position stops in order
to prevent the algorithm from becoming saturated.

Actuator
opening time

T_MOTOR actuator opening time enables the function to adapt to different servo
drives.
Pulse time to be applied to RAISE or LOWER is proportional to the full scale actuator
opening time.

Minimum pulse
period

The minimum pulse period T_MINI is used to avoid generating pulses that are too
short, and generally harmful to actuators.
When the calculated pulse time to be applied to RAISE or LOWER is less than
T_MINI, the function does not generate a pulse. In all cases, every pulse started
lasts for at least the T_MINI period.

Position stops

When position stop is reached, the RAISE and LOWER outputs are set to 0. The
algorithm no longer takes into account the actions going in the direction of the stop.

Operation
monitoring

An error in execution is signaled in the following cases:


l A non-floating input data item is detected on one of the parameters.
l A problem appears in a calculation in floating point mode.
In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the
faults are signaled in the status words.
If T_MOTOR and T_MINI time parameters are negative, their value is forced to 0.0.
When the loop controller is in manual mode, its OUT_MAN output also controls the
Servo function outputs.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

163

Calculation functions

Operating process examples of the Servo function


Automatic mode
with position
copy

Operation in automatic mode with copy position.


T_MOTOR = 25 s, T_MINI = 1 s and sampling period = 4 s
OUT_MAN-RCPY deviation

20%

10%
-2%

-2%

RAISE

LOWER

For each step, the operating principle is as follows:

164

Step

Operating principle

The deviation between OUT_MAN and RCPY is 20%. A pulse of 5 s (25 s x


20%) is generated on the RAISE output.

The deviation is 10%. A pulse of 2.5 s (25 s x 10%) is generated on the Raise
output, without accounting for the second which remained from the previous
pulse.

The deviation is 2%, which would correspond to a pulse of 0.5 s (25 s x 2%) on
the LOWER output. As T_MINI equals 1 s, no pulse is generated (in contrast,
the 0.5 s duration is stored.

The deviation is always -2%. The corresponding pulse (0.5 s) is added to the
previously stored pulse (0.5 s) to give 1 s. As this duration is at least equal to
T_MINI, the pulse is therefore applied to the LOWER output.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Automatic mode
without position
copy

Operating in automatic mode without position copy.


T_MOTOR = 25 s and T_MINI = 1 s
OUTD

20%

22%
2%

2%
-24%

RAISE

1s

5s
LOWER

1s
4 5

In this case, the command variation value is taken into account each time the Servo
function is operated.
For each step, the operating principle is as follows:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Step

Operating principle

The PID output variation is +20%. A pulse of 5 s (25 s x 20%) is generated on


the RAISE output.

The PID variation is +2%, which would correspond to a pulse of 0.5 s. As this
pulse is less than T_MINI (=1 s.),it does not affect the outputs.

This second PID output variation is +2%. In order to be calculated, the function
adds this variation to the previous variation (which was below the minimum value), corresponding to a global variation of +4%. A pulse of 1 s (25 s x 4%) is
generated on the RAISE output.

The PID output variation is -24%. A pulse of 6 s (25 s x 24%) is generated on


the LOWER output.

Before completion of the following second, a further variation of +22% on the


PID output restores the system to a global variation of 2%. As this variation corresponds to a pulse of 0.5 s (below T_MINI), the function ends by carrying out
the minimum pulse of 1 s.

165

Calculation functions

Manual mode
without position
copy

166

In the case of operating in manual mode without copy position, the opening or
closing bit moves to 1 during a period of time which corresponding to the command
difference (proportional to period of opening time).
For example, T_MOTOR = 10 s. If the command moves from 30% to 40% then the
RAISE output = 1 during 1 s (10 s x (40%-30%)).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

PWM
Description

This function is used to control a discrete actuator in period modulation. The logic
output is set at 1 following a period proportional to the command calculated by the
PID and to the given period modulation. The cyclic ratio of this type of output is defined as being the output activity rate, meaning the time ratio when the output is active throughout the whole period. The cyclic ratio (expressed in %) of a PMW output
is therefore equal to the command calculated by the loop controller (expressed in
%).
When the PMW function is used, the loop controller output scale must be (0, 100).
(OUT_MAN/100)xT_ECH

T_PERIOD
T_ECH

Function
parameters

Input parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Command value

OUT_MAN

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

Command value
(*)

OUTi

Floating
point

0.0 / 100.0

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Floating
point

0.0 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

(*) In the case of Heat / Cool or Split Range


Internal parameter:
Parameter

Symbol

Minimum time (s) T_MINIi

Output parameter:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Command
status

STS_RAISE1

Bit

167

Calculation functions

Function period

The function period must be chosen according to the characteristics of the actuator.
Therefore it is logical that the function period is equal to the loop controller sampling
period because the actuator would not be in a position to take faster account of a
sampling command.

Time Base

The time base used for modulation is the MAST task period or the FAST task period.
In other words, the smallest available pulse lasts for the task period. However, the
user is able to define a minimum pulse that is greater using the T_MINI parameter,
so that the actuator constraints may be respected.

Resolution

The larger the PMW resolution function, the more precise the command carried out
will be. The resolution is defined by the relationship between: sampling period / task
period. A minimum of 10 is recommended.
For example, if the sampling period = 2 s (chosen according to actuator characteristics), the task period must not exceed 200 ms.

Operation
monitoring

A running error is signaled in the following cases:


l A non-floating input datum is detected on one of the parameters.
l A problem appears in calculating in floating-point mode.
In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the
faults are signaled in the status words.

168

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Output scaling
Description

This function is used to scale the output to the calculated command.


The scaling function is optional. It is used to select the scale according to specific
outputs.
If this function is used, it introduces a scale factor. It performs the following calculation:
OUT = (OUT_MAN - OUT_INF) x

OUT_MAX - OUT_MIN
+ OUT_MIN
OUT_SUP - OUT_INF

where: OUT_MAN = 0 or -10000


and: OUT_MAX = 10000

OUTi
10000

OUTi

0 or -10000
OUT_MAN
OUT_INFi

Function
parameters

OUT_MAN

OUT_SUPi

Input parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Command value

OUT_MAN

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Command value
(*)

OUTi

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

(*) In the case of Heat/Cool or Split Range

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

169

Calculation functions

Internal parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Low scale

OUT_INFi

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

High scale

OUT_SUPi

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

Note: In the configuration editor, the symbols OUT_INF and OUT_SUP are called
Lower limit (%) and Upper limit (%).
Output parameter:

Operation
monitoring

170

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Command value

OUT_MAN

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management
of the output branch.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Output limiter
Description

This function is exclusive to the scale output function.


When this function is selected, it enables the scaling of output between the limits of
the range defined by the parameters OUT_INFi and OUT_SUPi. In this case, the
output scale is between 0% and 100%.
If this function is not activated, the value of the output is limited to the scale of the
output defined by OUT_INFi and OUT_SUPi.
The limiter is selected by default with the values for the low limit of 0% and for the
high limit of 100%.
OUTi
10000

OUTi

0 or -10000
OUT_MAN
0%

Function
parameters

OUT_MAN
100%
OUT_INFi
OUT_SUPi

Input parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Command value

OUT_MAN

Floating

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Command value
(*)

OUTi

Floating

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

(*) Heat/Cool or Split Range case


Internal parameters:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Low scale

OUT_INFi

Floating

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

0.0

R/W

High scale

OUT_SUPi

Floating

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

100.0

R/W

171

Calculation functions

Note: In the configuration editor, the symbols OUT_INF and OUT_SUP are called
Low limit (%) and High limit (%), with:
-5% < OUT_INFi < 105% and -5% < OUT_SUPi < 105%.
Output parameter:

Execution
monitoring

172

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Command value

OUT_MAN

Floating

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

The monitoring the parameters of this function is built into the error management of
the output branch.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Calculation functions

Output format
Description

This function is used to set the analog output value. 2 formats (or ranges) are possible:
l Unipolar: 0 / 10000 (default selection).
l Bipolar: -10000 / 10000.

Output address
assignment

The output address is defined in the graphic section of the configuration screen. You
should enter a word type variable (%QW of analog output or %MW).

Function
parameters

Input parameters:
Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default val- R/W


ue

Command value

OUT_MAN

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

Command value
(*)

OUTi

Floating
point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38

(*) In the case of Heat/Cold or Split Range


Internal parameter:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter

Symbol

Type

Limits

Default value

R/W

Range

%KW bit

R/W

173

Calculation functions

174

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Control loop configuration

At a Glance
Subject of this
Chapter

This Chapter describes the methods for installing and configuring a control loop in
an automation application with a Premium TSX.

Whats in this
Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Section

Topic

Page

6.1

Configuring the loop and the inputs/outputs

177

6.2

Configuring MMI ( Man-Machine Interface)

181

175

Configuration

176

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

6.1

Configuring the loop and the inputs/outputs

At a Glance
Subject of this
section

This section describes the methodology which should be applied to create a process
control application with PL7 and the configuration method, and how to use the inputs/outputs associated with the loop controllers.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic

Page

How to configure a process control loop

178

Configuring the inputs and outputs associated with the process control loops

179

177

Configuration

How to configure a process control loop


At a Glance

A process control loop is configured according to a precise methodology which ensures nothing is overlooked.

Procedure

For each process control loop that is to be implemented, you must follow these
steps:
Step

178

Action

Give an exact definition of the process control structure to be used (single loop,
process loop, cascade loop, self-selective loop).

Define the algorithm of the various processing branches (process value, setpoint, loop controller, etc.).

Select the various functions and parameters for each processing branch.

Enter the input and output interfaces.

Fix the initial values of the adjustment parameters.

If necessary, symbolize the associated language objects.

If necessary, configure the exchanges for level 2 (supervision for example).

Confirm the global configuration.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

Configuring the inputs and outputs associated with the process control loops
At a Glance

A process control loop must have inputs and outputs in order to operate. The inputs
are used to obtain the process values of the procedure and the outputs are used to
act on the procedure to be regulated. The inputs are generally analog inputs and the
outputs are either analog outputs or discrete outputs (SERVO or PWM function).
The inputs and outputs always belong to modules configured in the PLC.
Note: it is also possible to use words and internal bits which will then be copied in
words and output bits, and internal words in which there will already be a copied
input value.

How to assign
inputs and
outputs to a
process control
loop

The following steps describe the procedure for assigning inputs and outputs to a
process control loop.
Step

Action

Configure the necessary Input/Output modules.

From the configuration screen, enter the addresses of the inputs and outputs
in the diagram of the process control loop.
Result: the following figure gives an example of assignment.

PV
%IW4.0
SP1
%MF2

Checks

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

R
L

0.0

P
I
D

0.0

OUT 1
%QW5.0

On assignment of the inputs and outputs, the following checks are perfomed:
l In order to be able to confirm the assignment of a module input or output in a
block diagram, the corresponding module configuration must have been confirmed.
l No coherence check is performed at the level of input and output assignment to
a particular task (MAST or FAST). It is advisable to assign all the inputs and outputs of one same loop to the same task.
l If an I/O module is moved, the address is not automatically modified in the process control loop screens.
l If a language object used by a process control loop no longer exists (for example
owing to suppression of the module), an error message appears on global confirmation.

179

Configuration

Interface types

180

This table gives the permitted language objects according to the type of interface.
Interface types

Permitted language objects

Object type

Standard input process value

%IW, %MW

Word

External input process value

%MF

Floating point

Setpoint input Remote 1

%MF

Floating point

Setpoint input Remote 2

%MF

Floating point

Feed forward input

%IW, %MW

Word

Analog output

%QW, %MW

Word

Servo, PWM output

%Q, %M

Bit with edge management

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

6.2

Configuring MMI ( Man-Machine Interface)

At a Glance
Subject of this
section

This section describes the functions which must be implemented to configure the
MMI (Man-Machine Interface) associated with the process control loops.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:


Topic
How to associate the process control loops to the MMI (Man-Machine Interface)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Page
182

Description of exchange zone

183

Using the Man-Machine Interface

185

Configuration in multi-station operation

187

181

Configuration

How to associate the process control loops to the MMI (Man-Machine Interface)
At a Glance

It is possible to associate the process control loops to an MMI (Man-Machine Interface) terminal such as the magelis XBT-F. This association is made transparently;
simply indicate which loop controllerlers are concerned and assign them an order
number.
Note: the maximum number of loops used by the XBT-F terminal is 16.

Procedure

The steps described in this table enable the user to associate certain process control loops to an MMI (Man-Machine Interface) terminal.
Step
1

Action
Open the configuration window of the process control function from the PLC
hardware configuration.
Result: the following window appears.
TSX 57303 [RACK 0 POSITION 0 ]
Configuration
Designation : PROCESSEUR TSX P 57303
Symbol :
Loop controller :
Loop controller 4-LOOP0

Configure MMI

Function :
Boucle process

Click on DOP configuration.


Result: a window appears so that the process control loops concerned can be
determined by the MMI (Man-Machine Interface) as well as their order of appearance in the XBT-F operating terminal pages.
Configuration Man-Machine Interface
Loop controller to be used
Order
Loop name
Loop controller 4 - LOOP0 1
Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_12
Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_23
Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_34
Loop controller 6 - LOOP2_M
5
Loop controller 6 - LOOP2_S
6
Loop controller 7 - SPP_3
Loop controller 8 - SPP_4

182

Order prog.

OK
Cancel
Reset List

1
2

Details

Select the loops to be linked to the MMI (Man-Machine Interface); the order is
fixed automatically according to the order of selection of the loops.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

Description of exchange zone


At a Glance

All the variables associated with a control loop have different exchange needs with
the operating terminal.
l Exchanges can be contextual according to the screen to be displayed, for example Kp, Ti and Td for the adjustment screen.
l Some variables must be permanently exchanged, regardless of which screen is
being displayed, such as the archive and alarm management screens.
l Other variables do not need to be displayed on the operating terminal, such as
the time constant of the filtering function.
In order to structure the communication, whilst at the same time avoiding any programming, exchange tables associated with process control channels are implicitly
reserved and structured in the PLCs internal memory (%MW).
These tables have been created to optimize exchange between the PLC and the
MMI terminal.

Illustration

The following figure describes the exchange zones.


Process control channels
%MFxy.i
Loop 1
Loop 2
Loop 3

API

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Periodic zone
%MW
PV.SP...

Loop 1

PV.SP...

Loop 2

PV.SP...

Loop 3

Kp
Ti
Td
...
...

Exchanges
continuous

XBT

Exchanges
contextual

183

Configuration

Description

Description of the illustration representing the exchange zone.


Memory zone

Description

Periodic table

It is a word table of 6%MF for each operational loop, grouping the process value (PV), the setpoint (SP),the commands (OUTi),the alarms
and the status information for all control loops.
This zone, which is permanently visible, is used to establish the archives, the outlines, the alarm management and the status of each
loop.
If more than 16 loops are selected, the first 16 will be processed in a
periodic exchange table. To process more than 16 loops, you must define the zone Loops (17 and +) (See Using the Man-Machine Interface, p. 185) of the details screen.

184

Parameter setting
zone

There are two parameter setting zones:


l The loop adjustment zone is a table of 52 %MF (which is 104
%MW). It groups all the adjustment parameters associated with the
control loop during display. This table is unique to each loop. Its settings management is used to limit the number of memory words
used. However, it is simple for the user to operate.
l The setpoint programmer parameter setting zone is a 125
%MW table. It is unique and brings together all existing setpoint
programmers.

XBT table

This table groups the label, the unit, the scales and the status of each
control loop, including the setpoint programmers. This table is read in
a unique or a cyclic manner according to choice.

Alarm table

This is a 1 %MB loop table for each loop grouping all the alarms of all
the loops. With the XBT, the management of the alarms occurs
through the dialog table. This zone should therefore agree with the
XBT dialog table.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

Using the Man-Machine Interface


At a Glance

MMI, which is associated with process control, can be used in two ways:
l standard use,
l customized use.

Standard use

When default configuration is used, the process control applications provided with
the XBT-F terminal immediately operate with the preset table addresses. A maximum of sixteen loops is used. It is sufficient to select process control loops to be
linked to the MMI. On connection of the XBT-F terminal to the PLC, exchanges are
automatically carried out via the preset tables.
Default table addresses.

Customized use

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Table

Start address

End address

Maximum size

Alarm table

%MW3228

%MW3242

15

SPP parameter setting zone

%MW3350

%MW3474

125

Loop periodic table

%MW3500

%MW3691

192

Loop adjustment
zone

%MW3700

%MW3803

104

XBT tables

%MW3810

%MW4090

281

If the default memory partition must be altered, the runtime applications for the XBTF man-machine interface must also be completely altered.

185

Configuration

To operate more than 16 loops, the XBT application must be altered in order to create operating pages dedicated to additional loops. It is also necessary to fill in the
address of the new periodic exchanges table, the Loops (17 and +) field of the following screen.
MMI configuration
Loop controllers to be used
Loop order Prog. order
Loop name
Loop Controller 4 LOOP0 1
Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_1 2
Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_2 3
Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_3 4
Loop controller 6 - LOOP2_M 5
Loop controller 6 - LOOP2_S 6
1
Loop controller 7 - SPP_3
2
Loop controller 8 - SPP_4
Parameter setting zone
Loops:
SPPs:

104 %MW from 3700


125 %MW from 3350

Periodic exchange zone


(66) MF from 3500
Loops (16 max):
Loops (17 and +):
XBT zone
Loops and
SPPs:
Alarm zone
Loops:

186

OK
Cancel
Reset List
Details

to 3803
to 3474

Open

to 3570

281 %MW from 3810

to 4090

(61/2) MF from3228

to 3230

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

Configuration in multi-station operation


At a Glance

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

For non-multiplexed use, several operation terminals manage the process control
loops. The parameter adjustment tables are also duplicated and dedicated to each
loop. One table per process control loop or per setpoint programmer.

187

Configuration

How to configure
multi-station
operation

This table describes the steps required for configuring multi-station process control.
Steps

Action

Click in the DOP configuration box.


Result: the MMI configuration screen appears.

Click on the Details button to access the details screen.


Result: this type of screen appears.
Configure HMI
Loop controller to be used
Loops Order SPP order
Loop name
Loop control. 4 - LOOP0 1
Loop control. 5 - LOOP1_1 2
Loop control. 5 - LOOP1_2 3
Loop control. 5 - LOOP1_3 4
Loop control. 6 - LOOP2_M5
Loop control. 6 - LOOP2_S 6
1
Loop control. 7 - SPP_3
2
Loop control. 8 - SPP_4
Parameter setting zone
104 %MW from 3700
Loops :
SPPs :
125 %MW from 3350
Periodic exchange zone
(66) MF from 3500
Loops (16 max):
Loops (17 and +):
XBT zone
Loops and
SPPs :
Alarm zone
Loops :

OK
Cancel
Reset List
Details

to 3803
to 3474

Open

to 3570

281 %MW from 3810

to 4090

(61/2) MF from 3228

to3230

Click on the Open button.


Result: the tables configuration screen appears.
Opening : Exchange Zone per Loop
Selected and ordered loops and SPPs
Loop name
Loop controller 4 - LOOP0
Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_1
Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_2
Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_3
Loop controller 6 - LOOP2_M
Loop controller 6 - LOOP2_S
Loop controller 7 - SPP_3
Loop controller 8 - SPP_4

from %MW
1000
1150
1300
1450
1560
1670
1780
1910

to %MW
1103
1253
1403
1553
1663
1773
1904
2034

OK
Cancel

These tables have exactly the same structure as those used in multiplexed addressing (See Description of exchange zone, p. 183).

188

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Control loop adjustment

At a Glance
Subject of this
Chapter

This Chapter describes the adjustment methods for:


l Feed forward,
l PID,
l model loop controller.

Whats in this
Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Sections:


Section
7.1

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic
Adjust Feed forward

Page
191

7.2

PID adjustment

196

7.3

Model loop controller adjustment

204

189

Adjustment

190

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

7.1

Adjust Feed forward

At a Glance
Subject of this
section

This section describes the procedures necessary for adjusting a Feed forward:
l gain adjustment,
l Leadlag adjustment.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic

Page

Gain adjustment

192

Leadlag adjustment

193

191

Adjustment

Gain adjustment
At a Glance

Debugging a Feed forward branch firstly requires a Gain adjustment The following
procedure describes the procedure to be respected.

Procedure

This table describes the steps required in order to adjust the gain of a Feed forward
branch.
Step
1

Example of gain
adjustment

192

Action
Put the loop controller into manual mode.

Position T1_FF and T2_FF at zero.

Establish a disruption scale and stabilize the gain so that the disruption measured when Feed forward is inputted is compensated entirely.
Note: the gain on the Feed forward branch occurs according to scale values.

If one says that:


l the PV variation is at 10% for a disruption variation of 5%,
l the process value variation is at 7% for a command variation of 5%,
then the gain deducted will be (-10/5) / (7/5) which is -1.4.
For a Feed forward input between 0 and 10000 and FF_INF = 0.0 then FF_SUP = 140.0, for a command scale where OUT_INF = 0.0 and OUT_SUP=100

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

Leadlag adjustment
At a Glance

Debugging a Feed forward branch requires Leadlag adjustment The following procedure and example describe the procedure to be respected.

Procedure

This table describes the steps required in order to adjust the Leadlag of a Feed forward branch.
Step

Example of
Leadlag
adjustment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Action

Put the loop controller into manual mode.

Position T1_FF at the time constant value for the process.

Position T2_FF at the time constant value for the disruption.

Carry out a disruption grade:


l if the overshoot is positive, reduce T1_FF, and similarly, if the overshoot is
negative, increase T1_FF,
l if the overshoot starts positively, increase T2_FF, and similarly, if the overshoot starts negatively, reduce T2_FF.

Repeat step 4 until the overshoot is cancelled out.

An adjustment of the PV2 output temperature on the secondary circuit of the exchanger is required. A PID controls the incoming hot air valve according to PV2 and
the SP setpoint. The cold water temperature acts as a measurable disruption in relation to this process control.
The Feed forward function can be used to react as soon as the cold water temperature fluctuates and not if PV2 has decreased.

193

Adjustment

Illustration of the example:


SP
-

+ PV
TT2

PV2

PID
Transfer
function

FF +
+

Qc
Steam

TT1

Disruption

Condenser

The working hypotheses are as follows:


l The output temperature of the condenser (temperature of the cold water) fluctuates between 5 and 25 degrees Celsius, with an average value of 15 degrees.
l A DT variation in this temperature affects the exchanger output temperature entirely.
l In order to compensate for an increase or decrease of 5 degrees Celsius in the
exchanger output temperature, the controlling steam valve must be opened or
closed by 10%.
Adjustments to the Feed forward input parameters must be such that the contribution of the cold water temperature to the valve controlling the steam flow rate is:
l zero to 15 degrees Celsius,
l in a ratio of 10% /5 degrees Celsius between 5 and 25 degrees.

194

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

The following figure illustrates the adjustment.


Output variation
in %

20
10

-10

Cold water temperature in


degrees celsius
5

10 15 20 25

-20

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

195

Adjustment

7.2

PID adjustment

At a Glance
Subject of this
section

This section describes the methods for adjusting a PID:


l closed loop adjustment,
l open loop adjustment.
As well as the role and the effects of each parameter: Kp, Ti et Td.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

196

Topic

Page

PID parameter adjustment method

197

Role and influence of the parameters of a PID during a loop adjustment

200

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

PID parameter adjustment method


Introduction

Numerous methods to adjust the PID parameters exist, we suggest Ziegler and
Nichols which have two variants:
l closed loop adjustment,
l open loop adjustment.
Before implementing one of these methods, you must set the PID action direction:
l if an increase in the OUT output causes an increase in the PV measurement,
make the PID inverted (KP > 0),
l on the other hand, if this causes a PV reduction, make the PID direct (KP < 0).

Closed loop adjustment

This principal consists of using a proportional command (Ti = 0, Td = 0 ) to start the


process by increasing production until it starts to oscillate again after having applied
a level to the PID corrector setpoint. All that is required is to raise the critical production level (Kpc) which has caused the non damped oscillation and the oscillation period (Tc) to reduce the values giving an optimal regulation of the regulator.
Measure

Tc
time
According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is
executed with the following values:
-

Kp

Ti

Td

PID

Kpc/1,7

Tc/2

Tc/8

PI

Kpc/2,22

0,83 x Tc

where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.


Note: This adjustment method provides a very dynamic command which can express itself through unwanted overshootsduring the change of setpoint pulses. In
this case, lower the production value until you get the required behaviour.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

197

Adjustment

Open loop
adjustment

As the regulator is in manual mode, you apply a level to the output and make the
procedure response start the same as an integrator with pure delay time. .
Output

Measure

Integrator

Process response

M= S

Tu

Tg
t

The intersection point on the right hand side which is representative of the integrator
with the time axes, determines the time Tu. Next, Tg time is defined as the time necessary for the controlled variable (measurement) to have the same variation size (%
of the scale) as the regulator output.
According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is
executed with the following values:
-

Kp

Ti

Td

PID

-1,2 Tg/Tu

2 x Tu

0,5 x Tu

PI

-0,9 Tg/Tu

3,3 x Tu

where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.


Note: Attention to the units. If the adjustment is carried out in PL7, multiply the value obtained for KP by 100.

198

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

This adjustment method also provides a very dynamic command, which can express
itself through unwanted overshoots during the change of setpoints pulses. In this
case, lower the production value until you get the required behavior. The method is
interesting because it does not require any assumptions about the nature and the
order of the procedure. You can apply it just as well to the stable procedures as to
real integrating procedures. It is really interesting in the case of slow procedures
(glass industry,) because the user only requires the beginning of the response to
regulate the coefficients Kp, Ti and Td.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

199

Adjustment

Role and influence of the parameters of a PID during a loop adjustment


Proportional
action influence

Proportional action enables the process response speed to be matched. The higher
the gain, the more the response will accelerate and the static error will reduce (in
purely proportional terms), but the greater the deterioration of stability will be. A compromise between speed and stability must be found. The following is the influence
of integral action on the process response:

Kp too large
Kp correct
C

Static error
Kp too small

200

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

Influence of
integral action

Integral action ensures that static error (the deviation between the process value the
and setpoint) is canceled out. The higher the integral action (Ti small), the greater
the acceleration of the response and the more stability deteriorates. A compromise
must be found between speed and stability. The influence of integral action on process response at a grade is as follows:
Ti trop grand
Ti correct

Ti trop petit

Note: Small Ti represents a high integral action.


Kp = proportional gain, Ti = integration time and TD = derivative time.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

201

Adjustment

Influence of
derivative action

Derivative action is anticipatory. It adds a term that accounts for the speed variation
of the difference, which enables anticipation by accelerating the process response
when the deviation increases, and slowing it down when the deviation decreases.
The higher the derivative action (large Td), the more the response accelerates. Here
again, a compromise between speed and stability must be found. The influence of
derivative action on the process response at a division is as follows:

Td trop grand

Td trop petit

Td correct

Limits of PID
process control

If the process is assimilated to a first command with pure time delay, of transfer function:
p

e
H(p) = K --------------1 + p
with:
= model delay,
= model time constant,
100%

Mesure = M0+M
M

Mesure = M0

--The process control performances are dependent on the ratio


202

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

--PID process control is suitable in the following area: 2 < = < 20

--For <2, meaning fast loops ( small) or for processes with large delays ( large)
the PID process control is not suitable and more advanced algorithms must be used.

--For > 20, a threshold process control with hysteresis is sufficient.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

203

Adjustment

7.3

Model loop controller adjustment

At a Glance
Contents of this
Section

This section describes the adjustment principles of a model loop controller and develops the following points:
l static gain adjustment,
l dead time or delay adjustment,
l time constant adjustment.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

204

Topic

Page

Steps to follow to adjust the model loop controller

205

Instructions for regulating Ks static gain

206

Instructions for adjusting dead time or delay T_DELAY

207

How to regulate the time constant

209

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

Steps to follow to adjust the model loop controller


Procedure

The steps in this table describe the action to be taken in order to adjust a model loop
controller.
Step

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Action

Use a graphic method based on an indexed response, such as the Broida


method. This directly provides the parameters for a first order model with pure
delay, in order to identify the process model.

Enhance the adjustment by running the IMC loop controller in automatic mode.

To check whether the model is adapted to the process, set CL_PERF to 1.0
(time constant of closed loop = time constant of open loop).

Proceed to the point of operation and run the loop controller in automatic mode.

Carry out a setpoint step function C.


Result: If the model parameters are correct, the measurement should rejoin
the setpoint without overflow and the OUT_MAN command signal should be almost one division. If this is not the case, a correction must be made, which
means:
l adapting the static gain,
l adapting the dead time
l adapting the time constant.

205

Adjustment

Instructions for regulating Ks static gain


At a Glance

If the static gain is correct, at the time of the setpoint scale the size of variation U1
must be equal to U2. If this is not the case, correct the gain by applying the formula:
correct Ks = Ks of test x U1/ U2

Illustration of the
adjustment

The following figure illustrates the static gain adjustment.


U(t)

U1
Ks too small

U2
t

U(t)
U2

U1
Ks too large

t
U(t)

U1

U2
Ks correct
t

206

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

Instructions for adjusting dead time or delay T_DELAY


At a Glance

Observe the adjustment unit measurement and control signals for a recording. If we
call the model delay, two illustrations appear:
l model is lesser than process,
l model is greater than process,
Note: gain and delay adjustments can be carried out during the same test.

model lower
than process,

The following figure describes this scenario, T_DELAY takes on the value of A.

Tangent
Inflection point
C
Process value signal

C=M

A
t0

approximately process
Command
signal

U
model

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

207

Adjustment

model greater
than process,

The following figure describes this scenario, T_DELAY takes on the value of A.

Tangent
Inflection point
C

Process value signal

C=M

A
t0

approximately process
Command
signal

U
model

208

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

How to regulate the time constant


At a Glance

Having regulated dead time and static gain, the model time constant must be successively regulated by observing the command signal U(t) record.
If we call the model delay, two illustrations appear:
l model is lesser than practice,
l model is greater than practice,
This figure illustrates the two cases.
model < procedure
U(t)

U1

U2

model > process

t0

Signal speed
when OL_TIME <
process

The following figure describes the signal speed.


SP (t) and PV (t)

PV = SP
OL_TIME <
process

PV

SP

OL_TIME = process

SP = SP
t0
U (t)

t
SP.OL_TIME
Ks. process

SP
Ks

t0

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

209

Adjustment

Signal speed
during OL_TIME
> process

The following figure describes the signal speed.


PV = SP

SP (t) and PV (t)


OL_TIME = process
PV

OL_TIME > process

SP
SP = SP
t0

U (t)
SP.OL_TIME
Ks. process

SP
Ks

t0

Closed loop time


constant
selection

Having determined the model to be used, the closed loop time constant selection remains to be made. Its value is dependent on the response speed of the required
closed loop.
For processes that correspond to a first order model with delay, by choosing a time
constant CL_PERF relation between 1.05 and 1.15, the system response is improved without running the risk of destabilising the process.
CL_PREF = OL_TIME / required closed loop time constant.
All CL_PERF increases correspond to an increase in response speed (it is a more
important action of the adjustment unit), but also to an increased sensitivity to modeling errors.

210

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Debugging a process control loop

At a Glance
Subject of this
chapter

This chapter describes the process control loop debugging screens as well as the
associated operational processes.

Whats in this
Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic

Page

Description of the debugging screen

212

Modifying the parameters of each loop

214

Functional modification of each loop

215

Debugging the setpoint programmer

216

Data storage

218

211

Debugging

Description of the debugging screen


At a Glance

In online mode, the process control debugging screens are used to:
l display and animate the loop schema,
l display the process alarms and channel faults,
l modify the adjustment parameters of each function,
l simulate input interface values,
l add, delete, and replace calculation functions,
l modify configuration parameters of each PID reverse/forward mode type function,
l modify loop controller operation modes.

Illustration

This diagram shows a process control loop debugging screen.


TSX 57303 [RACK 0 POSITION 0 ]
Mise au point
Configuration du DOP
Dsignation : PROCESSEUR TSX P 57303
DIAG...
Symbole :
Rgulateur :
Rgulateur4 - LOOP0
LOOP 0
Boucle
Paramtres boucle
Mesure
Consigne
Correcteur
Feed Forward
Sortie 1

Fonction :
Boucle process

Standard
Simple
Chaud/Froid
Oui
Analogique

Echelle de la boucle
Haute : 100.0
Basse : 0.0
PV
5000
44.845
SP1
R
45.0
63.0
L
FF
35.47
LL
3547

212

Alarmes
DL

DH

Fonctions
Format
Filtrage
Gnrateur Fct
Alarmes
Simulation

P
I
D

LL

DIAG...
WARNING

HH

Paramtres
Constante de temps (s) 10.0
1.0
Gain
Sortie
4484.536

28.585
0.0

OUT 1
2858
0
OUT 2

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Debugging

Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table describes the main fields of the debugging screen.


Address

Description

Alarms

If the alarm functions have been configured, all the loop-associated alarms are
displayed.
l the DIAG LED groups together the serious errors,
l the WARNING LED displays warning messages pertaining to the process
control loop function.
When the LEDs are on, a window displays error diagnostics messages.
A %MWxy.i:Xj word bit is linked to each diagnostic. These bits are detailed in
the Fault and diagnostics language objects parts of the chapter describing
all the process control language objects (See Process control language objects, p. 295).

Loop 0

Only the configured functions are shown in this tab. Their associated parameter values are animated. They can be modified in online mode.

Block
schema

The schema shows the intermediary calculation values (corrector input measurement, for example).
Auto/Manu and Remote/Local changes are made by clicking the mouse once.
The associated command values or setpoint values are entered directly in the
entry fields.
The grayed out entry fields are not active.

213

Debugging

Modifying the parameters of each loop


Principles

214

The adjustment parameters can be modified in online and offline mode from PL7
software:
l task screens,
l data editor,
l runtime screens,
l variable tables,
l UNITE server,
l ...
Modifications do not require global reconfiguration and the save mechanism (initial
parameters, current parameters) is applied to the parameters of each process control loop (See Data storage, p. 218).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Debugging

Functional modification of each loop


At a Glance

Functions can be added to or deleted from the process control loops in online
mode.

Principles

The PLC can be in RUN mode during modifications to process control loop functions.
DANGER
For safety reasons, modifying these functions and some configuration
parameters such as extrapolating the generator function from the function, and limiter lopping, etc. require channel reconfiguration.
Failure to observe this precaution will result in death or serious injury.
After the modifications have been made, the loop starts in a determined state:
l If modifications are made at Measurement, Setpoint, and Feed forward branch
level, the loop performs a warm start.
l If modifications are made at corrector or output level, the loop restarts using the
initial operating modes which were defined during configuration.
Note: addition or modification of I/O addresses or memory words in online mode is
prohibited. Modifying some branches, and replacing a simple setpoint with a ratio
setpoint is also prohibited.

Note: the totalizer function can not be added in online mode. Its output is a %MF
address.
It is not necessary to switch to configuration mode to modify the initial adjustment
parameter values Kp, Ti, and Td.
Operating mode:

l In debugging mode, all modification of the adjustment parameters from the task
screen updates the current and initial values of these parameters.

l For the 3 simple loops loop controller alone, an initial value modification without
configuration parameter modification is not taken into account (for example, adding a function).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

215

Debugging

Debugging the setpoint programmer


At a Glance

Setpoint programmers have their own debugging screen. They have all the reconfiguration and data saving services in online mode.
Note: any reconfiguration in online mode causes the setpoint programmer to stop
operating.

Illustration

This diagram shows an example of the setpoint programmer in Debugging mode.


TSX 57353 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]
Debug
Designation: PROCESSOR TSX P 57353
Symbol:
Loop Controller:
Loop controller 5 - SPP_1
Name: SPP_1
PROFIL_1

DOP configuration
DIAG...

Function:
Setpoint programmer
0
1
2
PROFIL_3

PROFIL_2

PROFIL_4

Segments
Execution
Guaranteed Dwell Time at threshold 5.0
Segment x
SP x
VAL x
50.0
40.0
1 Ramp
50.0
20.0
2 Stage
80.0
40.0
3 Ramp
80.0
40.0
4 Stage

Process value
Setpoint 13.47494

Task:
MAST
3
4

Segmentation:
8-8-8-8-8-8
6
7

PROFIL_5

PROFIL_6

Number of segments:
Unit
Second
Second
Second
Second

DIAG...
WARNING

on 8

on Deviation on input
Pq S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7

Current
1
Profile
Segment 1
No repetition 1
Total time elapsed 10.78006 Time elapsed in current segment

10.78006

80.0

Operating
principle

Profile execution is displayed dynamically. The information provided is as follows:


l the segment number in progress (SEG_OUT),
l the iteration number in progress (CUR_ITER),
l the execution time of the segment in progress (TIME_SEG),
l the total time (TIME_TOTAL).
Notes on the operation:

l The TIME_SEG and TIME_TOTAL times change even if the profile is frozen.
l The state of monitoring outputs is directly displayed in the channel zone.
216

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Debugging

l Each profile can be controlled directly from the command button located in the
tab.

l When the profile is frozen, the %MFxy.i.20 setpoint values and control outputs,
%MWxy.I.3:X0 to X7, are not updated during use of NEXT and BACK commands.
They are refreshed once the profile has been unfrozen.
l Neither the target setpoint value to be reached (SPi) nor the length of the segment in progress can be modified.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

217

Debugging

Data storage
At a Glance

Two data save solutions are provided:


l saving adjustment parameters,
l the backup application.

Saving
adjustment parameters

l All modifications of the adjustment parameters from the PL7 process control
screens update the current and initial values.

l Modifying an adjustment parameter from the application or from an animation table affects the current value but does not modify the initial value. The
SAVE_PARAM explicit instruction must be used to save this new value.
l A modification from the XBT-F runtime screens affects the current value but does
not modify the initial value. An explicit save command, which is available in these
screens, is used for updating.
l On cold restart (%S0) and application loading, the current parameters are replaced by the initial parameters.

Backup
application

Premium PLCs provide the option of saving the application (program and data memory) on a Backup card. The content of this card can reload the RAM memory.
Note: A backup card cannot be used if the Premium PLC is already using a PCMCIA card.

218

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating the process control


loops

At a Glance
Subject of this
Chapter

This Chapter describes the various solutions for operating the process control application from the dialog terminals.

Whats in this
Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Section

Topic

Page

9.1

Operating applications for XBT-F

221

9.2

The XBT-F01 process control screens

230

9.3

XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 process control screens

242

9.4

Exchange tables

256

219

Operating

220

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

9.1

Operating applications for XBT-F

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This Section introduces the applications provided with XBT-F terminals, page models and how to use them.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic

Page

Magelis applications offered

222

Operating page models

224

Browsing in the various view formats

226

How to load an XBT-F application

229

221

Operating

Magelis applications offered


At a Glance

The disk provided with the XBT-F and TXBT products includes 4 operating applications programmed with the XBT-L1000 tool:
l The RFX01MFRUTW.DOP file application intended for XBT-F 5 inches (XBTF01 family) configured with the Uni-Telway protocol.
l The RFX01MFRFIP.DOP file application intended for XBT-F 5 inches (XBT-F01
family) configured with the Fipio protocol.
l The RFX02MFRUTW.DOP file application intended for XBT and TXBT 10 inches
(XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 family) configured with the Uni-Telway protocol.
l The RFX02MFRFIP.DOP file application intended for XBT and TXBT 10 inches
(XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 family) configured with the Fipio protocol.
Note: the process control pages built into the XBT-1000 applications, which are
provided on the disk, are guaranteed by the manufacturer to operate correctly as
long as they are not modified by the user.

XBT-F01
application

Applications in the process control part include:


l 1 monitoring screen,
l 1 parameter setting front panel screen,
l 1 control screen for each loop (trends),
l 1 parameter setting adjustment screen,
l 1 parameter setting autotuning screen,
l 1 setpoint programmer selection screen,
l 1 parameter setting adjustment screen dedicated to setpoint programmers,
l 1 parameter setting setpoint programmer screen,
l associated alarm pages.
Note: the number of loops used is limited to 8.

XBT-F02 and
TXBT-F02
application

222

Applications in the process control part include:


l 1 monitoring screen,
l 1 adjustment screen with front panel and parameter setting autotuning (bar
charts),
l 1 control screen for each loop (trends),
l 1 setpoint programmer selection screen,
l 1 parameter setting adjustment screen dedicated to setpoint programmers,
l 1 parameter setting setpoint programmer screen,
l associated alarm pages.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Note: the number of loops used is limited to 16.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

223

Operating

Operating page models


At a Glance

All the operating pages are designed from the same presentation model:
l An alarm panel at the bottom of the screen indicates the active alarm.
l The dynamic function keys perform one function and one function only:
l accessing the adjustment page,
l starting autotuning,
l browsing,
l selecting a loop,
l ...
These models can be modified or retrieved to expand the other personal operating
pages.

Model of
XBT-F01 pages

This diagram describes a model for XBT-F01 pages.


Loop name

Loop controller type

AAAAAAAA
TRACK LL

LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL
HH DL

AAAAAA REMOTE

Local/Remote Indication
State of alarms

9999

N of alarm displayed

Unit

LLL

State of alarm

Memory use
log

224

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Model of
XBT-F02 pages

This diagram describes a model for XBT-F02 pages.


Operating
mode
Loop name
Loop controller type

TRACK

AAAAAAAA
LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL

Indication

IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII

REMOTE

+yyyy. y AAAAAA

Unit
Message regarding
autotune diagnostics
Memory use
log
N of alarm
displayed Alarm label

9999
99999

Maximum
curves / bar charts

Date / time of alarm state

AAAAAAAAAAAAA LLL
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

System message

Date / time of terminal

Group n
Indication
password

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

225

Operating

Browsing in the various view formats


At a Glance

226

Dynamic function keys are used to browse between the various view formats.
The browsing offered can be modified.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Browsing in an
XBT-F01
application

The following diagram illustrates browsing between the screens of an XBT-F01 application.
Monitoring screen
1

TC_0001

TC_0002

Front panel screen

TC_0001

N1

AUTO

DH

TC_0003

10000-

4
5
AT

AT

6
7
SPP

8
2

Alarm page 1

PV
SP
OV

:
:
:

96.00
65.00
31.00

OV1

31.00

02

ON

Autotuning screen

Alarm page 1

AM

LR
ON

Adjustment screen

TC_0001

TC_0001
H DH
ACTUAL
1.0
0.0
0.0

AUTO
:
:
:

KP
TI
TD

LOCAL

LOCAL
PREV
1.0
0.0
0.0
10.0
100.0
0.50

:
Step
Tmax (s) :
:
Perf
2

Ack

AT

Sa

Pr

Alarm page 1

ON

AUTO
KP
TI (s)
TD (s)
O_BIAS
AT DBAND
KD
ORATE1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2

DH

1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
10.0
0.0

LOCAL
SP_SUP
SP_INF
TS (s)
PV_H
PV_L
INTBND

:
:
:
:
:
:

Alarm page 1

100.0
0.0
0.30
95.0
5.0
0.0

Sa

ON

Control screen
TC_0001
H

AUTO

DH

LOCAL

AM
PV
SP

: 96.00
: 65.00
2

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

OV

31.00

OV1 :

31.00

Alarm page 1

LR
ON

227

Operating

Browsing in an
XBT-F02
application

The following diagram illustrates browsing between the screens of an XBT-F02 application.
Monitoring screen
Process control

AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT

AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

Adjustment Screen
TRACK AAAAAAAA REMOTE
LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL +9999.9

1/8

History curve access


SPP

AAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAA

AM
AAAAAAAA

MAGELIS

AAAAAAAA

11

99999 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL AAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAA

10
12
14

13
15

AAAA

9/16

PV:+9999.9
SP:+9999.9
OV:+9999.9

99999
LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL

LR

AAAAAAAA

16
1/8

Control screen

99999 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL AAAAAAAA

TRACK AAAAAAAA REMOTE


LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL +9999.9

AAAA

1/8
AM
9/16

PV:+9999.9
SP:+9999.9
OV:+9999.9

99999
LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL

228

LR

AAAAAAAA

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

How to load an XBT-F application


How to load the
application

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table describes the steps for loading an XBT-F application.


Step

Action

Open the required application using XBT-L1000 software from the disk provided.

Use the XBT-L1000 software Transfer command to load the application in the
PCMCIA card of the XBT terminal.

229

Operating

9.2

The XBT-F01 process control screens

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This Section describes the XBT-F01 runtime screens, dedicated to process control.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

230

Topic

Page

Monitoring screen

231

Front panel screen

232

Trend screen

233

Parameter adjustment screen

234

Autotuning screen

236

Setpoint programmer selection screen

237

Setpoint programmer runtime screen

238

Setpoint programmer adjustment screen

240

Operating the alarm pages

241

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Monitoring screen
At a Glance

The monitoring screen is the input point for the process control application. This view
provides a summary of all the loops used.
Note: No entries can be made from this view.

Note: to optimize communication, loop labels are read only on displaying the
screen. This can cause inconsistencies when the data are modified by the PLC.
Redisplaying the screen will update the new values. If communication is not limited,
data can be configured in cyclic read mode and not in read only mode.

Illustration

This diagram shows a monitoring screen.


1

TC_0001

TC_0002

TC_0003

N1

4
5
AT

6
7
SPP

8
2

Description

Alarm page 1

ON

The information displayed for each loop is as follows:


l the loop label,
l the Auto/Manual operating mode,
l autotuning is running (or not),
l the sum of the alarms.
The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.
Key

Description
These dynamic keys are used to select the required loop for the adjustment
screens.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

231

Operating

Front panel screen


At a Glance

This is a table loop controller view. It is used to globally display a process control
loop. From this screen, the loop can be controlled in manual mode and the setpoint
in local mode.
Note: the refresh period is 5 seconds. The total save period is 26 minutes.

Illustration

This diagram shows a front panel screen.


TC_0001
H

AUTO

DH

LOCAL

10000-

AT

PV
SP
OV

:
:
:

96.00
65.00
31.00

OV1

31.00

02

Description

Alarm page 1

AM

LR
ON

The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.
Key

Description
This key is used to access the previous loop.
This key is used to access the next loop.

232

AM

This key is used to switch the loop into automatic or manual mode. The OV command can be modified.

LR

This key is used to switch the setpoint into Remote or Local mode. The SP command can be modified.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Trend screen
At a Glance

This view includes the same level of information as the loop view, as well as displaying the 4 characteristic trends of the loop. The recent trend history is saved.
There is no history management on XBT-F.
As with the front panel screen, the command can be controlled in manual mode and
the setpoint in local mode.

Illustration

This diagram shows a trend screen.


TC_0001
H

AUTO

DH

LOCAL

AM
PV
SP

: 96.00
: 65.00
2

Description

OV

31.00

OV1 :

31.00

Alarm page 1

LR
ON

The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.
Key

Description
This key is used to switch the loop into automatic or manual mode.

AM

This key is used to switch the setpoint into Remote or Local mode.
LR

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

233

Operating

Parameter adjustment screen


At a Glance

This view is used to adjust the loop controller.


CAUTION
Loops must only be adjusted by an authorized person.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage.
No default password is provided for these adjustment screens. It is always possible
to add one using the XBT-L1000 software.
Note: Even if the setpoint limiter is not configured, the associated parameters,
SP_INF and SP_SUP appear in this adjustment screen. Their modification is not
acknowledged. In the PL7 configuration screen, the parameters associated with
the setpoint limiter are called SP_MIN and SP_MAX.

Illustration

This diagram shows a parameter adjustment screen.


TC_0001
H

AUTO
KP
TI (s)
TD (s)
O_BIAS
AT DBAND
KD
ORATE1
2

234

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

DH

1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
10.0
0.0

LOCAL
SP_SUP
SP_INF
TS (s)
PV_H
PV_L
INTBND

:
:
:
:
:
:

Alarm page 1

100.0
0.0
0.30
95.0
5.0
0.0

Sa

ON

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Description

The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.
Key

Description
This key is used to access the previous loop.
This key is used to access the next loop.

Sa

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This key is used to save the current values of the parameters in the initial values.
CAUTION: Saving this does not update the PL7 application in the PC which may
be connected.

235

Operating

Autotuning screen
At a Glance

This view is dedicated to autotuning and is used to start loop autotuning. It is also
used to return to the old parameter values that existed prior to autotuning.
Note: the autotuning diagnostics messages are global in the process control channel. They concern only one of the 3 loops of a loop controller with 3 single loops
or only one of the 2 loops of a cascade or autoselector loop controller (even if
these messages are globally displayed).

Illustration

This diagram shows an autotuning screen.


TC_0001
AUTO
KP
TI
TD

:
:
:

H DH
ACTUAL
1.0
0.0
0.0
:
Step
Tmax (s) :
:
Perf

Description

LOCAL
PREV
1.0
0.0
0.0
10.0
100.0
0.50

Alarm page 1

Ack

AT

Sa

Pr
ON

The following table shows the function of the dynamic keys.


Key

Description
This key is used to start or stop autotuning.

AT

This key is used to save the current values of the parameters in the initial values.
Sa

This key is used to return to the set of previous parameters.


Pr

This key is used to acknowledge the diagnostics.


Ack

236

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Setpoint programmer selection screen


At a Glance

This screen is used to:


l Display the various setpoint programmers with the current state (INIT, RUN,
STOP) and if a profile is started, the number of the profile which is running.
l Select a setpoint programmer.
Note: to optimize communication, loop labels are read only on displaying the
screen. This can cause inconsistencies when the data are modified by the PLC.
Redisplaying the screen will update the new values. If communication is not limited,
data can be configured in cyclic read mode and not in read only mode.

Illustration

This diagram shows a setpoint programmer selection screen.


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2

Description

SPP_3

RUN

SPP_4

INIT

SPP_5

STOP

Alarm page 1

PF 1

N1

PF 1

ON

The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.
Key

Description
These dynamic keys are used to select the required loop for the adjustment
screens. It is also possible to enter the loop number directly.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

237

Operating

Setpoint programmer runtime screen


At a Glance

This screen is used to:


l select one of the setpoint programmer profiles,
l control the selected profile,
l display the output values of the profile running,
l segment running,
l segment type,
l time elapsed,
l calculated setpoint,
l display and modify the execution parameters,
l SP_O,
l threshold,
l number of repetitions.

How to perform
an action

This table describes the steps to be followed for performing an action from the setpoint programmer runtime screen.
Step

Illustration

Action

Select a profile using the MOD key.

Press the dynamic key required.


Result: a second screen is displayed.

To confirm, press the dynamic key associated with the required command.

If you wish to return to the runtime screen, press the R1 key.

This diagram shows a setpoint programmer runtime screen.


>>

<<

Profile 1

SPP_3
RUN 1

STOP

SP:
37.5
PV:
0.0
Seg time:
Tot time:

Segment: 5 / 16
N Cycle:
1
10 s
74 s

SPP Start: SP
SP_O:
10.0
Threshold:
2.00
SEG
2

238

Alarm page 1

RST

Execute
to infinity
Restart on 2
ON

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Description

The following table shows the function of the dynamic keys.


Key
STOP

Description
This dynamic key is used to activate the RUN or STOP command, if a profile is
running.
This dynamic key is used to activate the RESET command.

RST

This dynamic key is used to activate the HOLD or DEHOLD command.

This dynamic key is used to activate the Disable/Enable command of the guaranteed dwell time. This command does not appear when the guaranteed dwell
time has not been configured on the current profile.
This dynamic key is used to activate the NEXT command.

This dynamic key is used to activate the BACK command.

This dynamic key is used to access the setpoint programmer selection screen.
SPP

This dynamic key is used to access the setpoint programmer adjustment screen.
SEG

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

239

Operating

Setpoint programmer adjustment screen


At a Glance

This screen is used to display and modify the setpoint and time (or ramp) values of
the segments from the selected profile.

Illustration

This diagram shows a setpoint programmer adjustment screen.


Profile 1

SPP_3

Segments used: 16
SY
SP
VAL Unit
p/s
1
100.0 20.0
s
5.0
2
100.0
p/m
3
20.0 200.0
m
0.1
4
20.0
SPP
m
0.2
5
50.0
s
5.0
6
50.0
s
5.0
7
80.0
s
4.0
8
80.0
2 Alarm page 1

Description

Type
/
-=
/
-=
/
/
-=

Sa

ON

The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.
Key

Description
These dynamic keys are used to display the next/previous segments. They are
active when the number of segments from the selected profile is greater than the
number of displayable segments.

Sa

240

This dynamic key is used to save the parameters. This command must be confirmed.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Operating the alarm pages


At a Glance

The alarm pages and their management are identical to the XBT alarm pages (for
further details, see the XBT-L1000 software documentation). In the applications offered, all the process control alarms are in the same group.

Alarm types

There are 6 alarm types per process control loop:


l process value very high threshold overflow,
l process value high threshold overflow,
l process value low threshold overflow,
l process value very low threshold overflow,
l high deviation overflow between process value and setpoint,
l low deviation overflow between process value and setpoint.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

241

Operating

9.3

XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 process control screens

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This Section describes the XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 runtime screens, dedicated to
process control.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

242

Topic

Page

Monitoring screen

243

Control screen

245

Adjustment screen

247

Setpoint programmer selection screen

249

Setpoint programmer runtime screen

251

Setpoint programmer adjustment screen

254

Operating the alarm pages

255

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Monitoring screen
At a Glance

The monitoring screen is the input point for the process control application. This view
provides a summary of all the loops used.
Note: No entries can be made from this view.

Note: to optimize communication, loop labels are read only on displaying the
screen. This can cause inconsistencies when the data are modified by the PLC.
Redisplaying the screen will update the new values. If communication is not limited,
data can be configured in cyclic read mode and not in read only mode.

Illustration

This diagram shows a monitoring screen.


CONTROL LOOP SELECTION
1

TC_0001

TC_0002

TC_0003

N1

D
L
D

4
5
6

1/8

7
8
9

9/16

10
11
12
13
14
SPP
SELECT

15
16
2
1

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Loop 1 Alarm(s)

06/05/98

15 :01 :29
06/05/1998

ON
15 : 13

243

Operating

Description

The information displayed for each loop is as follows:


l the loop label,
l the Auto/Manual operating mode,
l autotuning is running (or not),
l the sum of the alarms.
The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.
Key

Description
These dynamic keys are used to select the required loop for the adjustment
screens.

244

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Control screen
At a Glance

This screen is used to globally display a process control loop. The loop can be controlled in manual mode and the setpoint in local mode.
This screen also serves:
l as the adjustment screen,
l as the autotuning screen,
CAUTION
Loops must only be adjusted by an authorized person.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage.
No default password is provided for these adjustment screens. It is always possible
to add one using the XBT-L1000 software.
Note: the autotuning diagnostics messages are global in the process control channel. They concern only one of the 3 loops of a loop controller with 3 single loops
or only one of the 2 loops of a cascade or autoselector loop controller (even if
these messages are globally displayed).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

245

Operating

Illustration

This diagram shows a control screen.


AUTO

TC_0003

LOCAL

100.0

1/8

9/16
AM
26mn

20mn

10mn

0.0
PV:
SP:
OV:

60.0
20.0
40.0

OV1:

40.0

LR

DH
2
2

Description

Loop 1 Alarm(s)

06/05/98

15 :01 :29
06/05/1998

ON
15 : 41

The following table shows the function of the dynamic keys.


Key

Description
This key is used to switch the loop into automatic or manual mode.

AM

This key is used to switch the setpoint into Remote or Local mode.
LR

246

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Adjustment screen
At a Glance

This screen is used to globally display a process control loop. It is used to control
the loop in manual mode and the setpoint in local.
The recent change history of the process value, the setpoint and the commands is
outlined on the screen.
Note: the refresh period is 5 seconds. The total save period is 26 minutes.

Note: Even if the setpoint limiter is not configured, the associated parameters,
SP_INF and SP_SUP appear in this adjustment screen. Their modification is not
acknowledged. In the PL7 configuration screen, the parameters associated with
the setpoint limiter are called SP_MIN and SP_MAX.

Illustration

This diagram shows an adjustment screen.


AUTO

TC_0003

LOCAL

100.0

AT

Pr
1/8

Ack

9/16

26mn

Sa

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

10mn

20mn

KP
:
1.0
KP Pr
TI (s)
:
0.0
TI Pr
TD (s) :
0.0
TD Pr
O_ BIAS :
0.0
ATSTEP
0.0
ATTMAX
DBAND :
0.0
ATPERF
INTBND :
KD
:
10.0
2
Loop 1 Alarm(s)
2

:
:
:
:
:
:

1.0
0.0
0.0
10.0
100.0
0.50

SP_SUP
SP_INF
TS (s)
PV_H
PV_L
ORATE 1

AM

0.0
:
:
:
:
:
:

100.0
0.0
0.30
95.0.
5.0
0.0
06/05/98

PV:
SP:
OV:

60.0
20.0
40.0

OV1:

40.0

LR

DH
15 :01 :29
06/05/1998

ON
15 : 41

247

Operating

Description

The following table shows the function of the dynamic keys.


Key

Description

AM

This key is used to switch the loop into automatic or manual mode. The OV command can be modified.

LR

This key is used to switch the setpoint into Remote or Local mode. The SP command can be modified.
This key is used to start or stop autotuning.

AT

This key is used to return to the set of previous parameters.


Pr

This key is used to acknowledge the diagnostics.


ACK

248

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Setpoint programmer selection screen


At a Glance

This screen is used to:


l Display the various setpoint programmers with the current state (INIT, RUN,
STOP) and if a profile is started, the number of the profile which is running.
l Select a setpoint programmer.
Note: to optimize communication, loop labels are read only on displaying the
screen. This can cause inconsistencies when the data are modified by the PLC.
Redisplaying the screen will update the new values. If communication is not limited,
data can be configured in cyclic read mode and not in read only mode.

Illustration

This diagram shows a setpoint programmer selection screen.


SETPOINT PROGRAMMER SELECTION
1

SPP_3

SPP_4

SPP_5

N1

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2
23

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Loop 1 Alarm(s)

06/05/98

15 :01 :29
06/05/1998

ON
15 : 50

249

Operating

Description

The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.
Key

Description
These dynamic keys are used to select the required loop for the adjustment
screens. It is also possible to enter the loop number directly.

250

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Setpoint programmer runtime screen


At a Glance

This screen is used to:


l select one of the setpoint programmer profiles,
l control the selected profile,
l display the output values of the profile running,
l segment running,
l segment type,
l time elapsed,
l calculated setpoint,
l display and modify the execution parameters,
l SP_O,
l threshold,
l number of repetitions.

How to perform
an action

This table describes the steps to be followed for performing an action from the setpoint programmer runtime screen.
Step

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Action

Select a profile using the MOD key.

Press the dynamic key required.


Result: a second screen is displayed.

To confirm, press the dynamic key associated with the required command.

If you wish to return to the runtime screen, press the R1 key.

251

Operating

Illustration

This diagram shows a setpoint programmer runtime screen.


SPP_3

PROFILE N 1
STOP

RUN

GUARANTEED DWELL TIME FREEZE

Profile 1

SP

35.25

PV

0.00

RST

Segment time:

6 sec

Segment: 5 / 16

Total time

1994 sec

N Cycle:

SPP
SEGMENT

Start: SP

SPP

Repetition:

SELECT

SP_INF:

10.00

THRESHOLD:

2
24

Description

Execute to infinity
2.00

Loop 1 Alarm (s)

Resume at segment n 2

06/05/98

15 :01 :29
ON
06 / 05 / 1998
15 : 55

The following table shows the function of the dynamic keys.


Key
STOP

Description
This dynamic key is used to activate the RUN or STOP command, if a profile is
running.
This dynamic key is used to activate the RESET command.

RST

This dynamic key is used to activate the HOLD or DEHOLD command.

This dynamic key is used to activate the Disable/Enable command of the guaranteed dwell time. This command does not appear when the guaranteed dwell
time has not been configured on the current profile.
This dynamic key is used to activate the NEXT command.

252

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Key

Description
This dynamic key is used to activate the BACK command.

This dynamic key is used to access the setpoint programmer selection screen.
SPP
SEGMENT

This dynamic key is used to access the setpoint programmer adjustment screen.
SPP
SELECT

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

253

Operating

Setpoint programmer adjustment screen


At a Glance

This screen is used to display and modify the setpoint and time (or ramp) values of
the segments from the selected profile.

Illustration

This diagram shows a setpoint programmer adjustment screen.


SPP_3
RUN

Profile n1
Profile 1

GUARANTEED DWELL TIME FREEZE

Segments used: 16
SEGMENT
1

SPP
SELECT

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2 Loop 1 Alarm(s)
25

Description

SP
100.0
100.0
20.0
20.0
50.0
50.0

VAL
20.00
5.00
200.00
0.10
0.20
5.00

80.0
80.0
30.0
30.0
90.0
90.0
20.0
20.0
45.0
45.0

5.00
4.00
4.00
0.10
5.00
5.00
10.00
0.20
4.00
5.00

TYPE
phy/s

UNIT
Ramp
Step =
Ramp
Step =
Ramp
Step

s
phy/m
m
m
s
s
Ramp
Step =
s
s
Ramp
Step =
m
s
Ramp
Step
s
s
Ramp
Step
m
Ramp
s
s
Step
ON
06 / 05 / 98 15:01:29
06 / 05 / 1998

Sa

15:57

The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.
Key

Description
These dynamic keys are used to display the next/previous segments. They are
active when the number of segments from the selected profile is greater than the
number of displayable segments.

Sa

254

This dynamic key is used to save the parameters. This command must be confirmed.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Operating the alarm pages


At a Glance

The alarm pages and their management are identical to the XBT alarm pages (for
further details, see the XBT-L1000 software documentation). In the applications offered, all the process control alarms are in the same group.

Alarm types

There are 6 alarm types per process control loop:


l process value very high threshold overflow,
l process value high threshold overflow,
l process value low threshold overflow,
l process value very low threshold overflow,
l high deviation overflow between process value and setpoint,
l low deviation overflow between process value and setpoint.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

255

Operating

9.4

Exchange tables

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This Section describes the operating exchange tables.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

256

Topic

Page

Parameter setting zone for a loop

257

Periodic data zone

263

Alarm zone (loop only)

264

XBT specific zone

265

Multiplexing parameter setting zone for a setpoint programmer

268

Default addresses

272

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Parameter setting zone for a loop


Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This zone is used by the front panel, adjustment, and autotuning screen pages (for
an XBT-F01) and by the adjustment screen page (for an XBT-F02). The first 4 words
(not multiplexing) are used by the monitoring pages.
Rank

Parameter

Exchange

%MWn+0

Number of selected loop (1 word)


API <-> XBT
From 0 to 29. This word is used to select the loop managed by
the parameter setting zone if the XBT specific table is not configured. Otherwise, it is not used.
This word is controlled according to word %MWn+5, or is written
directly (an overflow from the last or first loop causes a return to
the first or last loop respectively). It is set to 0 on initialization.

%MWn+1

Identifier (1 word)

API -> XBT

%MWn+2

Bar chart number indicator (1 double word)


Each bit is associated to a loop. A bit at 0 means that the loop
has only one output. A bit at 1 means that the loop has 2 outputs.

API -> XBT

%MWn+4

Write access prohibited (1 word)


API -> XBT
Write access to this zone is only taken into account by the PLCs
if this word is at 0. This word is managed by the user application
(Default = 0)

%MWn+5

Increment/Decrement loop number (1 word)


The dynamic buttons in XBT pulse-based mode set to 1 the
word bits commanding loop number incrementation or decrementation.
X0: loop number incrementation (XBT-F01)
X1: loop number decrementation (XBT-F01)
X2: loop number incrementation (XBT-F02)
X3: loop number decrementation (XBT-F02)
X15: loop change storage (internal management). These bits
are processed by the channel containing the currently selected
loop. The bit is taken into account on rising edge.

API <-> XBT

API Internal

257

Operating

258

Rank

Parameter

Exchange

%MWn+6

API <-> XBT


Command word for "toggle" buttons (1 word)
Each word bit is used to send a command to the selected loop,
on change of state. This word is not used.
X0: 0 = switch to local setpoint; 1 = switch to remote setpoint
X1: 0 = switch to manual mode; 1 = switch to automatic mode
X2: 0 = autotuning stop; 1 = autotuning start X3: return to previous adjustment
X4: acknowledging autotuning diagnostics
X5: 0 = remote 1 setpoint selection; 1 = remote 2 setpoint selection
X6: 0 = deactivation of RAISE1 output; 1= activation of RAISE1
output
X7: 0 = deactivation of LOWER1 output; 1= activation of
LOWER1 output
X15: Saving parameters
The selected loop takes the command into account on rising or
falling edge. The associated buttons are in "toggle" mode. The
word is updated by the PLC according to the current loop state
(for bits enabling 2 distinct commands to be sent).

%MWn+7

API <- XBT


Command word for pulse-based buttons (1 word)
Each word bit is used to send a command to the selected loop.
The first 4 bits are associated with the dynamic buttons.
The following are for opening:
X0: Changing setpoint mode
(remote -> local or local -> remote depending on current mode)
X1: operating mode change
(manual -> auto or auto -> manual depending on current operating mode)
X2: autotuning start or stop, depending on whether or not autotuning is running
X3: return to previous adjustment
X4: acknowledging autotuning diagnostics
X5: selecting remote 1 setpoint
X6: selecting remote 2 setpoint
X7: activating the RAISE1 output
X8: deactivating the RAISE1 output
X9: activating the LOWER1 output
X10: deactivating the LOWER1 output
X15: Saving selected loop parameters takes the command into
account on rising edge. Buttons are in pulse-based mode.

%MWn+8

Loop label (8 bytes)


Updating by the loop on selection of this

API -> XBT

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Rank

Parameter

Exchange

%MWn+12

Loop unit (6 bytes)


Updating by the loop on selection of this

API -> XBT

%MWn+15

Loop identifier (1 word)


1H: single/process loop: nothing
2H: master cascade: CASCADE M
3H: slave cascade: CASCADE S
4H: autoselector, main loop: AUTOSELECTOR 0
5H: autoselector, restriction: AUTOSELECTOR 1
Updating by the loop on selection of this. Serves to display the
type of loop in the various screens.

API -> XBT

%MWn+16

Loop controller identifier (1 word)


xx1H: PID
xx2H: single PID
xx3H: ON OFF 2 states
xx4H: ON OFF 3 states
xx5H: IMC
Updating by the loop on selection of this.

API -> XBT

%MWn+17

API -> XBT


Alarm word (1 word)
Each bit defines a different alarm:
X0: STS_SIGMA_ALA (sum of the alarms)
X1: STS_HH (process value very high threshold exceeded)
X2: STS_H (process value high threshold exceeded)
X3: STS_L (process value low threshold exceeded)
X4: STS_LL (process value very low threshold exceeded)
X5: STS_DEV_H (positive deviation threshold exceeded)
X6: STS_DEV_L (negative deviation threshold exceeded)
X14: AT_NON_AUTORISE
X15: NB_BARGRAPHES_OUT (0 = 1 bar chart; 1 = 2 bar chart)
This word is updated at every cycle

%MWn+18

PV in the scale 0-10000 (1 word)

API -> XBT

%MWn+19

SP in the scale 0-10000 (1 word)

API -> XBT

%MWn+20

OUT1 in the scale 0-10000 (1 word)

API -> XBT

%MWn+21

OUT2 in the scale 0-10000 (1 word)

API -> XBT

%MWn+22

OUT_MAN

API <-> XBT

%MWn+24

PV

API -> XBT

%MWn+26

SP

API <-> XBT

%MWn+28

OUT1

API -> XBT

%MWn+30

OUT2

API -> XBT

259

Operating

260

Rank

Parameter

Exchange

%MWn+32

STATUS1
X0: STS_M_A (0 = manual, 1 = auto)
X1: STS_TR_S1 (1 = tracking)
X2: STS_AT_RUNNING (1 = autotuning running)
X3: STS_R_L (0 = remote, 1 = local)
X4: STS_RAISE1 (output 1 from ON OFF or from SERVO)
X5: STS_LOWER1 (output 2 from ON OFF 3 states or from
SERVO)
X6: STS_RAISE2 (output 1 from SERVO2)
X7: STS_LOWER2 (output 2 from SERVO2)
X8: STS_R1_R2 (0 = SP1 is selected, 1 = SP2 is selected)
X9: STS_AS (1 = autoselector in auto-selection mode)
X10: STS_DIR1 (1 = autoselector in direct main loop mode)
X11: STS_DIR2 (1 = autoselector in direct secondary loop
mode)
X12: STS_SEL_PID1 (0 = PID2 output selected,
1 = PID1 output selected)

API -> XBT

%MWn+33

API -> XBT


STATUS2 = autotuning diagnostics
X0 = autotuning running (STS_AT_RUNNING)
X1 = autotuning aborted (by user or program) (AT_ABORTED)
X2 = AT: parameter error (parameter incorrect or value modification during autotuning)
(AT_ERR_PWF_OR_SYS_FAILURE)
X3 = AT: power outage (or system error)
(AT_ERR_PWF_OR_SYS_FAILURE)
X4 = AT: PV or OV saturation (AT_ERR_SATUR)
X5 = AT: deviation too small (AT_ERR_DV_TOO_SMALL)
X6 = AT: sub-sampling (AT_ERR_TSAMP_HIGH)
X7 = AT: inconsistent response
(AT_ERR_INCONSISTENT_RESPONSE)
X8 = AT: PV not stable on init (AT_ERR_NOT_STAB_INIT)
X9 = AT: TMAX too small (AT_ERR_TMAX_TOO_SMALL)
X10 = AT: noise too high (AT_ERR_NOISE_TOO_HIGH)
X11 = AT_TMAX too high (AT_ERR_TMAX_TOO_HIGH)
X12 = AT: sub-absorption process (AT_WARN_OVERSHOOT)
X13 = AT: not phase min (AT_WARN_UNDERSHOOT)
X14 = AT: unsymmetrical process
(AT_WARN_UNSYMETRICAL_PLANT)
X15 = AT: integrating process
(AT_WARN_INTEGRATING_PLANT)

%MWn+34

SPEED_LIM_OUT
Refreshes at every cycle

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Rank

Parameter

Exchange

%MWn+36
to
%MWn+75

Loop controller adjustment zone (20 floating point words)


(*)
%MWn+36: T_ECH,
%MWn+38: OUT1_INF (read-only),
%MWn+40: OUT1_SUP (read-only),
%MWn+42: SP_INF,
%MWn+44: SP_SUP,
%MWn+46: OUT2_INF (read-only),
%MWn+48: OUT2_SUP (read-only),
%MWn+50: PV_INF (read only),
%MWn+52: PV_SUP (read only),
%MWn+54: KP (PID) / ONOFF_L (ON OFF) / KS (IMC),
%MWn+56: TI (PID) / ONOFF_H (ON OFF) / OL_TIME (IMC),
%MWn+58: TD (PID) / HYST (ON OFF 3 states) / T_DELAY
(IMC),
%MWn+60: OUTBIAS (PID) / CL_PERF (IMC),
%MWn+62: INT_BAND (PID),
%MWn+64: DBAND (PID, IMC)
%MWn+66: KD (PID except single PID)
%MWn+68: OUTRATE1 (PID, IMC),
%MWn+70: OUTRATE2,
%MWn+72: PV_L,
%MWn+74: PV_H

API <-> XBT

%MWn+76
to
%MWn+87

Autotuning adjustment zone (6 floating point words) (*)


%MWn+76: AT_STEP,
%MWn+78: AT_TMAX,
%MWn+80: AT_PERF,
%MWn+82: KP_PREV (PID) / KS_PREV (IMC), (read only)
%MWn+84: TI_PREV (PID) / T1_PREV (IMC), (read only)
%MWn+86: TD_PREV (PID) / T_DELAY_PREV (IMC) (read
only)

API <-> XBT

This zone is only managed if the autotuning function exists (PID,


IMC).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

261

Operating

Rank

Parameter

Exchange

%MWn+88 Output and alarm adjustment zone (8 floating point words)


to
(*)
%MWn+103 %MWn+88: OUT1_TH1,
%MWn+90: OUT1_TH2,
%MWn+92: OUT2_TH1,
%MWn+94: OUT2_TH2,
%MWn+96: PV_LL,
%MWn+98: PV_HH,
%MWn+100: DEV_L,
%MWn+102: DEV_H

API <-> XBT

(*): Zone tested by checksum every second at start of processing. When there is a
change, the modified parameters are written in the loop parameters. The entire zone
is updated every second at the end of processing, from the loop parameters.
Parameter adjustment zone

The parameter adjustment zones have the same structure as the parameter setting
zones.

l Several loop controllers are configured with the same address. Operation is then
identical to that of the parameter setting zone.

l Each loop controller is configured with an independent address (with no zone


overlap). This is used to display many loop controllers at the same time.

262

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Periodic data zone


Description

This zone is used by the Trend screens.


Rank

Parameter

Exchange

%MWn+0
to
%MWn+11

API -> XBT


Loop 1 data (6 floating point words)
%MWn+0: OUT_MAN,
%MWn+2: PV,
%MWn+4: SP,
%MWn+6: OUT1,
%MWn+8: OUT2,
%MWn+10: STATUS1
%MWn+11: STATUS2
The STATUS words are identical to those in the parameter setting zone. This zone is updated at every cycle.

%MWn+12

Loop 2 data (6 floating point words)

API -> XBT

%MWn+24

Etc, depending on the number of loops configured for the


XBT

API -> XBT

This table takes up 12 x words (number of loops) configured for the XBT, up to a
maximum of 192 words (%MW) for 16 loops.

Note: The OUT1 and OUT2 fields can be found in both the parameter setting zone
and in the periodic zone. If the loop only has one output, the output is in OUT1 and
the associated bar chart is magenta. When there is Heat/Cool, the cold output is
stored in OUT2 and the warm output in OUT1. Process control channel variables
are then reversed. This enables the warm output to be displayed in magenta and
the cold output in blue.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

263

Operating

Alarm zone (loop only)


Description

264

This zone is situated in the XBT terminal dialog zone.


Rank

Parameter

Exchange

%MWn+0

Loop 1 alarm word (1 byte)


Each bit defines a different alarm:
X0: STS_SIGMA_ALA (sum of the alarms)
X1: STS_HH (process value very high threshold exceeded)
X2: STS_H (process value high threshold exceeded)
X3: STS_L (process value low threshold exceeded)
X4: STS_LL (process value very low threshold exceeded)
X5: STS_DEV_H (positive deviation threshold exceeded)
X6: STS_DEV_L (negative deviation threshold exceeded)
This word is updated at every cycle. It is identical to that of the
parameter setting zone.

API -> XBT

%MWn+24

Loop 2 data (1 byte)

API -> XBT

%MWn+25

Etc, depending on the number of loops configured for the


XBT

API -> XBT

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

XBT specific zone


Description

This zone
Rank

Parameter

Exchange

%MWn+0

API <-> XBT


Number of selected loop (1 word)
From 0 to 29. This number defines the loop managed by the
parameter setting zone.
This word is controlled according to word %MWn+5 from the
parameter setting zone (exceeding the last or first loop causes
a return to the first or last loop respectively). It is set at 0 on
initialization. This word can also be written directly.

%MWn+1

Loop 1 monitoring screen state (1 word).


This word is used to display a list of possible states:
X0: 0 = the loop does not exist (the entire word is zero in this
case); 1 = the loop exists
X1: 0 = loop in manual mode; 1 = loop in automatic mode
X2: high alarm on process value
X3: low alarm on process value
X4: alarm on deviation

API -> XBT

Note: X2 and X3 are exclusive.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

%MWn+2

Loop 2 monitoring screen state (1 word)


etc, up to loop 16

API -> XBT

%MWn+17

Loop 1 label (8 bytes)


Update on initialization

API -> XBT

%MWn+21

Loop 2 label (8 bytes))


Update on initialization
etc, up to loop 16

API -> XBT

%MWn+81

Loop 1 unit (6 bytes)


Update on initialization

API -> XBT

%MWn+84

Loop 1 identifier (1 word)


1H: single/process loop: nothing
2H: master cascade: CASCADE M
3H: slave cascade: CASCADE S
4H: autoselector, main loop: AUTOSELECTOR 0
5H: auto-selector, restriction: AUTOSELECTOR 1
Update on loop selection

API -> XBT

%MWn+85
to
%MWn+88

Loop 1 scale parameters (2 floating points)


%MWn+85: PV_INF
%MWn+87: PV_SUP

API -> XBT

265

Operating

266

Rank

Parameter

Exchange

%MWn+89

API <-> XBT


Command word for loop 1 "toggle" buttons (1 word)
Each word bit is used to send a command to the selected loop,
on change of state.
X0: 0 = switch to local setpoint; 1 = switch to remote setpoint
X1: 0 = switch to manual mode; 1 = switch to automatic mode
X2: 0 = autotuning stop; 1 = autotuning start)
X3: return to previous adjustment
X4: acknowledging autotuning diagnostics
X5: 0 = remote 1 setpoint selection; 1 = remote 2 setpoint selection
X6: 0 = deactivation of RAISE1 output; 1= activation of
RAISE1 output
X7: 0 = deactivation of LOWER1 output; 1 = activation of
LOWER1 output
X15: Saving parameters
The loop takes the command into account on rising or falling
edge. The associated buttons are in "toggle" mode. The word
is updated by the PLC according to the current loop state (for
bits enabling 2 distinct commands to be sent).

%MWn+90

Command word for loop 1 pulse-based buttons (1 word) API <- XBT
Each word bit is used to send a command to the selected loop.
The first 4 bits are associated with the dynamic buttons. The
following are for opening :
X0: Setpoint mode change (remote -> local or local -> remote
depending on current mode)
X1: operating mode change (manual -> auto or auto
-> manual depending on current operating mode)
X2: autotuning start or stop, depending on whether or not autotuning is running
X3: return to previous adjustment
X4: acknowledging autotuning diagnostics
X5: selecting remote 1 setpoint
X6: selecting remote 2 setpoint
X7: activating the RAISE1 output
X8: deactivating the RAISE1 output
X9: activating the LOWER1 output
X10: deactivating the LOWER1 output
X15: Saving parameters
The loop takes the command into account on rising or falling
edge. Buttons are in pulse-based mode.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Rank

Parameter

Exchange

%MWn+91
...

Loop 2 unit (6 bytes)


Loop 2 identifier (1 word)
Loop 2 scale parameters (2 floating points)
Command word for loop 2 "toggle" buttons (1 word)
Command word for loop 2 pulse-based buttons (1 word)
etc, up to loop 16

API <-> XBT

%MWn+241 Programmer 1 label (8 bytes)

API -> XBT

%MWn+245 SPP2 label (8 bytes) etc, up to loop 16

API -> XBT

This table takes up 281 words, independently of the number of loops and SPPs configured.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

267

Operating

Multiplexing parameter setting zone for a setpoint programmer


Description

268

This table describes the multiplexing parameters for a setpoint programmer.


Address

Default value

Description

%MW3350

Configuration

Configured SPPs

%MW3351

Write access prohibited.


Write access to this zone is only taken into account if this
word is at 0.

%MW3352

SPP number increment/decrement (X0, X1 bits) and displayed segment packet number increment/decrement
(X2, X3 bits)

%MW3353

SPP number selected (0: first SPP).

%MW3354

CUR_PF

%MW3355

SEG_OUT

%MW3356

CUR_ITER

%MW3357

Configuring 1
SPP profile 1

%MW3358

Configuring 1st
SPP profile 1

%MW3359

%MW3359:X9 = 1 Profile state:


%MW3359:X13 = 1 %MW3359:X0 to X7: discrete outputs
%MW3359:X8: HOLD_PF
%MW3359:X9: INIT
%MW3359:X10: RUN
%MW3359:X11: STOP
%MW3359:X12: HOLD_PAG
%MW3359:X13: this bit is used to display the execution
parameters of the displayed profile.

%MW3360

Configuring 1st
SPP profile 1

Number of segments used

%MW3361

Configuring 1st
SPP profile 1

Restart segment number for retries

%MF3362

0.0

SP

%MF3364

No object

PV

%MF3366

0.0

TOTAL_TIME

st

NB_RT_PFi
Profile configuration:
%MW3358:X0: guaranteed dwell time
%MW3358:X1 to X2: holding type (not used),
%MW3358:X3: start (0: SP; 1: PV),
%MW3358:X4: continuous retries (1),
%MW3358:X5: start of retries (0: SP).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Address

Default value

%MF3368

0.0

Description
CUR_TIME

%MF3370

Configuring
SPP profile 1

THLD_PFi

%MF3372

Configuring 1st
SPP profile 1

SP0_PFi

%MW3374

Displayed profile selection

%MW3375

Command word:
Pulse-based commands
%MW3375:X0: RESET
%MW3375:X1: START / STOP
%MW3375:X2: HOLD_PF / DEHOLD_PF
%MW3375:X3: NEXT_SG
%MW3375:X4: BACK_SG
%MW3375:X5: HOLD_PAG / DEHOLD_PAG
%MW3375:X6: SAVE_PARAM

1st

"Toggle" commands
%MW3375:X8: RESET
%MW3375:X9: START / STOP
%MW3375:X10: HOLD_PF / DEHOLD_PF
(1 = HOLD_PF; 0 = DEHOLD_PF)
%MW3375:X11: NEXT_SG
%MW3375:X12: BACK_SG
%MW3375:X13: HOLD_PAG / DEHOLD_PAG
(1 = HOLD_PAG; 0 = DEHOLD_PAG)
%MW3375:X15: SAVE_PARAM

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

%MW3376

Displayed profile number (from 1 to 6)

%MW3377

Configuring 1st
SPP profile 1

Number of segments in displayed profile

%MF3378
to
%MF3440

Configuring 1st
SPP profile 1

32%MF exchange zone of segments from the displayed


profile (SPi, VALi, SPi+1, VALi+1, ...)

269

Operating

Address

Default value

Description

%MW3442
to
%MW3449

Configuration

Configuration (8 %MWi, or 16 x 8 bits)


Segment 1:
%MW3442:X0 (1: second)
%MW3442:X1 (1: minute)
%MW3442:X2 (1: hour)
%MW3442:X3 (1: physical unit)
%MW3442:X4 (ramp/dwell)
%MW3442:X5 (guaranteed dwell time)
Segment 2:
%MW3442:X8 (1: second)
%MW3442:X9 (1: minute)
%MW3442:X10 (1: hour)
%MW3442:X11 (1: physical unit)
%MW3442:X12 (ramp/dwell)
%MW3442:X13 (guaranteed dwell time)
Segment 3:
%MW3443:X0 (1: second)
%MW3443:X1 (1: minute)
%MW3443:X2 (1: hour)
%MW3443:X3 (1: physical unit)
%MW3443:X4 (ramp/dwell)
%MW3443:X5 (guaranteed dwell time)
Segment 4:
%MW3443:X8 (1: second),

%MW3454

Configuration

Current segment type:


X3 X2 X1 define the type of guaranteed dwell time
1
0
0
maintain on input deviation
1
0
1
maintain on high deviation
1
1
0
maintain on low deviation
1
1
1
maintain on deviation
X4 = 1 Dwell
X5 = 1 Rising ramp
X6 = 1 Falling ramp

%MW3455

%MW3455:X4 = 1

SPP1 state:
%MW3455:X4 = 1 INIT
%MW3455:X5 = 1 RUN
%MW3455:X6 = 1 STOP

%MW3456

SPP1 Number of profile running:


0 : (no profile running) or 1 to 6

%MW3450

270

Label of selected SPP (4%MWi)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Default value

Description

%MW3457

%MW3457:X4 = 1

SPP2 state:
%MW3457:X4 = 1 INIT
%MW3457:X5 = 1 RUN
%MW3457:X6 = 1 STOP

%MW3458

SPP2 Number of profile running:


0 : (no profile running) or 1 to 6

...

...

...

%MW3473

%MW3473:X4 = 1

SPP10 state:
%MW3473:X4 = 1 INIT
%MW3473:X5 = 1 RUN
%MW3473:X6 = 1 STOP

%MW3474

SPP10 Number of profile running:


0 : (no profile running) or 1 to 6

271

Operating

Default addresses
Description

This table describes:


Table

Start address

End address

Max. size
(%MW)

Alarm table

%MW3228

%MW3242

15

Programmer parameter setting zone %MW3350

%MW3474

125

Loop periodic zone

%MW3691

192

%MW3500

Loop adjustment zone

%MW3700

%MW3803

104

XBT zone

%MW3810

%MW4090

281

Note: During modification of the dialog zone in XBT-L1000, the start address of this
zone must be adjusted in order for the alarm zone start address to remain
%MW3228.

272

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

10

At a Glance
Subject of this
Chapter

This Chapter describes the process control operating modes: PLC and control loop
operating modes.

Whats in this
Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Section

Topic

Page

10.1

Operating process control channels

275

10.2

Handling process control operations according to PLC operating mode

279

10.3

Common operating modes for process control loops

281

10.4

Operating modes for each process control loop

286

273

Operating modes

274

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

10.1

Operating process control channels

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section describes how process control handling is distributed and synchronized
for the best possible results in processor loading.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic

Page

Distribution of process control handling

276

Synchronizing pre- and post- processing

277

Multitasking application

278

275

Operating modes

Distribution of process control handling


MAST task and
loop sampling

The processing task period and the control loop sampling periods are different.
By default, the MAST task lasts 20 ms, while the process control channel sampling
times are 300 ms.

Optimizing
processor
loading

To optimize processor loading, the periodic processing of different process control


channels is distributed over several task cycles.
Distribution of the processing in this way is an entirely automatic operation
and does not require programming.
The order of loop distribution over the task cycles follows the order in which the loops
were created.

Example

Let there be 18 loops configured in the following manner:


l 14 loops configured to 300 ms (loops 1 to 14),
l 2 loops configured to 200 ms (loops 15 and 16),
l 2 loops configured to 100 ms (loops 17 and 18).
Distribution of the processing operation:
Tn = 50ms
Tn+2 = 150ms
Tn+4 = 250ms
Tn+6 = 350ms
Tn+1 = 100ms
Tn+7 = 400ms
Tn+3 = 200ms
Tn+5 = 300ms

MAST

seq
Reg

seq
Reg

seq
Reg

seq
Reg

seq
Reg

seq
Reg

seq
Reg

seq
Reg

Loops 17, 18
Loops 17, 18
Loops 17, 18
Loops 17, 18
+ loops 1, 2, 3
+ loops 7, 8
+ loops 11, 12
+ loops 1, 2, 3
Loops 15, 16
Loops 15, 16
Loops 9, 10
+ loops 4, 5, 6
+ loops 13, 14

276

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Synchronizing pre- and post- processing


Trigger bits

If you wish to closely synchronize the sequential processing with the periodical execution of each control loop, for each loop with 2 bits contained in the status words
there is:
l STS_TOP_NEXT_CYCLE: pre-processing trigger bit.
l STS_TOP_CUR_CYCLE: post-processing trigger bit.
These two bits can act as enabling conditions for processing operations written in
structured text or ladder language.

Example

This synchronization can be useful for Stop/Run operating modes, or for variation or
compensation calculations.
The pre-processing status bit is on 1 during the task cycle before the control processing cycle.
The post-processing status bit is on 1 during the entire task cycle which follows the
control handling cycle.
To correctly synchronize the sequential handling with the process control calculations, processing operations must be integrated within the same task.
In manual or tracking mode, the command is generated in all processing cycles.
These synchronizing bits are always on 1 while in these modes.
For example, Loop on 200 ms with a MAST task on 50 ms:
250

MAST
1
0
1
0

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

300

350

400

450

REG

500

REG

STS_TOP_NEXT_CYCLE
STS_TOP_CUR_CYCLE

277

Operating modes

Multitasking application
Optimum
functioning level

278

For the optimum and determinist operating level, in a given control channel you are
advised to assign to the same task:
l Inputs/outputs channels,
l Sequential pre- and post processing,
l Sequential processing managing the PLCs operating modes.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

10.2

Handling process control operations according to


PLC operating mode

Handling process control operations according to the PLC operating mode


At a Glance

PLC behavior can be altered either by user intervention or by a fault. In this case,
the process control channels follow a preset downgraded functioning mode. The following PLC operating modes can alter process control operations.

PLC power-up

On PLC power-up, the system searches for a valid application in the user memory
space.
If the application is valid, the system changes to a state of configuration and each
process control channel is called. The channel context is then set on initial values
which can be used on application.
If the application is not valid, the system changes to standby mode to wait for a reconfiguration request.

Processor in
RUN mode

In RUN mode, the processor carries out successively on each cycle:


l The reading of input channels,
l The execution of setpoint programs,
l The execution of process control loops,
l The processing of sequential programming,
l The writing of outputs.
All process control channels are called in each task cycle:
l Calculation of the process value, (PV), calculation of the Feed Forward
(OUT_FF), alarm management, operating modes, setpoint programmers and
generation of Manu or Tracking mode commands are all carried out on each cycle.
l Loop commands in Auto mode are generated and setpoints are calculated during
the sampling period.

Switch to STOP
mode

The process control channels do not directly initiate the STOP mode for the processor or the task. Switching to STOP mode means that all the current functions in
progress stop.
The process control channels are no longer carried out. They refuse all commands
(in Auto or Manu, etc.). The calculation results remain in their current state. Physical
outputs take on the fallback value set in the configuration.
Inputs are always refreshed. Parameters may therefore be altered. The validity
check is carried out on the next start-up.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

279

Operating modes

Cold restart

A cold restart can be initiated in several ways:


l Changing the cartridge (cold start),
l A reconfiguration ( by loading a program, transferring a new application, etc.),
l A new configuration.
A cold restart is indicated by the %S0 system bit.
The process control channels monitor their configuration, and initialize their parameters and status as from the first cycle. Algorithm processing is executed from the
second cycle.
All commands generated in a sequential operation from the first cycle are accepted,
except for orders to track or autotune on the loop controller. The command is refused.

Warm restart

A warm restart happens on a power cut followed by a power restart.


At the moment of the power cut, parameters are saved. The system and application
contexts (e.g. application data, operating modes) are retained.
Any autotuning in progress will be aborted. The process control channels are carried
out as from the first cycle.

280

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

10.3

Common operating modes for process control


loops

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This Section describes the operating modes which are common to all process control loops: loop control in manual mode, starting autotuning, execution in Tracking
mode, etc.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:


Topic
Loop execution in manual and automatic modes

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Page
282

Autotuning and Tracking mode

283

Auto / Manual and Manual / Auto switching

284

Behavior of loops during I/O errors

285

281

Operating modes

Loop execution in manual and automatic modes


Control in
manual mode

Manual mode enables the user to directly apply a value to the loop controller output.
This mode can be selected from the PL7 Debug screens. It can also be controlled
from the different XBT-F terminal screens.
The user can switch to manual mode by sending a command. When this command
is accepted, manual mode is indicated by the status bit STS_AUTO_MANU.
Control of the loop or loop controller command can then be engaged. When the
command is a digital value, it is subject to the high and low limits as well as the
speed limit. Output is processed on each task cycle.

Controlling
Servo output
without position
copy in manual
mode

Manual control is always carried out on the OUT_MAN variable. This is limited between 0 and 100. However, if OUT_MAN does not have a direct link with the actual
position of the actuator, the actuator must be able to be opened or closed, even if
OUT_MAN has reached one of its limits. To do this, it is possible to enter a value
into OUT_MAN which is beyond its limits: OUT_MAN will be limited, but the change
in the calculated command will be accepted by the Servo function.
For example, OUT_MAN = 100.0, the actuator is open at 50%. To apply an opening
of 70%, you must enter OUT_MAN = 120.0. OUT_MAN will then take on the limited
value of 100.00.

Execution in
automatic mode

In automatic mode, the command value is calculated by the loop controller from the
setpoint value and the PV value.
Switching to automatic mode is carried out from the PL7 or XBT-F screens. It can
also be carried out by sending a command. When this command is taken into account, automatic mode is indicated by the status bit STS_AUTO_MANU. Output is
processed on each sampling cycle.

282

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Autotuning and Tracking mode


Autotuning
execution

Before autotuning, you must first enter step function duration, performance and amplitude of the desired command.
If these parameters have too small or too large values, autotuning will not be executed.
The loop controller can be in automatic or manual mode before autotuning is executed. Sending a command starts the autotuning process. During the autotuning
process (2.5 times the step function period), the function controls the loop controller
output. This output cannot be modified.
The autotuning function automatically sets loop controller coefficients. The diagnostics word shows any possible faults detected during autotuning. When autotuning is
complete, the loop controller assumes its operating mode prior to the autotuning operation.
If the loop controller is in automatic mode, it uses the new parameters. The Previous adjustment command returns you to the previous parameters.

Tracking mode
execution

This operating mode is used to force a process control loops digital outputs. This is
often used when closing an open loop to prevent a bump occurring in the command
units.
Tracking mode is also used in back-up architectures composed of one active and
one passive PLC. Here it makes the passive PLC outputs identical to the active PLC
outputs.
Tracking mode uses a parameter (%MF address) and a command (send command):
l Switching to Tracking mode is done by sending a command. The command is refused if the address containing the Tracking value is not entered.
l If the order is sent, the process control loop output value is replaced by the Tracking output value. The internal variables are regularly initialized with the output value.
l If the order is given to abort Tracking mode, the loop controller returns to its previous operating mode without output bump.
Tracking mode has higher priority than automatic, manual and autotuning modes.
Tracking mode is not available for all loop controllers (characteristics none). For example, the ON OFF loop controller does not have this mode.
Tracking mode is global on cascade and auto selector loops.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

283

Operating modes

Auto / Manual and Manual / Auto switching


Auto / Manual
switching

The manual command is continuously updated: it tracks the command output. On


Auto / Manual switching, the first manual value given is the last value calculated by
the loop controller; which prevents bumps.

Manual / Auto
switching

Manual / Auto switching (for any loop controller other than ON OFF) is bumpless on
the output command. For the PID, two scenarios can be distinguished:
l Scenario: PID with integral action (Ti <> 0):
The PID algorithm in incremental form guarantees there will be no bumps during
the transition from Manual to Auto. In this case, the PID algorithm always tracks
the applied actual output.
l Scenario: PID without integral action (Ti = 0):
It is possible to obtain a bumpless Manual/Auto transition if the mode is configured as bumpless in the PID function parameters (if the PID has an integral action, this configuration has no object).
The OUTBIAS manual integral parameter is calculated during the switch so that
deviation between the actual output and the output calculated by the PID algorithm in absolute format is accepted.
If bumpless mode is not selected, OUTBIAS is not recalculated on switch.

284

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Behavior of loops during I/O errors


Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

By design, the process control loops do not accept possible errors that could occur
on I/O cards. A loops operating mode can be made conditional during an I/O error,
through the sequential program. Application monitoring, associated module bits and
diagnostic words can generate the appropriate command for this loop.

285

Operating modes

10.4

Operating modes for each process control loop

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section describes operating modes for each of the process control loops: process loop, single loop, cascade loop and auto selector loop.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

286

Topic

Page

Process loop operating modes

287

Single loop operating modes (3 single loops)

288

Cascade loop operating modes

289

Auto selector loop operating modes

291

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Process loop operating modes


At a Glance

Depending on loop controller type, this loop can have 2, 3 or 4 different operating
modes (eg. automatic, manual, autotuning, Tracking modes).
Autotuning can be launched if the loop controller is in automatic or manual mode.
Switching to Tracking mode has priority and will possibly cancel the autotuning in
progress.

Initial operating
mode

The initial operating mode of the loop can be configured on cold start. You can specify:
l Whether the setpoint is local or remote, as well as the initial local setpoint value.
l Whether the loop controller starts in automatic or manual mode. The initial manual value, if the loop controller is not an ON OFF loop controller

Process loop
with a PID loop
controller

The following diagram illustrates a process loop with a PID loop controller:
Updating of internal variables

Autotuning
KP, TI, TD

Process value branch


Setpoint branch

Auto / Manual
PID
or
IMC

AT_START
AT_STOP

Output
Branch
OUT_MAN

Feedforward branch

Tracking
TR_I

If the output branch sends dotted lines back to OUT_MAN, the limits have been accepted.
If the loop controller is Split Range or Heat/Cool type, there are 2 output branches.
In this instance, autotuning and Servo type output without copy are not available.
If the loop controller is an ON OFF type in 2 or 3 states, there is no Feed forward
branch or output branch.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

287

Operating modes

Single loop operating modes (3 single loops)


At a Glance

The 3 single loops are independent and are represented by a diagram equivalent to
that of the process loop, with the exception of:
l The Feed forward branch does not exist.
l A Split Range or Heat/Cool loop controller cannot be configured.
l The Process Value and Setpoint branches are simplified.

Single loop with


a PID loop controller

The following diagram illustrates a single loop with a PID loop controller:
Updating of internal variables

Autotuning
KP, TI, TD

Process value branch


Setpoint branch

Auto / Manual
PID
or
IMC

AT_START
AT_STOP

Output
Branch
OUT_MAN

Tracking
TR_I

Only one autotuning operation can be launched at a time on the 3 loops from the
process control channel. If a second autotuning operation is requested, it is refused.

288

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Cascade loop operating modes


At a Glance

All the switches are done without bumps on the loop controller outputs. Slave loop
operating mode management is identical to process loop operating mode management: this loop behaves as if it were alone.
However, there are mechanisms specific to the master loop:
l Manual mode and Auto/Manu switching are identical to those of the process loop.
l If the loop controller is in automatic mode (default mode), 2 cases must be distinguished:
l The slave loop controller is in automatic mode and uses the remote setpoint.
In this case, the cascade is closed, so the master loop is really in automatic
mode.
l The slave loop controller is in automatic mode and uses the local setpoint, autotuning is running, loop controller is in tracking mode. In this case, the master
loop controller is in tracking mode.

Closing the
cascade

As the aim is to avoid a bump on cascade close, there are various situations:
l If the slave loop controller uses the local setpoint, the master loop controller follows the slaves local setpoint.
l If not, if the slave loop controller has an integral action, the master loop controller
follows the slave loop process value.
l Finally, if not, the slave loop controller is a P or LF. The master loop output is optimally calculated to prevent a bump during cascade close (according to the slave
loop controller output and its parameters).

Cold start

On cold start, the master loop controller always starts in automatic mode. However,
the initial operating mode for the slave loop controller and setpoint type for each loop
(Remote/Local) can be configured.

Freezing output
change

When the master is in automatic mode and the slave output is becoming saturated,
the master loop has an additional function, which freezes the master output change
in the direction the slave is being saturated. This function limits saturation of the
masters integral action. It is thus only active if the master loop controller has an integral action.
For example, when the slave loop controller is in automatic mode, it is configured in
reverse action and its output is at its maximum limit. To move the output from its limit
by acting on the setpoint, the setpoint must be lowered. The master output is then
slanting in a rising direction.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

289

Operating modes

Cascade loop
with a PID loop
controller

The following schema shows a cascade loop with a PID loop controller:
Updating of internal variables

Autotuning
Auto / Manual

KP, TI, TD

Process value branch


Setpoint branch

AT_START
AT_STOP
OUT_MAN

PID / IMC
Master

Feedforward branch
Updating of internal variables

Autotuning
KP, TI, TD

Setpoint
branch

Auto / Manual

AT_START
AT_STOP

Output
Branch

SP

Process value branch

PID / IMC
Slave

OUT_MAN

Tracking
TR_I

The cascade loop is globally made from 2 process loops with some restrictions and
some additional functions.
The OUT_MAN master loop output is the remote setpoint of the slave loop setpoint
branch. OUT_MAN output is thus expressed in the slave loop scale. It is subject to
the slave loop Setpoint branch level limit.
The slave loop controller can be Split Range or Heat/Cool.
The Auto/Manual operating mode and the value of the master loop manual command cannot be accessed from the PL7 process control screens. They can however
be accessed via the user program.
Restrictions

290

Restrictions are as follows:


l No totalizer on master loop process value branch.
l No Feed forward branch on slave loop.
l No ON OFF loop controller on any of the loops.
l The slave loop Setpoint branch is a single branch, with no scaling.
l Only one model loop controller can be configured on the master or slave loop.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Auto selector loop operating modes


At a Glance

This loop causes 2 loop controllers to work on the same output. Each loop controller
produces an action and a (minimum or maximum) comparator selects the action to
be applied. The auto selector loop consists of a main loop made from a process loop
and a secondary loop made from a single loop. The two loops share one single output branch.
For example, the auto selector loop is used to implement a restricted process control. The main loop is used to monitor the main value and the secondary loop is used
to prevent an auxiliary value from exceeding a limit (or restriction), specified by this
loops setpoint.

Inhibiting one of
the loops

One of the following commands can be used to inhibit a loop to have either a process
loop, or a single loop: direct output 1 or direct output 2.
The 2 loop controllers have the same sampling period.

Auto selector
loop
configuration

An auto selector loop can be configured in 2 ways:


l Case 1: one single Auto/Manual at output branch level after selector. The
OUT_MAN manual command value is thus directly applied on the loop output.
l Case 2: an Auto/Manual on the output of each loop controller. Each loop controllers operating mode is then independent. Each loop controllers output value can
be manually set upstream of the selector.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

291

Operating modes

Case 1: one
single Auto/Manual at output
branch level

The following schema shows an auto selector loop with only one Auto/Manual at output branch level:
Updating of internal variables

Autotuning
KP, TI, TD

Process value branch

DIR1

PID or
IMC
Main

Setpoint branch
Feedforward branch

Auto / Manual
AS

Autotuning
KP, TI, TD

Process value branch


Setpoint branch

PID or
IMC
secondary

DIR2

AT_START
AT_STOP

Output
Branch
OUT_MAN

Tracking
TR_I

In this case, the 2 loop controllers are always in automatic mode and track the applied OUT_MAN command. When the loop is in automatic mode, the output of these
loop controllers is accepted. If this is not the case, the output is not accepted.
As the loop controllers are trackers of the actual output, there is no risk of bump on
switching if the loop controllers integral action is used.
The initial loop operating mode and initial setpoint type (Remote/Local) for each loop
controller can be configured.

292

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Case 2: An Auto/
Manual on the
output of each
loop controller

The following schema shows an auto selector loop with one Auto/Manual on each
loop controllers output:
Updating of internal variables

Autotuning
Auto / Manual

KP, TI, TD

Process value branch

PID
or
IMC

Setpoint branch

DIR1

OUT_MAN1

Feedforward branch
Updating of internal variables
AS

Autotuning
Auto / Manual

KP, TI, TD

Process value branch


Setpoint branch

PID
or
IMC

DIR2

OUT_MAN2

AT_START
AT_STOP

Output
Branch
OUT_MAN

Tracking
TR_I

In this case, in manual mode, you do not act directly on the actuator command, but
at the level of each loop controllers output (OUT_MAN1 and OUT_MAN2).
As long as at least one loop controller is in automatic mode, output selection is made
during the loop sampling period. If both loop controllers are in manual mode, selection is made on each task cycle.
Both loop controllers permanently track the OUT_MAN actual output. In automatic
mode, if they are using an integral action, they take the previous OUT_MAN output
value into account. This signifies that on Manual/Auto switching, the loop controller
will not use its last manual value, but the last OUT_MAN actual output value.
The initial operating mode and initial setpoint type (Remote/Local) for each loop controller can be configured.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

293

Operating modes

Starting autotuning forces the auto selector to the direct position of the autotuned
loop. At the end of autotuning, the auto selector must be reset to the required position, if it is different from the one imposed.

294

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

11

At a Glance
Subject of this
Chapter

This Chapter describes the various language objects associated with inputs/outputs
and process control channel parameters.

Whats in this
Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Section

Topic

11.1

Language objects associated with the process control channels

Page
297

11.2

Language objects associated with the process loop

306

11.3

Language objects associated with the 3 single loops

320

11.4

Language objects associated with the single loop cascade

339

11.5

Language objects associated with the self-selective loop

358

11.6

Language objects associated with the setpoint programmer

378

295

Process control language objects

296

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

11.1

Language objects associated with the process


control channels

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section describes the language objects associated with the process control
channels.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic

Page

Introduction

298

Double word "Order of Command"

300

Control loops command word

302

Setpoint programmer command word (%MWxy.i.7)

304

Summary of selection and command words

305

297

Process control language objects

Introduction
At a Glance

All the variables associated with a process control channel (for example: Kp,
T_FILT, ...) are in default read and/or write.
The language object %CH is used to simplify explicit reads and writes. It is used to:
l Read module and channel status words.
l Write parameters.
l Save parameters.
l Send commands.

Sending
commands

Explicit instructions are applied to the language object of the %MWxy.i.j channel.
Example 1: sending an autotune order to the first loop of a 3 single loops loop controller. This word contains the explicit command acting on the control loop.
(*autotuning command*)
%Mwxy.i.13:=16#000E
(*on

1st

loop*)
%MWxy.i.14:=1

(*send command *)
%M100
WRITE_CMD %CH0x.i

There is no limit to the number of commands on a PLC cycle. The recognition of the
instruction and the updating of the states of the process control channel concerned
come into effect on the next cycle of the task.

Note: Orders associated with the operating mode of the loop controller (Auto,
Manu, Tracking, Autotuning) cannot be sent at the same time in the same cycle
(only the last instruction carried out in the cycle is recognized). In contrast, complementary orders (of the types Remote, freeze Totalizer function , etc.) can be sent
in the same cycle.

298

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Example 2: sending Manu mode to the slave loop of a cascade type channel.
! (*slave loop selection*)
%MDxy.i.12: =2;
! (*switching to manual mode*)
%MDxy.i.11: =16#0023;
! (*send command*)
IF %M100 THEN WRITE_CMD %CHx.i;
END_IF;

Values

Command parameter or selection word (%MDxy.i.j) values

l Setpoint programmer
%MDxy.i.8 = j

l Cascade loop

profile j

j ={1, ..., 6}

%MDxy.i.12 = 1 master loop


%MDxy.i.12 = 2 slave loop
l Auto selector loop
%MDxy.i.12 = 1 main loop
%MDxy.i.12 = 2 secondary loop
%MDxy.i.12 = 4 global loop
As the process loop has only one loop, the %MDxy.i.12 command parameter has no
significance.

l 3 single loops loop controller


%MDxy.i.14 = j

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

profile j

j ={1, 2, 3}

299

Process control language objects

Double word "Order of Command"


At a Glance

The double word order of command, defined in the configuration of each loop, enables one or more operating mode change commands to be sent.
The required double word %MD is entered with loop parameters of the configuration screen.
The first sixteen bits of X0 to X15 are the same as those of the status word of the
periodic data table. This single word is copied into the fist part of the double word
order of command.

Note: if the option Reset %MWi on cold restart is checked on the processor configuration screen, the X28 bit of the order of command double word will be reset to
zero during the first cycle following cold restart. It is therefore mandatory that the
X28 bit is set to 1 by the application in the processing section of the cold restart
(application operating mode management).

Description
Double word
bit

This table describes each bit of the order of command double word.
Associated
simple word
bit

Description

Indication

Command
(1)

%MDi:X0

%MWi:X0

0 : Manu, 1 : Auto

%MDi:X1

%MWi:X1

Tracking

%MDi:X2

%MWi:X2

Autotuning

%MDi:X3

%MWi:X3

0 : Remote, 1 : Local

%MDi:X4

%MWi:X4

Output 1 of ON OFF or of SERVO

X (2)

%MDi:X5

%MWi:X5

Output 2 of ON OFF3 or of SERVO

X(2)

%MDi:X6

%MWi:X6

Output 1 of SERVO2

%MDi:X7

%MWi:X7

Output 2 of SERVO2

%MDi:X8

%MWi:X8

SP1 or SP2 selection

%MDi:X9

%MWi:X9

Auto-selector in auto-selection mode

%MDi:X10

%MWi:X10

Auto-selector in direct main loop mode

%MDi:X11

%MWi:X11

Auto-selector in direct secondary loop mode

%MDi:X12

%MWi:X12

PID1 or PID2 output selected

%MDi:X13

%MWi:X13

Reserved

%MDi:X14

%MWi:X14

Reserved

300

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Double word
bit

Associated
simple word
bit

Description

Indication

Command
(1)

%MDi:X15

%MWi:X15

Reserved

%MDi:X16

%MWi+1:X0

0 : copy not used,


1 : copy used

%MDi:X17

%MWi+1:X1

0 : unfreezing of the totalization, 1: freezing of the


totalization

%MDi:X18

%MWi+1:X2

Re-initialization of the totalization

X(3)

%MDi:X19

%MWi+1:X3

Return to previous adjustments

X(3)

%MDi:X20

%MWi+1:X4

Autotuning diagnostics acknowledgement

X(3)

%MDi:X21

%MWi+1:X5

SERVO1 re-initialization

X(3)

%MDi:X22

%MWi+1:X6

SERVO2 re-initialization

X(3)

%MDi:X23

%MWi+1:X7

Save parameters

X(3)

%MDi:X24

%MWi+1:X8

Reserved

%MDi:X25

%MWi+1:X9

Reserved

%MDi:X26

%MWi+1:X10

Reserved

%MDi:X27

%MWi+1:X11

Reserved

%MDi:X28

%MWi+1:X12

0 : Writing of command word prohibited,


1 : writing of command word authorized

%MDi:X29

%MWi+1:X13

Reserved

%MDi:X30

%MWi+1:X14

Reserved

%MDi:X31

%MWi+1:X15

Reserved

Key
X : Yes
- : No
(1) : the command is only acknowledged if the X28 bit is at 1
(2) : for the function, there is no associated command, it is simply for information
(3) : the bit is automatically rest to zero

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

301

Process control language objects

Control loops command word


Value of the
command word

302

%MWxy.i.11 is the command word for process, cascade and auto selector loops.
%MWxy.i.13 is the command word for the 3 single loops loop controller.
Value

Meaning

16#0001

Switches to Simulation or Non-simulation mode for the process value input

16#0002

Switches to Remote or Local mode

16#0003

Switches to Manual or Automatic mode

16#0004

Freezes Totalizer function

16#0005

Unfreezes Totalizer function

16#0006

Resets Totalizer function

16#0007

Selects Remote1 setpoint

16#0008

Selects Remote2 setpoint

16#0009

Not used

16#000A

Not used

16#000B

Switches to Simulation or Non-simulation for Feed Forward input

16#000C

Switches to Tracking mode

16#000D

Switches to Non-tracking mode

16#000E

Starts autotuning

16#000F

Stops autotuning

16#0010

Returns to previous adjustments

16#0011

Uses copy (Cannot be used after a Split Range or Heat/Cool PID)

16#0012

Does not use copy (Cannot be used after a Split Range or Heat/Cool PID)

16#0013

Acknowledges autotuning diagnostics

16#0014

Activates RAISE

16#0015

Deactivates RAISE

16#0016

Activates LOWER

16#0017

Deactivates LOWER

16#0018

Not used

16#0019

Resets Servo1

16#0020

Resets Servo2

16#0021

Selects the setpoint in Local mode

16#0022

Selects the setpoint in Remote mode

16#0023

Switches to Manu

16#0024

Switches to Auto

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Value

Meaning

16#0025

Position of selector in auto selector

16#0026

Position of selector in the main loop

16#0027

Position of selector in the secondary loop

303

Process control language objects

Setpoint programmer command word (%MWxy.i.7)


Value of the
command word

304

%MWxy.i.7 is the setpoint programmer command word.


Value

Meaning

16#0001

Resets the setpoint programmer (action on the current profile)

16#0002

Triggers the selected profile

16#0003

Stops the selected profile

16#0004

Freezes evolution of the profil

16#0005

Unfreezes current profile

16#0006

Jumps to the following segment

16#0007

Jumps to the previous segment

16#0008

Inhibits the guaranteed dwell time function

16#0009

Activates the guaranteed dwell time function

16#000A

Freezes / Unfreezes profile evolution

16#000B

Freezes / Unfreezes the guaranteed dwell time function

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Summary of selection and command words


Type of channel:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table reiterates the selection and command words for each type of loop.
Type of loop

Command word

Command parameter or Selection


word

Process Loop

%MWxy.i.11

None

Cascade Loop

%MWxy.i.11

%MDxy.i.12 = j
(j = 1: master, 2: slave)

Auto Selector Loop

%MWxy.i.11

%MDxy.i.12 = j
(j = 1: main, 2: secondary, 4: global
loop)

3 single loops

%MWxy.i.13

%MDxy.i.14 = j
(j = 1,2 or 3 according to loop number)

Setpoint programmer

%MWxy.i.7

%MDxy.i.8 = j
(j = 1, 2, ... 6 according to profile number)

305

Process control language objects

11.2

Language objects associated with the process


loop

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This section describes the different language objects associated with the process
loop.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

306

Topic

Page

Configuration language objects

307

Error and diagnostics language objects

311

Process control language objects

316

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Configuration language objects


Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table describes all the language objects associated with the process loop.
Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.0

CONFIG_0

No Object

Word grouping together the


different Process Value configuration bits

%KWxy.i.0:X0

FILTRAGE

Missing (0)

Filtering function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X1

GENERATEUR DE
FONCTION

Missing (0)

Function generator of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X2

TOTALISATEUR

Missing (0)

Totalizer function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X3

RACINE CARREE

Missing (0)

Square root function of the


process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X4

ALARMES

Present

Alarm function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X8

PV_CLIP

Missing (0)

Clipping or non-clipping of the


process value

%KWxy.i.0:X9

EXTRAPOL

No (0)

Extrapolation of function generator

%KWxy.i.0:X10

PV_UNI_BIP

Unipolar (0)

Type of process value: unipolar/bipolar

%KWxy.i.0:X11

PV_EXTERN

Missing (0)

Choice of Standard process


value (0) / External process
value (1)

%KWxy.i.0:X13

TOTALISATEUR

(X13=0, X14 =0): phys/ms


(X13=1, X14 =0): phys/ms

%KWxy.i.0:X14

TOTALISATEUR

(X13=0, X14 =1): phys/ms


(X13=1, X14 =1): phys/ms

%KWxy.i.1

SANS Objet

No Objet

Word grouping together the


different setpoint configuration bits

%KWxy.i.1:X0

SP_SIMPLE

Selected (1)

Type of setpoint selected: single

%KWxy.i.1:X1

SP_SELECTION

Not selected (0)

Type of setpoint: selection

%KWxy.i.1:X2

SPEED_LIMITEUR

Not selected (0)

Speed limiter on the setpoint

307

Process control language objects

308

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.1:X3

SP_SPP

not selected (0)

Type of setpoint selected: programmer

%KWxy.i.1:X4

RL/L

Remote local (0)

Speed limiter either on the local setpoint or on Remote/Local

%KWxy.i.1:X8

SEL_MIN

Missing (0)

Function selected if there is a


selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X9

SEL_MAX

Missing (0)

Function selected if there is a


selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X10

SEL_SWITCH

Present on selec- Function selected if there is a


tion
selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X11

R/L_INIT

Local (1)

Initial value of the Remote/Local selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X12

R1/R2_INIT

R1 (0)

Initial value of the status of the


selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X13

SP_RATIO

Not selected (0)

Type of setpoint selected: ratio

%KWxy.i.1:X14

SP_LIMITEUR

Not present

Setpoint limiter (e.g.:


PARAM_SP)

%KWxy.i.1:X15

SP_FOLW

Non tracking setpoint (0)

Tracking setpoint

%KWxy.i.2

CONFIG_2

No Object

Word grouping together the


different loop controller and
FF configuration bits

%KWxy.i.2:X0

PID

Present

PID function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X1

ONOFF2

Missing (0)

2 state ON OFF loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X2

ONOFF3

Missing (0)

3 state ON OFF loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X3

SPLRG/CHFROID

No Object

OR for presence bits Heat/


Cool and Split Range

%KWxy.i.2:X4

SPLIT RANGE

Missing (0)

Loop controller branch Split


Range function

%KWxy.i.2:X5

CHAUD/FROID

Not selected

Heat/Cool function of the loop


controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X6

ALARMES_DEV

Present

Alarm on deviation function of


the loop controller branch

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.2:X7

FEED FORWARD

Missing (0)

Presence of a Feed forward


input

%KWxy.i.2:X8

BUMP

With bumps (1)

Management of bumps when


changing operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X9

PV_DEV

On process value
(0)

Type of derived action

%KWxy.i.2:X10

MIX_PAR

PID parallel series

Type of loop controller mixed


or parallel

%KWxy.i.2:X11

REV_DIR

PID backward ac- Type of loop controller action


tion (0)

%KWxy.i.2:X12

MANU/AUTO_INIT

Manu (0)

Initial value of loop controller


operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X13

LEAD LAG

Missing (0)

Leadlag function of the Feed


forward branch

%KWxy.i.2:X14

FF_UNI_BIP

unipolar

Type of Feed forward process


value: unipolar / bipolar

%KWxy.i.2:X15

IMC

Missing (0)

IMC function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.3

CONFIG_3

No Object

Word grouping together the


different output configuration
bits

%KWxy.i.3:X0

SERVO

Selected

Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.3:X1

SERVO2

Selected

Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.3:X2

ANALOGIQUE1

Selected

Type of output selected: Analog

%KWxy.i.3:X3

ANALOGIQUE2

Selected

Type of output selected: Analog

%KWxy.i.3:X4

PWM1

Selected

Type of output selected: PWM

%KWxy.i.3:X5

PWM2

Selected

Type of output selected: PWM

%KWxy.i.3:X8

POT_REV1

Direct (0)

Servo copy direction

%KWxy.i.3:X9

POT_REV2

Direct (0)

Servo copy direction

%KWxy.i.3:X10

POT_VAL1_INIT

No (0)

Presence of Servo copy

%KWxy.i.3:X11

POT_VAL2_INIT

Yes (1)

Presence of (Reserved) Servo


copy

%KWxy.i.3:X12

ANALOG1_UNI_BIP

Unipolar

Type of analog output: unipolar / bipolar

309

Process control language objects

310

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.3:X13

ANALOG2_UNI_BIP

Unipolar (0)

Type of analog output: unipolar / bipolar

%KWxy.i.4

NOM DE LA BOUCLE

Loop i with i [0;9]

Loop name

%KWxy.i.8

UNITE DE LA BOUCLE

Loop unit

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Error and diagnostics language objects


Description

This table describes the error and diagnostics language objects associated with the
process loop.
Address

Parameter name

%MWxy.i.0

EXCH_STS

Exchange management status

%MWxy.i.1

EXCH_ERR

Exchange report status

%MWxy.i.2

CH_FLT

Channel standard fault

%MWxy.i.2:X4

INTERNAL_FLT

Serious internal error

Comment

%MWxy.i.2:X5

CONF_FLT

Configuration error

%MWxy.i.2:X6

MISSING_ADDR

Address of IMC register


missing

%MWxy.i.2:X7

WARN

Sum of errors

%MWxy.i.2:X8

STS_ERR_CALC_CORR

Loop controller branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.2:X9

STS_ERR_FLOT_CORR

Loop controller branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.2:X10 STS_ERR_CALC_PV

PV branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.2:X11 STS_ERR_FLOT_PV

PV branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.2:X12 STS_ERR_CALC_OUT

OUT branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.2:X13 STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT

OUT branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.3

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Default
value

CH_STATUS2

%MWxy.i.3:X0

STS_ERR_SCALE_PV

PV branch incorrect scale

%MWxy.i.3:X1

STS_ERR_TH_SPLRG

Split Range function thresholds incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X2

STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1

OUT1 branch scale incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X3

STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT2

OUT2 branch scale incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X4

STS_ERR_COPY_POS

Servo copy address missing

%MWxy.i.4

STATUS1

Word grouping together the


different Process Value/Setpoint status bits

%MWxy.i.4:X0

STS_HOLD_TOT

Freezes Totalizer function

%MWxy.i.4:X1

STS_PV_SIM

Simulated process value

%MWxy.i.4:X2

STS_PV_H_LIM

Process value high limit

311

Process control language objects

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.4:X3

STS_PV_L_LIM

Process value low limit

%MWxy.i.4:X4

STS_SP_H_LIM

Setpoint high limit

%MWxy.i.4:X5

STS_SP_L_LIM

%MWxy.i.4:X6

STS_L_R

Setpoint low limit

%MWxy.i.4:X7

STS_R1_R2

Remote2 Setpoint (1)


Remote1 Setpoint (0)

%MWxy.i.4:X8

STS_ALARMS

OR logic of process value


alarms

%MWxy.i.4:X9

STS_HH

Very high alarm

R/L Init

%MWxy.i.4:X10 STS_H

Remote Setpoint (0) Local


Setpoint (1)

High alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X11 STS_L

Low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X12 STS_LL

Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X13 STS_DEVH

High alarm for Process Value/Setpoint deviation (>0)

%MWxy.i.4:X14 STS_DEVL

Low alarm for Process Value/Setpoint deviation (<0)

%MWxy.i.4:X15 STS_THLD_DONE

Totalizer threshold reached

%MWxy.i.5

STATUS2

No Object

Word grouping together the


different Loop controller/
Feed forward status bits

%MWxy.i.5:X0

STS_AT_RUNNING

Autotuning in progress

%MWxy.i.5:X1

STS_TR_S

Tracking in progress

STS_M_A

Status of PID Operating


mode

%MWxy.i.5:X2
%MWxy.i.5:X3
%MWxy.i.5:X4

STS_RAISE1

Open command

%MWxy.i.5:X5

STS_LOWER1

Close command

%MWxy.i.5:X6

STS_RAISE2

Branch output 2 open command

%MWxy.i.5:X7

STS_LOWER2

Branch output 2 close command

%MWxy.i.5:X8

STS_OUT_L_LIM

%MWxy.i.5:X9

STS_OUT_H_LIM

%MWxy.i.5:X10 STS_TOP_NEXT_CYCLE

312

Sampling pulse on next cycle

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Address

Parameter name

Comment

%MWxy.i.5:X11 STS_TOP_CUR_CYCLE

Sampling pulse in current cycle

%MWxy.i.5:X12 STS_FF_SIM

Status of simulation of the FF


process value

%MWxy.i.6

STATUS3

%MWxy.i.6:X0

POT_VAL1

Servo operation with copy


position

%MWxy.i.6:X1

POT_VAL2

Servo operation with copy


position (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X2

RAISE STOP1

Servo drive open stop


reached (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X3

LOWER STOP1

Servo drive close stop


reached (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X4

RAISE STOP2

Servo drive open stop


reached (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X5

LOWER STOP2

Servo drive close stop


reached (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.7

STATUS4

%MWxy.i.7:X0

SP_MIN_WARN

%MWxy.i.7:X1

XI_WARN

Xi parameters check error

%MWxy.i.7:X2

Yi_WARN

Yi parameters check error

%MWxy.i.7:X6

OVER_TOT_WARN

Totalizer overflow error

%MWxy.i.7:X8

INP_INFR1_WARN

INP_INFR1 and INP_SUPR1


parameters check error

%MWxy.i.7:X9

INP_INFR2_WARN

INP_INFR2 and INP_SUPR2


parameters check error

%MWxy.i.7:X10 RATIO_WARN

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Default
value

No Object

No Object

Word grouping together the


different Servo status bits

Word grouping together the


fine diagnostics of different
errors (process value, setpoint, FF)
SP_MIN and SP_MAX parameters check error

RATIO_MIN and
RATIO_MAX parameters
check error

%MWxy.i.7:X11 SP_CALC_WARN

Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.7:X12 SP_FLOAT_WARN

Setpoint floating point error

313

Process control language objects

Address

314

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.7:X13 FF_CALC_WARN

Feed forward calculation error

%MWxy.i.7:X14 FF_FLOAT_WARN

Feed forward floating point


error

%MWxy.i.8

STATUS5

No Object

Word grouping together autotuning diagnostics

%MWxy.i.8:X0

AT_FAILED

Autotuning failed

%MWxy.i.8:X1

AT_ABORTED

Autotuning diagnostics interrupted

%MWxy.i.8:X2

AT_ERR_PARAM

Autotuning Diagnostics parameter error

%MWxy.i.8:X3

AT_PWF_OR_EFB_FAILURE

Autotuning Diagnostics system error or power outage

%MWxy.i.8:X4

AT_ERR_SATUR

Autotuning Diagnostics saturation of process value

%MWxy.i.8:X5

AT_DV_TOO_SMALL

Autotuning Diagnostics insufficient process value deviation

%MWxy.i.8:X6

AT_TSAMP_HIGH

Autotuning Diagnostics sampling period too long

%MWxy.i.8:X7

AT_INCONSIST_RESP

Autotuning Diagnostics inconsistent response

%MWxy.i.8:X8

AT_NOT_STAB_INIT

Autotuning Diagnostics process value unstable initially

%MWxy.i.8:X9

AT_TMAX_TOO_SMALL

Autotuning Diagnostics step


function duration too short

%MWxy.i.8:X10 AT_NOISE_TOO_HIGH

Autotuning Diagnostics process value noise too high

%MWxy.i.8:X11 AT_TMAX_TOO_HIGH

Autotuning Diagnostics step


function duration too long

%MWxy.i.8:X12 AT_OVERSHOOT

Autotuning Diagnostics overshoot above 10%

%MWxy.i.8:X13 AT_UNDERSHOOT

Autotuning Diagnostics nonminimum phase too large

%MWxy.i.8:X14 AT_UNSYMETRICAL_PT

Autotuning Diagnostics process too non-symmetrical

%MWxy.i.8:X15 AT_INTEGRATING_PT

Autotuning Diagnostics integrating process


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Address

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter name

%MWxy.i.9

Reserved

%MWxy.i.10

Reserved

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.11

ORDER_COMMAND

Command order

%MDxy.i.12

PARAM_COMMAND

Command parameter

315

Process control language objects

Process control language objects


Description

316

This table describes the process control language objects associated with the process loop.
Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.14

PV_SIM

No Object

Simulated process value

%MWxy.i.15

FF_SIM

No Object

Simulated Feed forward input

%MFxy.i.16

T_ECH

0,3

Sampling period

%MFxy.i.18

OUT1

No Object

Value of output 1 for Heat/Cool or Split


Range

%MFxy.i.20

OUT2

No Object

Value of output 2 for Heat/Cool or Split


Range

%MFxy.i.22

OUTD

No Object

Value of command variation

%MFxy.i.24

OUTFF

No Object

Value of Feed forward action on physical


scale

%MFxy.i.26

OUT_MAN

No Object

Command value

%MFxy.i.28

DEV

No Object

Process value setpoint deviation

%MFxy.i.30

PV

No Object

Value of process value on physical scale

%MFxy.i.32

SP

No Object

Value of setpoint on physical scale

%MFxy.i.34

PV_INF

0.0

Process value low limit

%MFxy.i.36

PV_SUP

100.0

Process value high limit

%MFxy.i.38

KP

1.0

Proportional co-efficient

%MFxy.i.40

TI

0.0

Integral time

%MFxy.i.42

TD

0.0

Derivative time

%MFxy.i.44

OUTBIAS

0.0

Bias on PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.46

INT_BAND

0.0

Integral band

%MFxy.i.48

DBAND

0.0

Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.50

KD

10.0

Filtering of the derivative

%MFxy.i.52

OUTRATE

0.0

Limit of output 1 speed variation

%MFxy.i.54

OUTRATE2

0.0

Limit of output 2 speed variation

%MFxy.i.56

OUT1_INF

0.0

Output 1 low limit

%MFxy.i.58

OUT1_SUP

100.0

Output 1 high limit

%MFxy.i.60

SP_MIN

0.0

Setpoint low limit

%MFxy.i.62

SP_MAX

100.

Setpoint high limit

%MFxy.i.64

OUT2_INF

0.0

Output 2 low limit

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Address

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MFxy.i.66

OUT2_SUP

100.0

Output 2 high limit

%MFxy.i.68

OUT1_TH1

0.0

Threshold 1 for output 1 for Heat/Cool or


Split Range

%MFxy.i.70

OUT1_TH2

50.0

Threshold 2 for output 1 for Heat/Cool or


Split Range

%MFxy.i.72

OUT2_TH1

50.0

Threshold 1 for output 2 for Heat/Cool or


Split Range

%MFxy.i.74

OUT2_TH2

100.0

Threshold 2 for output 2 for Heat/Cool or


Split Range

%MFxy.i.76

PV_LL

5.0

Process value very low threshold

%MFxy.i.78

PV_L

5.0

Process value low threshold

%MFxy.i.80

PV_H

95.0

Process value high threshold

%MFxy.i.82

PV_HH

95.0

Process value very high threshold

%MFxy.i.84

RATIO

1.0

Ratio value

%MFxy.i.86

RATIO_MIN

0.0

Ration minimum value

%MFxy.i.88

RATIO_MAX

100.0

Ratio maximum value

%MFxy.i.90

RATIO_BIAS

0.0

Value of Ratio bias

%MFxy.i.92

ONOFF_L

5.0

ON OFF loop controller low threshold

%MFxy.i.94

ONOFF_H

5.0

ON OFF loop controller high threshold

%MFxy.i.96

HYST

0.0

Hysteresis of 3 state ON OFF loop controller

%MFxy.i.98

DEV_L

5.0

Deviation low threshold

%MFxy.i.100

DEV_H

5.0

Deviation high threshold

%MFxy.i.102

T_FILTER

0.0

Process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.104

K_FILTER

1.0

Multiplication co-efficient on process value filtering

%MFxy.i.106

FILT_OUT

No Object

Value of filtering output

%MFxy.i.108

SQRT_OUT

No Object

Value of square root output

%MFxy.i.110

E2_IN

1428.0

Abcissae of first point of Segment S2

%MFxy.i.112

E3_IN

2857.0

Abcissae of first point of Segment S3

%MFxy.i.114

E4_IN

4285.0

Abcissae of first point of Segment S4

%MFxy.i.116

E5_IN

5714.0

Abcissae of first point of Segment S5

%MFxy.i.118

E6_IN

7143.0

Abcissae of first point of Segment S6

%MFxy.i.120

E7_IN

8571.0

Abcissae of first point of Segment S7

%MFxy.i.122

E2_OUT

14.28

Coordinates of first point of Segment S2

317

Process control language objects

318

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MFxy.i.124

E3_OUT

28.57

Coordinates of first point of Segment S3

%MFxy.i.126

E4_OUT

42.85

Coordinates of first point of Segment S4

%MFxy.i.128

E5_OUT

57.14

Coordinates of first point of Segment S5

%MFxy.i.130

E6_OUT

71.43

Coordinates of first point of Segment S6

%MFxy.i.132

E7_OUT

85.71

Coordinates of first point of Segment S7

%MFxy.i.134

THLD

1E+8

Totalizer limit

%MFxy.i.136

R_RATE

0.0

Setpoint rise speed limit

%MFxy.i.138

D_RATE

0.0

Setpoint descent speed limit

%MFxy.i.140

SPEED_LIM_OUT

No Object

Value of setpoint speed limiter output

%MFxy.i.142

INP_INFR1

0.0

R1 setpoint low scale

%MFxy.i.144

INP_SUPR1

100.0

R1 setpoint high scale

%MFxy.i.146

INP_INFR2

0.0

R2 setpoint low scale

%MFxy.i.148

INP_SUPR2

100.0

R2 setpoint high scale

%MFxy.i.150

T1_FF

0.0

Feed forward process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.152

T2_FF

0.0

Feed forward process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.154

OUT_FF_INF

0.0

Feed forward action low limit

%MFxy.i.156

OUT_FF_SUP

100.0

Feed forward action high limit

%MFxy.i.158

T_MOTOR1

10.0

Opening time for valve controlled by the


servo drive

%MFxy.i.160

T_MINI1

0.0

Minimum opening time for valve controlled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.162

T_MOTOR2

10.0

Opening time for valve controlled by the


servo drive

%MFxy.i.164

T_MINI2

0.0

Minimum opening time for valve controlled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.166

AT_STEP

10.0

Autotuning step function amplitude

%MFxy.i.168

AT_TMAX

100.0

Autotuning step function duration

%MFxy.i.170

AT_PERF

0.5

Autotuning stability criterion

%MFxy.i.172

KP_PREV

No Object

Value before proportional co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.174

TI_PREV

No Object

Value before integral co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.176

TD_PREV

No Object

Value before derived co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.178

KS

1.0

IMC static gain

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MFxy.i.180

OL_TIME

1.0

Time constant in BO

%MFxy.i.182

T_DELAY

0.0

Current pure delay time

%MFxy.i.184

CL_PERF

1.0

Time ratio OL / CL

%MFxy.i.186

Reserved

%MFxy.i.188

Reserved

%MFxy.i.190

Reserved

%MFxy.i.192

Reserved

319

Process control language objects

11.3

Language objects associated with the 3 single


loops

At a Glance
Subject of this
Section

This sub-section describes the language objects of the 3 single loops.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

320

Topic

Page

Configuration language objects

321

Default and diagnostics language objects

325

Process control language objects

334

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Configuration language objects


Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table describes the process control language objects associated with the 3 single loops.
Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.0

CONFIG_0_B1

No Object

Word bringing together the different configuration bits of the


process value

%KWxy.i.0:X0

FILTRAGE

Not configurable Filtering function of the process


(0)
value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X1

GENERATEUR DE
FONCTION

Not configurable Function generator of the pro(0)


cess value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X2

TOTALISATEUR

Missing (0)

Totalizer function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X3

RACINE CARRE

Square Root

Root function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X4

ALARMES

Present

Alarm function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X8

PV_CLIP

Missing (0)

Clipping or non-clipping of the


process value

%KWxy.i.0:X9

EXTRAPOL

Not configurable(0)

Extrapolation of function generator

%KWxy.i.0:X10

PV_UNI_BIP

Unipolar (0)

Type of process value: unipolar/bipolar

%KWxy.i.0:X11

PV_EXTERN

Missing (0)

Choice of Standard process


value (0) / External process
value (1)

%KWxy.i.0:X12

VALID_C1

Enabled (1)

Loop used (1) / not used (0)

%KWxy.i.0:X13

TOTALISATEUR:
UNITE MESURE

(X13=0, X14 =0): phys/ms


(X13=1, X14 =0): phys/s

%KWxy.i.0:X14

TOTALISATEUR:
UNITE MESURE

(X13=0, X14 =1): phys/mn


(X13=1, X14 =1): phys/ms

%KWxy.i.1

CONFIG_1_B1

No Object

Word grouping the different


setpoint configuration bits

%KWxy.i.1:X0

SP_SIMPLE

Selected (1)

Type of setpoint selected: single

%KWxy.i.1:X1

SP_SELECTION

Not configurable Type of setpoint selected: se(0)


lection

321

Process control language objects

Address

322

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.1:X2

SPEED_LIMITEUR

Not selected (0) Speed limiter on the setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X3

SP_SPP

Not selected (0) Type of setpoint selected: Programmer

%KWxy.i.1:X4

RL/L

Remote local (0) Speed limiter either on the local setpoint or on Remote/Local

%KWxy.i.1:X8

SEL_MIN

Not configurable Function selected if there is a


(0)
selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X9

SEL_MAX

Not configurable Function selected if there is a


(0)
selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X10

SEL_SWITCH

Not configurable Function selected if there is a


(0)
selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X11

R/L_INIT

Local (1)

%KWxy.i.1:X12

R1/R2_INIT

Not configurable Initial value of the status of the


selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X13

SP_RATIO

Not configurable Type of setpoint selected: Ra(0)


tio

%KWxy.i.1:X14

SP_LIMITEUR

not selected (0)

Setpoint limiter (e.g.


PARAM_SP)

%KWxy.i.1:X15

SP_FOLW

No tracking

Tracking (0)

%KWxy.i.2

CONFIG_2_B1

No Object

Word bringing together the different configuration bits of the


loop controller and FF

%KWxy.i.2:X0

PID

Present

PID function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X1

ONOFF2

Missing (0)

ON OFF 2 states branch of


loop controller

%KWxy.i.2:X2

ONOFF3

Missing (0)

ON OFF 3 states branch of


loop controller

%KWxy.i.2:X3

SPLRG/CHFROID

Not configurable OR Heat/Cool and Split Range


(0)
presence bits

%KWxy.i.2:X4

SPLIT/RANGE

Not configurable Loop controller branch Split


(0)
Range function

%KWxy.i.2:X5

CHAUD/FROID

Not configurable Loop controller branch Heat/


(0)
Cool function

%KWxy.i.2:X6

ALARMES_DEV

Present

Initial value of the Remote/Local selected setpoint

Alarm function on deviation of


the loop controller branch

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.2:X7

FEED FORWARD

Not configurable Presence of a Feed forward in(0)


put

%KWxy.i.2:X8

BUMP

With bumps (1)

Management of bumps when


changing operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X9

PV_DEV

On process value (0)

Type of derivative action

%KWxy.i.2:X10

MIX_PAR

PID parallel series

Mixed or parallel loop controller


type

%KWxy.i.2:X11

REV_DIR

PID reverse action (0)

Type of loop controller action

%KWxy.i.2:X12

MANU/AUTO_INIT

Manu (0)

Initial value of loop controller


operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X13

LEAD LAG

Not configurable Leadlag function of the Feed


(0)
forward branch

%KWxy.i.2:X14

FF_UNI_BIP

Not configurable Type of Feed forward process


(0)
value: unipolar/bipolar

%KWxy.i.2:X15

IMC

Missing (0)

IMC function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.3

CONFIG_3_B1

No Object

Word grouping together the different output configuration bits

%KWxy.i.3:X0

SERVO

Not selected

Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.3:X1

SERVO2

Not configurable Type of output selected: Servo


(0)

%KWxy.i.3:X2

ANALOGIQUE1

Selected

%KWxy.i.3:X3

ANALOGIQUE2

Not configurable Type of output selected: Ana(0)


log

%KWxy.i.3:X4

PWM1

Not selected

%KWxy.i.3:X5

PWM2

Not configurable Type of output selected: PWM


(0)

%KWxy.i.3:X8

POT_REV1

Direct (0)

%KWxy.i.3:X9

POT_REV2

Not configurable Servo copy direction


(0)

%KWxy.i.3:X10

POT_VAL1_INIT

No (0)

%KWxy.i.3:X11

POT_VAL2_INIT

Not configurable Presence of (Reserved) Servo


(0)
copy

%KWxy.i.3:X12

ANALOG1_UNI_BIP

Unipolar

Type of output selected: Analog

Type of output selected: PWM

Servo copy direction

Presence of Servo copy

Type of analog output: unipolar/bipolar

323

Process control language objects

324

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.3:X13

ANALOG2_UNI_BIP

Not configurable Type of analog output: unipo(0)


lar/bipolar

%KWxy.i.4

NOM DE LA BOUCLE

Loop i with i [0;9] Loop name

%KWxy.i.8

UNITE DE LA BOUCLE

Loop unit

%KWxy.i.11

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW0

Loop 2 process value. Unused


functions have their bit at 0

%KWxy.i.12

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW1

Loop 2 setpoint

%KWxy.i.13

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW2

Loop 2 loop controller and FF

%KWxy.i.14

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW3

Loop 2 output

%KWxy.i.15

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW4

%KWxy.i.19

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW8

Loop unit

%KWxy.i.22

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW0

Loop 3 process value. Unused


functions have their bit at 0

%KWxy.i.23

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW1

Loop 3 setpoint

%KWxy.i.24

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW2

Loop 3 loop controller and FF

%KWxy.i.25

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW3

Loop 3 output

%KWxy.i.26

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW4

%KWxy.i.30

IDEM BOUCLE 1
%KW8

Loop i with i [0;9] Loop name

Loop i with i [0;9] Loop name


Loop unit

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Default and diagnostics language objects


Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table describes the diagnostics and default language objects associated with
the 3 single loops.
Address

Parameter name

Default
value

%MWxy.i.0

EXCH_STS

Exchange management
status

%MWxy.i.1

EXCH_ERR

Exchange report status

%MWxy.i.2

INTERNAL_FLT_B1

Standard channel fault on


loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X4

CONF_FLT_B1

Serious internal fault on


loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X5

MISSING_ADDR_B1

Configuration fault on loop


1

%MWxy.i.2:X6

WARN

IMC register address


missing on loop 1 or Servo
copy address missing

%MWxy.i.2:X7

STS_ERR_CALC_COR_B1

Sum of errors

%MWxy.i.2:X8

STS_ERR_FLOT_COR_B1

Loop controller branch


calculation error on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X9

STS_ERR_CALC_PV_B1

Loop controller branch


floating point error on loop
1

%MWxy.i.2:X10

STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_B1

PV branch calculation error on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X11

STS_ERR_CALC_OUT_B1

PV branch floating point


error on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X12

STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT_B1

OUT branch calculation


error on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X13

STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1_B1

OUT branch floating point


error on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X14

STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_B1

OUT1 branch incorrect


scale on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X15

CH_FLT_B2

PV branch incorrect scale


on loop 1

%MWxy.i.3

INTERNAL_FLT_B2

No Object

Comment

Standard channel fault on


loop 2

325

Process control language objects

326

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.3:X4

CONF_FLT_B2

Serious internal fault on


loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X5

MISSING_ADDR_B2

Configuration fault on loop


2

%MWxy.i.3:X6

Exchange in progress

IMC register address


missing on loop 2 or Servo
copy address missing

%MWxy.i.3:X8

STS_ERR_CALC_COR_B2

Loop controller branch


calculation error on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X9

STS_ERR_FLOT_COR_B2

Loop controller branch


floating point error on loop
2

%MWxy.i.3:X10

STS_ERR_CALC_PV_B2

PV branch calculation error on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X11

STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_B2

PV branch floating point


error on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X12

STS_ERR_CALC_OUT_B2

OUT branch calculation


error on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X13

STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT_B2

OUT branch floating point


error on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X14

STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1_B2

OUT1 branch incorrect


scale on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X15

STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_B2

PV branch incorrect scale


on loop 2

%MWxy.i.4

CH_FLT_B3

Standard channel fault on


loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X4

INTERNAL_FLT_B3

Serious internal fault on


loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X5

CONF_FLT_B3

Configuration fault on loop


3

%MWxy.i.4:X8

STS_ERR_CALC_COR_B3

Loop controller branch


calculation error on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X9

STS_ERR_FLOT_COR_B3

Loop controller branch


floating point error on loop
3

%MWxy.i.4:X10

STS_ERR_CALC_PV_B3

PV branch calculation error on loop 3

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.4:X11

STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_B3

PV branch floating point


error on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X12

STS_ERR_CALC_OUT_B3

OUT branch calculation


error on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X13

STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT_B3

OUT branch floating point


error on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X14

STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1_B3

OUT1 branch incorrect


scale on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X15

STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_B3

%MWxy.i.5

STATUS1_B1

%MWxy.i.5:X0

HOLD_TOT_B1

Totalizer function state

%MWxy.i.5:X1

PV _SIM_B1

Process value simulation


state

%MWxy.i.5:X2

STS_PV_H_LIM_B1

High limit on process value branch (PV_SUP)

%MWxy.i.5:X3

STS_PV_L_LIM_B1

Low limit on process value


branch (PV_INF)

%MWxy.i.5:X4

STS_SP_H_LIM_B1

High limit on setpoint


branch

%MWxy.i.5:X5

STS_SP_B_LIM_B1

Low limit on setpoint


branch

%MWxy.i.5:X6

STS_L_R

%MWxy.i.5:X7

STS_TR_S_B1

Tracking status bit

%MWxy.i.5:X8

STS_ALARMS_B1

Sum of process value


alarms

%MWxy.i.5:X9

STS_HH_B1

Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.5:X10

STS_H_B1

High alarm

PV branch incorrect scale


No Object

R/L Init

Word grouping the different Process value/Setpoint status bits

State of the Remote/Local


selected setpoint

%MWxy.i.5:X11

STS_L_B1

Low alarm

%MWxy.i.5:X12

STS_LL_B1

Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.5:X13

STS_DEV_H_B1

High threshold for Process


value/Setpoint deviation
(>0)

327

Process control language objects

328

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

%MWxy.i.5:X14

STS_DEV_L_B1

Low threshold for Process


value/Setpoint deviation
(<0)

%MWxy.i.5:X15

STS_THLD_DONE_B1

Totalizer threshold
reached

%MWxy.i.6

STATUS2_B1

%MWxy.i.6:X0

STS_AT_RUNNING_B1

Autotuning in progress
(common to 3 loops)

%MWxy.i.6:X1

STS_M_A_B1

PID operating mode state

No Object

Comment

Word grouping the different Loop controller/output


status bits

%MWxy.i.6:X2

STS_RAISE1_B1

Open command

%MWxy.i.6:X3

STS_LOWER1_B1

Close command

%MWxy.i.6:X4

STS_OUT_L_LIM_B1

The calculated output of


the PID is greater than or
equal to OUT_SUP

%MWxy.i.6:X5

STS_OUT_H_LIM_B1

The calculated output of


the PID is smaller than or
equal to OUT_INF

%MWxy.i.6:X6

POT_VAL_B1

Servo with copy operation

%MWxy.i.6:X7

RAISE_STOP_B1

Open limit reached on


Servo drive (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X8

LOWER_STOP_B1

Close limit reached on


Servo drive (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X9

STS_TOP_NEXT_CYC_B1

Sampling pulse on next


cycle

%MWxy.i.6:X10

STS_TOP_CUR_CYC_B1

Sampling pulse in current


cycle

%MWxy.i.6:X11

OVER_TOT_WARN_B1

Totalizer overflow error


(T_MOTOR1_WARN suppressed)

%MWxy.i.6:X12

INP_INF_WARN_B1

INP_INF and INP_SUP


loop 1 parameter check
error

%MWxy.i.6:X13

SP_MIN_WARN_B1

SP_MIN and SP_MAX


loop 1 parameter check
error

%MWxy.i.6:X14

SP_CALC_WARN_B1

Setpoint calculation error


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

%MWxy.i.6:X15

SP_FLOAT_WARN_B1

%MWxy.i.7

STATUS1_B2

Default
value

Comment
Setpoint floating point error

No Object

Word grouping the different Process value/Setpoint status bits

%MWxy.i.7:X0

HOLD_TOT_B2

Totalizer function state

%MWxy.i.7:X1

PV _SIM_B2

Process value simulation


state

%MWxy.i.7:X2

STS_PV_H_LIM_B2

High limit on process value branch (PV_SUP)

%MWxy.i.7:X3

STS_PV_L_LIM_B2

Low limit on process value


branch (PV_INF)

%MWxy.i.7:X4

STS_SP_H_LIM_B2

High limit on setpoint


branch

%MWxy.i.7:X5

STS_SP_B_LIM_B2

Low limit on setpoint


branch

%MWxy.i.7:X6

STS_L_R_B2

R/L Init

State of the Remote/Local


selected setpoint

%MWxy.i.7:X7

STS_TR_S_B2

Tracking status bit

%MWxy.i.7:X8

STS_ALARMS_B2

Sum of process value


alarms

%MWxy.i.7:X9

STS_HH_B2

Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X10

STS_H_B2

High alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X11

STS_L_B2

Low alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X12

STS_LL_B2

Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X13

STS_DEV_H_B2

High threshold for Process


value/Setpoint deviation
(>0)

%MWxy.i.7:X14

STS_DEV_L_B2

Low threshold for Process


value/Setpoint deviation
(<0)

%MWxy.i.7:X15

STS_THLD_DONE_B2

Totalizer threshold
reached

%MWxy.i.8

STATUS2_B2

No Object

Word grouping the different loop controller/output


status bits

329

Process control language objects

330

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.8:X0

STS_AT_RUNNING_B2

%MWxy.i.8:X1

STS_M_A_B2

PID operation state

%MWxy.i.8:X2

STS_RAISE1_B2

Open command

%MWxy.i.8:X3

STS_LOWER1_B2

Close command

%MWxy.i.8:X4

STS_OUT_L_LIM_B2

The calculated output of


the PID is greater than or
equal to OUT_SUP

%MWxy.i.8:X5

STS_OUT_H_LIM_B2

The calculated output of


the PID is smaller than or
equal to OUT_INF

%MWxy.i.8:X6

POT_VAL_B2

Servo with copy operation

%MWxy.i.8:X7

RAISE STOP_B2

Open limit reached on servo drive (reserved)

%MWxy.i.8:X8

LOWER STOP_B2

Close limit reached on


servo drive (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.8:X9

STS_TOP_NEXT_CYC_B2

Sampling pulse on next


cycle

%MWxy.i.8:X10

STS_TOP_CUR_CYCLE_B2

Sampling pulse in current


cycle

%MWxy.i.8:X11

OVER_TOT_WARN_B2

Totalizer overflow error


(T_MOTOR1_WARN suppressed)

%MWxy.i.8:X12

INP_INF_WARN_B2

INP_INF and INP_SUP


loop 2 parameter check
error

%MWxy.i.8:X13

SP_MIN_WARN_B2

SP_MIN and SP_MAX


loop 2 parameter check
error

%MWxy.i.8:X14

SP_CALC_WARN_B2

Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.8:X15

SP_FLOAT_WARN_B2

Setpoint floating point error

%MWxy.i.9

STATUS1_B3

Word grouping the different loop 3 Process value/


Setpoint status bits

%MWxy.i.9:X0

STS_HOLD_TOT_B3

Totalizer function state

%MWxy.i.9:X1

STS_PV _SIM_B3

Process value simulation


state

Autotuning in progress
(common to 3 loops)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

%MWxy.i.9:X2

STS_PV_H_LIM_B3

High limit on process value branch (PV_SUP)

%MWxy.i.9:X3

STS_PV_L_LIM_B3

Low limit on process value


branch (PV_INF)

%MWxy.i.9:X4

STS_SP_H_LIM_B3

High limit on setpoint


branch

%MWxy.i.9:X5

STS_SP_B_LIM_B3

Low limit on setpoint


branch
R/L Init

Comment

%MWxy.i.9:X6

STS_L_R_B3

%MWxy.i.9:X7

STS_TR_S_B3

Setpoint state
Tracking status bit

%MWxy.i.9:X8

STS_ALARMS_B3

Sum of process value


alarms

%MWxy.i.9:X9

STS_HH_B3

Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.9:X10

STS_H_B3

High alarm

%MWxy.i.9:X11

STS_L_B3

Low alarm

%MWxy.i.9:X12

STS_LL_B3

Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.9:X13

STS_DEV_H_B3

High threshold for Process


value/Setpoint deviation
(>0)

%MWxy.i.9:X14

STS_DEV_L_B3

Low threshold for Process


value/Setpoint deviation
(<0)

%MWxy.i.9:X15

STS_THLD_DONE_B3

Totalizer threshold
reached

%MWxy.i.10

STATUS2_B3

%MWxy.i.10:X0

STS_AT_RUNNING_B3

Autotuning in progress
(common to 3 loops)

%MWxy.i.1:X1

STS_M_A_B3

PID operation state

%MWxy.i.10:X2

STS_RAISE1_B3

Open command

%MWxy.i.10:X3

STS_LOWER1_B3

Close command

%MWxy.i.10:X4

STS_OUT_L_LIM_B3

The calculated output of


the PID is greater than or
equal to OUT_SUP

No Object

Word grouping the different Process value/Setpoint status bits

331

Process control language objects

332

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.10:X5

STS_OUT_H_LIM_B3

The calculated output of


the PID is smaller than or
equal to OUT_INF

%MWxy.i.10:X6

POT_VAL_B3

Servo with copy operation

%MWxy.i.10:X7

RAISE_STOP_B3

Open limit reached on servo drive (reserved)

%MWxy.i.10:X8

LOWER_STOP_B3

Close limit reached on


servo drive (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.10:X9

STS_TOP_NEXT_CYC_B3

Sampling pulse on next


cycle

%MWxy.i.10:X10 STS_TOP_CUR_CYC_B3

Sampling pulse in current


cycle

%MWxy.i.10:X11 OVER_TOT_WARN_B3

Totalizer overflow error


(T_MOTOR1_WARN suppressed)

%MWxy.i.10:X12 INP_INF_WARN_B3

INP_INF and INP_SUP


loop 3 parameter check
error

%MWxy.i.10:X13 SP_MIN_WARN_B3

SP_MIN and SP_SUP


loop 3 parameter check
error

%MWxy.i.10:X14 SP_CALC_WARN_B3

Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.10:X15 SP_FLOAT_WARN_B3

Setpoint floating point error

%MWxy.i.11

STATUS4

No Object

Word grouping end of different errors diagnostics

%MWxy.i.11:X0

AT_FAILED

Autotuning failed

%MWxy.i.11:X1

AT_ABORTED

Autotuning diagnostics interrupted

%MWxy.i.11:X2

AT_ERR_PARAM

Autotuning diagnostics
parameter error

%MWxy.i.11:X3

AT_PWF_OR_EFB_FAILURE

Autotuning diagnostics
system error or power failure

%MWxy.i.11:X4

AT_SATUR

Autotuning diagnostics
process value saturation

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.11:X5

AT_DV_TOO_SMALL

Autotuning diagnostics insufficient process value


deviation

%MWxy.i.11:X6

AT_TSAMP_HIGH

Autotuning Diagnostics
sampling pulse period too
long

%MWxy.i.11:X7

AT_INCONSIST_RESP

Autotuning diagnostics inconsistent response

%MWxy.i.11:X8

AT_NOT_STAB_INIT

Autotuning diagnostics:
initially unstable process
value

%MWxy.i.11:X9

AT_TMAX_TOO_SMALL

Autotuning diagnostics
scale period too small

%MWxy.i.11:X10 AT_NOISE_TOO_HIGH

Autotuning diagnostics
process value noise too
high

%MWxy.i.11:X11 AT_TMAX_TOO_HIGH

Autotuning diagnostics
scale period too long

%MWxy.i.11:X12 AT_OVERSHOOT

Autotuning diagnostics
overshoot above 10%

%MWxy.i.11:X13 AT_UNDERSHOOT

Autotuning diagnostics
non-minimum phase undershoot

%MWxy.i.11:X14 AT_UNSYMETRICAL_PT

Autotuning diagnostics
procedure too non-symmetrical

%MWxy.i.11:X15 AT_INTEGRATING_PLANT

Autotuning diagnostics integrating process

%MWxy.i.12

Reserved

%MWxy.i.13

ORDER_COMMAND

Command order

%MDxy.i.14

PARAM_COMMAND

Command parameter

333

Process control language objects

Process control language objects


Description

334

This table describes the different process control language objects associated with
the 3 single loops.
Address

Parameter name

Default val- Comment


ue

%MFxy.i.16

AT_STEP

10.0

Autotuning step function amplitude

%MFxy.i.18

AT_TMAX

100.0

Autotuning step function duration

%MFxy.i.20

AT_PERF

0.5

Criteria for autotuning Stability

%MFxy.i.22

T_ECH_B1

0.3

Sampling period

%MFxy.i.24

OUT_MAN_B1

No Object

Command value

%MFxy.i.26

DEV_B1

No Object

Process value setpoint deviation

%MFxy.i.28

PV_B1

No Object

Process control value on physical


scale

%MFxy.i.30

SP_B1

No Object

Value of setpoint on physical scale

%MFxy.i.32

PV_INF_B1

0.0

Low process control limit

%MFxy.i.34

PV_SUP_B1

100.0

High process control limit

%MFxy.i.36

KP_B1

1.0

Proportional coefficient

%MFxy.i.38

TI_B1

0.0

Integral time

%MFxy.i.40

TD_B1

0.0

Derivative time

%MFxy.i.42

OUTBIAS_B1

0.0

Bias on PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.44

INT_BAND_B1

0.0

Integral band

%MFxy.i.46

DBAND_B1

0.0

Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.48

OUTRATE_B1

0.0

Limit of output variation speed

%MFxy.i.50

OUT1_INF_B1

0.0

Low limit of Output 1

%MFxy.i.52

OUT1_SUP_B1

100.0

High limit of Output 1

%MFxy.i.54

SP_INF_B1

0.0

Low setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.56

SP_SUP_B1

100.

High setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.58

PV_LL_B1

5.0

Very low process control threshold

%MFxy.i.60

PV_L_B1

5.0

Low process control threshold

%MFxy.i.62

PV_H_B1

95.0

High process control threshold

%MFxy.i.64

PV_HH_B1

95.0

Very high process control threshold

%MFxy.i.66

ONOFF_L_B1

-5.0

Low threshold of ON OFF Loop


Controller

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default val- Comment


ue

%MFxy.i.68

ONOFF_H_B1

5.0

High threshold of ON OFF Loop


Controller

%MFxy.i.70

HYST_B1

0.0

Hysteresis of 3 state ON OFF Loop


Controller

%MFxy.i.72

DEV_L_B1

-5.0

Low deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.74

DEV_H_B1

5.0

High deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.76

THLD_B1

1E+8

Totalizing limit

%MFxy.i.78

R_RATE_B1

0.0

Speed limiter ascent speed value

%MFxy.i.80

D_RATE_B1

0.0

Speed limiter descent speed value

%MFxy.i.82

SPEED_LIM_OUT_B1 No Object

Speed limiter output value

%MFxy.i.84

INP_MINR_B1

Remote setpoint loop 1 low scale

%MFxy.i.86

INP_MAXR_B1

100.0

Remote setpoint loop 1 high scale

%MFxy.i.88

T_MOTOR_B1

0.0

Open time for valve controlled by


the servo drive

%MFxy.i.90

T_MINI_B1

0.0

Minimum open time for valve controlled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.92

KP_PREV_B1

No Object

Value before proportional coefficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.94

TI_PREV_B1

No Object

Value before integral coefficient


autotuning

%MFxy.i.96

TD_PREV_B1

No Object

Value before derivative coefficient


autotuning

%MFxy.i.98

T_ECH_B2

0.3

Sampling period

%MFxy.i.100

OUT_MAN_B2

No Object

Command value

%MFxy.i.102

DEV_B2

No Object

Process value setpoint deviation

%MFxy.i.104

PV_B2

No Object

Value of process control on physical scale

%MFxy.i.106

SP_B2

No Object

Value of setpoint on physical scale

%MFxy.i.108

PV_INF_B2

0.0

Low process control limit

%MFxy.i.110

PV_SUP_B2

100.0

High process control limit

%MFxy.i.112

KP_B2

1.0

Proportional coefficient

%MFxy.i.114

TI_B2

0.0

Integral time

%MFxy.i.116

TD_B2

0.0

Derivative time

%MFxy.i.118

OUTBIAS_B2

0.0

Bias on PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.120

INT_BAND_B2

0.0

Integral band

0.0

335

Process control language objects

Address

336

Parameter name

Default val- Comment


ue

%MFxy.i.122

DBAND_B2

0.0

Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.124

OUTRATE_B2

0.0

Limit of output variation speed

%MFxy.i.126

OUT1_INF_B2

0.0

Low limit of Output 1

%MFxy.i.128

OUT1_SUP_B2

100.0

High limit of Output 1

%MFxy.i.130

SP_INF_B2

0.0

Low setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.132

SP_SUP_B2

100.0

High setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.134

PV_LL_B2

5.0

Very low process control threshold

%MFxy.i.136

PV_L_B2

5.0

Low process control threshold

%MFxy.i.138

PV_H_B2

95.0

High process control threshold

%MFxy.i.140

PV_HH_B2

95.0

Very high process control threshold

%MFxy.i.142

ONOFF_L_B2

-5.0

Low threshold of ON OFF Loop


Controller

%MFxy.i.144

ONOFF_H_B2

5.0

High threshold of ON OFF Loop


Controller

%MFxy.i.146

HYST_B2

0.0

Hysteresis of 3 state ON OFF Loop


Controller

%MFxy.i.148

DEV_L_B2

-5.0

Low deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.150

DEV_H_B2

5.0

High deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.152

THLD_B2

1E+8

Totalizing limit

%MFxy.i.154

R_RATE_B2

0.0

Speed limiter ascent speed value

%MFxy.i.156

D_RATE_B2

0.0

Speed limiter descent speed value

%MFxy.i.158

SPEED_LIM_OUT_B2 No Object

Speed limiter output value

%MFxy.i.160

INP_MINR_B2

Remote setpoint loop 2 low scale

0.0

%MFxy.i.162

INP_MAXR_B2

100.0

Remote setpoint loop 2 high scale

%MFxy.i.164

T_MOTOR_B2

0.0

Open time for valve controlled by


the servo drive

%MFxy.i.166

T_MINI_B2

0.0

Minimum open time for valve controlled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.168

KP_PREV_B2

No Object

Value before proportional coefficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.170

TI_PREV_B2

No Object

Value before integral coefficient


autotuning

%MFxy.i.172

TD_PREV_B2

No Object

Value before derivative coefficient


autotuning

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Address

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter name

Default val- Comment


ue

%MFxy.i.174

T_ECH_B3

0.3

Sampling period

%MFxy.i.176

OUT_MAN_B3

No Object

Command value

%MFxy.i.178

DEV_B3

No Object

Setpoint process control deviation

%MFxy.i.180

PV_B3

No Object

Value of process control on physical scale

%MFxy.i.182

SP_B3

No Object

Value of setpoint on physical scale

%MFxy.i.184

PV_INF_B3

0.0

Low process value limit

%MFxy.i.186

PV_SUP_B3

100.0

High process value limit

%MFxy.i.188

KP_B3

1.0

Proportional coefficient

%MFxy.i.190

TI_B3

0.0

Integral time

%MFxy.i.192

TD_B3

0.0

Derivative time

%MFxy.i.194

OUTBIAS_B3

0.0

Bias on PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.196

INT_BAND_B3

0.0

Integral band

%MFxy.i.198

DBAND_B3

0.0

Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.200

OUTRATE_B3

0.0

Limit of output variation speed

%MFxy.i.202

OUT_INF_B3

0.0

Low limit of output 1

%MFxy.i.204

OUT_SUP_B3

100.0

High limit of output 1

%MFxy.i.206

SP_INF_B3

0.0

Low setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.208

SP_SUP_B3

100.0

High setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.210

PV_LL_B3

5.0

Very low measurement threshold

%MFxy.i.212

PV_L_B3

5.0

Low measurement threshold

%MFxy.i.214

PV_H_B3

95.0

High measurement threshold

%MFxy.i.216

PV_HH_B3

95.0

Very high measurement threshold

%MFxy.i.218

ONOFF_L_B3

-5.0

Low threshold of ON OFF Loop


Controller

%MFxy.i.220

ONOFF_H_B3

5.0

High threshold of ON OFF Loop


Controller

%MFxy.i.222

HYST1_B3

0.0

Hysteresis of 3 state ON OFF Loop


Controller

%MFxy.i.224

DEV_L_B3

-5.0

Low deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.226

DEV_H_B3

5.0

High deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.228

THLD_B3

1E+8

Totalizing limit

%MFxy.i.230

R_RATE_B3

0.0

Speed limiter ascent speed value

%MFxy.i.232

D_RATE_B3

0.0

Speed limiter descent speed value

337

Process control language objects

Address

338

Parameter name

Default val- Comment


ue

%MFxy.i.234

SPEED_LIM_OUT_B3 No Object

Speed limiter output value

%MFxy.i.236

INP_MINR_B3

Remote setpoint loop 3 low scale

0.0

%MFxy.i.238

INP_MAXR_B3

100.0

Remote setpoint loop 3 high scale

%MFxy.i.240

T_MOTOR_B3

0.0

Open time for valve controlled by


the servo drive

%MFxy.i.242

T_MINI1_B3

0.0

Minimum open time for valve controlled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.244

KP_PREV_B3

No Object

Value before proportional coefficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.246

TI_PREV_B3

No Object

Value before integral coefficient


autotuning

%MFxy.i.248

TD_PREV_B3

No Object

Value before derivative coefficient


autotuning

%MWxy.i.250

PV_SIM_B1

No Object

Simulated measurement value


loop 1

%MWxy.i.251

PV_SIM_B2

No Object

Simulated measurement value


loop 2

%MWxy.i.252

PV_SIM_B3

No Object

Simulated measurement value


loop 3

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

11.4

Language objects associated with the single loop


cascade

At a Glance
Subject of this
section

This section describes the cascade loop language objects.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Topic

Page

Configuration language objects

340

Fault and diagnostics language objects

346

Process control language objects

353

339

Process control language objects

Configuration language objects


Description

340

This table describes the configuration language objects associated with the single
loop cascade.
Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.0

CONFIG_0_M

No Object

Word bringing together the different configuration bits of the


process value

%KWxy.i.0:X0

Filtering

Missing (0)

Filtering function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X1

Function generator

Missing (0)

Function generator of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X2

Totalizer

No Object

Totalizer function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X3

Square root

Missing (0)

Square root function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X4

Alarms

Present

Alarm function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X8

PV_CLIP

Missing (0)

Lopping or non-lopping of the


process value

%KWxy.i.0:X9

EXTRAPOL

No (0)

Extrapolation of function generator

%KWxy.i.0:X10

PV_UNI_BIP

Unipolar (0)

Type: unipolar/bipolar of the


process value

%KWxy.i.0:X11

PV_EXTERNE

Not selected (0)

Choice of standard process value (0) / external process value


(1)

%KWxy.i.1

CONFIG_1_M

No Object

Word grouping the different setpoint configuration bits

%KWxy.i.1:X0

SP_Simple

Selected (1)

Type of setpoint selected: single

%KWxy.i.1:X1

SP_Selection

Not selected (0)

Type of setpoint: selection

%KWxy.i.1:X2

Speed_Limiteur

Not selected (0)

Speed limiter on the setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X3

SP_SPP

Not selected (0)

Type of setpoint selected: Programmer

%KWxy.i.1:X4

RL/L

Local remote (0) Speed limiter either on the local


setpoint or in Remote/Local
mode

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.1:X8

Sel_Min

Missing (0)

Function selected for setpoint


type Selection

%KWxy.i.1:X9

Sel_Max

Missing (0)

Function selected for setpoint


type Selection

%KWxy.i.1:X10

SEL_SWITCH

Present on Selection

Function selected for setpoint


type Selection

%KWxy.i.1:X11

R/L_INIT

Local (1)

Initial value of the Remote/Local


selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X12

R1/R2_INIT

R1 (0)

Initial value of the status of the


selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X13

SP_Ratio

Not selected (0)

Type of setpoint selected: Ratio

%KWxy.i.1:X14

SP_Limiteur

Not present

Setpoint limiter (e.g.


PARAM_SP)

%KWxy.i.1:X15

SP_Folw

No setpoint

Tracking setpoint (0)

%KWxy.i.2

CONFIG_2_M

No Object

Word bringing together the different loop controller configuration bits and Feed Forward

%KWxy.i.2:X0

PID

Present (always) PID function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X1

ONOFF2

No Object

ON OFF 2 states branch of loop


controller

%KWxy.i.2:X2

ONOFF3

No Object

ON OFF 3 states branch of loop


controller

%KWxy.i.2:X3

SPLRG/HOTCOLD

No Object

OR Hot/Cold and Split Range


presence bits

%KWxy.i.2:X4

Split/Range

No Object

Loop controller branch Split


Range function

%KWxy.i.2:X5

Hot/Cold

No Object

Hot/Cold function of the loop


controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X6

ALARMES_DEV

Present

Alarm function on diversion of


the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X7

Feed Forward

Missing (0)

Presence of a Feed forward input

%KWxy.i.2:X8

BUMP

With bumps (1)

Management bumps when


changing operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X9

PV_DEV

On process value (0)

Type of derived action

341

Process control language objects

342

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.2:X10

MIX_PAR

PID parallel series

Mixed or parallel loop controller


type

%KWxy.i.2:X11

REV_DIR

PID action

Type of inverse loop controller


action (0)

%KWxy.i.2:X12

MANU/AUTO_INIT

Auto (1)

Initial value of loop controller operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X13

Lead lag

Missing (0)

Leadlag function of the Feed


forward branch

%KWxy.i.2:X14

FF_UNI_BIP

Unipolar

Type of Feed forward process


value: unipolar or bipolar

%KWxy.i.2:X15

IMC

Missing (0)

IMC function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.3

Loop name

Loop i with i [0.9] Loop name

%KWxy.i.7

Loop unit

%KWxy.i.10

CONFIG_0_E

No Object

Word grouping the different Process value configuration bits

%KWxy.i.10:X0

Filtering

Missing (0)

Filtering function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X1

Function generator

No Object

Function generator of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X2

Totalizer

Missing (0)

Totalizer function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X3

Square root

Missing (0)

Square root function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X4

Alarms

Present

Alarm function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X8

PV_CLIP

Missing (0)

Lopping or non-lopping of the


process value

%KWxy.i.10:X9

EXTRAPOL

No Object

Extrapolation of function generator

%KWxy.i.10:X10 PV_UNI_BIP

Unipolar (0)

Type of process value: unipolar


or bipolar

%KWxy.i.10:X13 Totalizer: Process


value unit

(X13=0, X14 =0): phys/ms


(X13=1, X14 =0): phys/s

%KWxy.i.10:X14 Totalizer: Process


value unit

(X13=0, X14 =1): phys/mn


(X13=1, X14 =1): phys/h

%KWxy.i.11

No Object

Word grouping the different setpoint configuration bits

CONFIG_1_E

Loop unit

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.11:X0

SP_Simple

Selected (1)

Type of setpoint selected: Single

%KWxy.i.11:X1

SP_Selection

No Object

Type of setpoint: Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X2

Speed_Limiteur

Not selected (0)

Speed limiter on the setpoint

%KWxy.i.11:X3

SP_SPP

No Object

Type of setpoint selected: Programmer

%KWxy.i.11:X4

RL/L

Local remote (0) Speed limiter either on the local


setpoint or in Remote/Local
mode

%KWxy.i.11:X8

Sel_Min

No Object

Function selected for setpoint


type Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X9

Sel_max

No Object

Function selected for setpoint


type Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X10 Sel_switch

No Object

Function selected for setpoint


type Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X11 R/L_INIT

Local (1)

Initial value of the Remote/Local


selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.11:X12 R1/R2_INIT

No Object

Initial value of the status of the


selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.11:X13 SP_Ratio

No Object

Type of setpoint selected: Ratio

%KWxy.i.11:X14 SP_Limiteur

Not present

Setpoint limiter (e.g.


PARAM_SP)

%KWxy.i.11:X15 SP_Folw

Non tracking
setpoint (0)

Tracking setpoint

%KWxy.i.12

CONFIG_2_E

No Object

Word bringing together the different loop controller configuration bits and Feed forward

%KWxy.i.12:X0

PID

Present (always) PID function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.12:X1

ONOFF2

No Object

ON OFF 2 states branch of loop


controller

%KWxy.i.12:X2

ONOFF3

No Object

ON OFF 3 states branch of loop


controller

%KWxy.i.12:X3

SPLRG/HotCold

No Object

Or Hot/Cold and Split Range


presence bits

%KWxy.i.12:X4

Split/Range

Missing (0)

Loop controller branch Split


Range function

343

Process control language objects

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.12:X5

Hot/Cold

Not selected

Hot/Cold function of the loop


controller branch

%KWxy.i.12:X6

Alarmes_DEV

Present

Alarm function on diversion of


the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.12:X7

Feed Forward

No Object

Presence of a Feed forward input

%KWxy.i.12:X8

BUMP

With bumps (1)

Management of bumps when


changing operating mode

%KWxy.i.12:X9

PV_DEV

On process value (0)

Type of derived action

%KWxy.i.12:X10 MIX_PAR

PID parallel series

Mixed or parallel loop controller


type

%KWxy.i.12:X11 REV_DIR

PID action

Type of inverse loop controller


action (0)

%KWxy.i.12:X12 MANU/AUTO_INIT

Manu (0)

Initial value of loop controller operating mode

%KWxy.i.12:X13 Lead lag

No Object

Leadlag function of the Feed


forward branch

%KWxy.i.12:X14 FF_UNI_BIP

No Object

Type of Feed forward process


value: unipolar or bipolar

%KWxy.i.12:X15 IMC

Missing (0)

IMC function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.13

CONFIG_3_E

No Object

Word grouping the different output configuration bits

%KWxy.i.13:X0

Servo

Not selected

Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.13:X1

Servo2

Not selected

Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.13:X2

Analog1

Not selected

Type of output selected: Analog

%KWxy.i.13:X3

Analog2

Not selected

Type of output selected: Analog

%KWxy.i.13:X4

PWM1

Not selected

Type of output selected: PWM

%KWxy.i.13:X5

PWM2

Not selected

Type of output selected: PWM

%KWxy.i.13:X8

POT_REV1

Direct (0)

Servo copy direction

%KWxy.i.13:X9

POT_REV2

Direct (0)

Servo copy direction

%KWxy.i.13:X10 POT_VAL1_INIT

No (0)

Presence of Servo copy

%KWxy.i.13:X11 POT_VAL2_INIT

Yes (1)

Presence of (Reserved) Servo


copy

%KWxy.i.13:X12 ANALOG1_UNI_BIP Unipolar

344

Type of analog output: unipolar


or bipolar

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Address

Parameter name

Default value

%KWxy.i.13:X13 ANALOG2_UNI_BIP Unipolar (0)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

%KWxy.i.14

Loop name

%KWxy.i.18

Loop unit

Comment
Type of analog output: unipolar
or bipolar

Loop i with i [0.9] Loop name


Loop unit

345

Process control language objects

Fault and diagnostics language objects


Description

346

This table shows the fault and diagnostics language objects associated with the single loop cascade.
Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.0

EXCH_STS

Exchange management
status

%MWxy.i.1

EXCH_ERR

Exchange report status

%MWxy.i.2

CH_FLT

Channel standard fault

%MWxy.i.2:X4

INTERNAL_FLT

Serious internal error

%MWxy.i.2:X5

CONF_FLT

Configuration fault

%MWxy.i.2:X6

MISSING_ADDR_M

Missing IMC master loop


register address

%MWxy.i.2:X7

WARN

Sum of errors

%MWxy.i.2:X8

STS_ERR_CALC_CORR_M

Master loop controller


branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.2:X9

STS_ERR_FLOT_CORR_M

Master loop controller


branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.2:X10

STS_ERR_CALC_PV_M

Master PV branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.2:X11

STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_M

Master PV branch floating


point error

%MWxy.i.2:X12

STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_M

Master PV branch incorrect scale

%MWxy.i.3

CH_STATUS2

Channel state

%MWxy.i.3:X0

STS_ERR_CALC_OUT

OUT branch calculation


error

%MWxy.i.3:X1

STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT

OUT branch floating point


error

%MWxy.i.3:X2

STS_ERR_TH_SPLRG

Split Range function


thresholds incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X3

STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1

OUT1 branch scale incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X4

STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT2

OUT2 branch scale incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X5

STS_ERR_COPY_POS

Missing position copy address

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

%MWxy.i.3:X6

MISSING_ADDR_E

Missing IMC slave loop


register address

%MWxy.i.3:X8

STS_ERR_CALC_CORR

Slave loop controller


branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.3:X9

STS_ERR_FLOT_CORR_E

Slave loop controller


branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.3:X10

STS_ERR_CALC_PV_E

Slave PV branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.3:X11

STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_E

Slave PV branch floating


point error

%MWxy.i.3:X12

STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_E

Slave PV branch incorrect


scale

%MWxy.i.4

STATUS1_M

Word grouping the different Process value/Setpoint status bits

%MWxy.i.4:X1

STS_PV_SIM_M

Process value simulation


state

%MWxy.i.4:X2

STS_PV_H_LIM_M

High limit on process value branch (PV_SUP)

%MWxy.i.4:X3

STS_PV_L_LIM_M

Low limit on process value branch (PV_INF)

%MWxy.i.4:X4

STS_SP_H_LIM_M

High limit on setpoint


branch (SP_SUP)

%MWxy.i.4:X5

STS_SP_L_LIM_M

Low limit on setpoint


branch (SP_INF)

%MWxy.i.4:X6

STS_L_R_M

R/L Init

Comment

State of the Remote/Local selected setpoint

%MWxy.i.4:X7

STS_R1_R2_M

State of selected setpoint

%MWxy.i.4:X8

STS_ALARMS_M

Sum of process value


alarms

%MWxy.i.4:X9

STS_HH_M

Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X10

STS_H_M

High alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X11

STS_L_M

Low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X12

STS_LL_M

Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X13

STS_DEV_H_M

High threshold for Process value/Setpoint deviation (>0)

347

Process control language objects

348

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.4:X14

STS_DEV_L_M

%MWxy.i.5

STATUS2_M

%MWxy.i.5:X0

STS_AT_RUNNING_M

Autotuning in progress

%MWxy.i.5:X1

STS_TR_S_M

PID in tracking mode


(open cascade)

%MWxy.i.5:X3

STS_M_A_M

PID operation state

%MWxy.i.5:X8

STS_OUT_L_LIM_M

Low limit of output


reached

%MWxy.i.5:X9

STS_OUT_H_LIM_M

High limit of output


reached

%MWxy.i.5:X10

STS_TOP_NEXT_CYC_M

Sampling pulse on next


cycle

%MWxy.i.5:X11

STS_TOP_CUR_CYC_M

Sampling pulse in current


cycle

%MWxy.i.5:X12

STS_FF_SIM_M

Simulation state of Feed


forward process value

%MWxy.i.5:X13

STS_OUT_CLAMP_LOW

Output of slanting master


in falling direction

%MWxy.i.5:X14

STS_OUT_CLAMP_HIGH

Output of slanting master


in rising direction

%MWxy.i.6

STATUS3_M

%MWxy.i.6:X0

Xi_WARN_M

Xi parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X1

Yi_WARN_M

Yi parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X2

INP_INFR1_WARN_M

INP_INFR1 and
INP_SUPR1 parameters
check error

%MWxy.i.6:X3

INP_INFR2_WARN_M

INP_INFR2 and
INP_SUPR2 parameters
check error

Low threshold for Process


value/Setpoint deviation
(<0)
No Object

No Object

Word grouping the different status bits of the slave


loop controller

Word grouping end of different errors diagnostics


(Feed forward process
value/setpoint)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

%MWxy.i.6:X4

RATIO_WARN_M

RATIO_MIN and
RATIO_MAX parameter
check error

%MWxy.i.6:X5

FF_CALC_WARN_M

Feed forward calculation


error

%MWxy.i.6:X6

FF_FLOAT_WARN_M

Feed forward floating


point error

%MWxy.i.6:X7

OUT_FF__WARN_M

OUTFF_INF and
OUTFF_SUP parameters check error

%MWxy.i.6:X9

SP_MIN_WARN_M

SP_MIN and SP_MAX


parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X10

SP_CALC_WARN_M

Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.6:X11

SP_FLOAT_WARN_M

Setpoint floating point error

%MWxy.i.7

STATUS1_E

Word grouping the different slave Process value/


Setpoint status bits

%MWxy.i.7:X0

STS_HOLD_TOT

Totalizer function state

%MWxy.i.7:X1

STS_FORCAGE_PV_E

Process value simulation


state

%MWxy.i.7:X2

STS_PV_H_LIM_E

High limit on process value branch (PV_SUP)

%MWxy.i.7:X3

STS_PV_L_LIM_E

Low limit on process value branch (PV_INF)

%MWxy.i.7:X4

STS_SP_H_LIM_E

High limit on setpoint


branch (SP_SUP)

%MWxy.i.7:X5

STS_SP_L_LIM_E

Low limit on setpoint


branch (SP_INF)

%MWxy.i.7:X6

STS_L_R_E

%MWxy.i.7:X8

STS_ALARMS_E

Sum of process value


alarms

%MWxy.i.7:X9

STS_HH_E

Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X10

STS_H_E

High alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X11

STS_L_E

Low alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X12

STS_LL_E

Very low alarm

R/L Init

Comment

State of the Remote/Local selected setpoint

349

Process control language objects

350

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

%MWxy.i.7:X13

STS_DEV_H_E

High threshold for Process value/Setpoint deviation (>0)

%MWxy.i.7:X14

STS_DEV_L_E

Low threshold for Process


value/Setpoint deviation
(<0)

%MWxy.i.7:X15

STS_THLD_DONE_E

Totalizer threshold
reached

%MWxy.i.8

STATUS2_E

%MWxy.i.8:X0

STS_AT_RUNNING_E

Autotuning in progress

%MWxy.i.8:X1

STS_TR_S_E

Tracking mode switch

%MWxy.i.8:X2

STS_TR_S

%MWxy.i.8:X3

STS_M_A_E

%MWxy.i.8:X4

STS_RAISE1_E

Open command

%MWxy.i.8:X5

STS_LOWER1_E

Close command

%MWxy.i.8:X6

STS_RAISE2_E

Branch output 2 open


command

%MWxy.i.8:X7

STS_LOWER2_E

Branch output 2 close


command

%MWxy.i.8:X8

STS_OUT_L_LIM_E

The calculated output of


the PID is greater than or
equal to OUT_SUP

%MWxy.i.8:X9

STS_OUT_H_LIM_E

The calculated output of


the PID is smaller than or
equal to OUT_INF

%MWxy.i.8:X10

STS_TOP_NEXT_CYC_E

%MWxy.i.8:X11

STS_TOP_CUR_CYC_E

%MWxy.i.9

STATUS3_E

%MWxy.i.9:X0

STS_POT_VAL1_E

%MWxy.i.9:X1

STS_POT_VAL2_E

%MWxy.i.9:X2

STS_RAISE_STOP1_E

No Object

No Object

Comment

Word grouping the different status bits of the slave


loop controller

Tracking mode switch


(Reserved)
PID operation state

No Object

Word grouping the output


diagnostics
Servo with copy operation

No Object

Servo with copy operation


(Reserved)
Open limit reached on
servo drive

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

%MWxy.i.9:X3

STS_LOWER_STOP1_E

Close limit reached on


servo drive

%MWxy.i.9:X4

STS_RAISE_STOP2_E

Open limit reached on


servo drive

%MWxy.i.9:X5

STS_LOWER_STOP2_E

Close limit reached on


servo drive

%MWxy.i.9:X8

STS_OVER_TOT_WARN_E

Output capacity overshoot error on Totalizer

%MWxy.i.9:X9

STS_SP_MIN_WARN_E

SP_MIN and SP_MAX


parameter check error

%MWxy.i.9:X10

STS_SP_CALC_WARN_E

Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.9:X11

STS_SP_FLOAT_WARN_E

Setpoint floating point error

%MWxy.i.10

STATUS4

No Object

Comment

Word grouping autotuning diagnostics

%MWxy.i.10:X0

STS_AT_FAILED

Autotuning failed

%MWxy.i.10:X1

STS_AT_ABORTED

Autotuning diagnostics interrupted

%MWxy.i.10:X2

STS_AT_ERR_PARAM

Autotuning diagnostics
parameter error

%MWxy.i.10:X3

STS_AT_PWF_OR_EFB_FAIL

Autotuning diagnostics
system error or power failure

%MWxy.i.10:X4

STS_AT_ERR_SATUR

Autotuning diagnostics
process value saturation

%MWxy.i.10:X5

STS_AT_DV_TOO_SMALL

Autotuning diagnostics insufficient process value


deviation

%MWxy.i.10:X6

STS_AT_TSAMP_HIGH

Autotuning Diagnostics
sampling pulse period too
long

%MWxy.i.10:X7

STS_AT_INCONSIST_RESP

Autotuning diagnostics inconsistent response

%MWxy.i.10:X8

STS_AT_NOT_STAB_INIT

Autotuning diagnostics:
initially unstable process
value

%MWxy.i.10:X9

STS_AT_TMAX_TOO_SMALL

Autotuning diagnostics
scale period too small

351

Process control language objects

352

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.10:X10

STS_AT_NOISE_TOO_HIGH

Autotuning diagnostics
process value noise too
loud

%MWxy.i.10:X11

STS_AT_TMAX_TOO_HIGH

Autotuning diagnostics
scale period too long

%MWxy.i.10:X12

STS_AT_OVERSHOOT

Autotuning diagnostics
overshoot above 10%

%MWxy.i.10:X13

STS_AT_UNDERSHOOT

Autotuning diagnostics
non-minimum phase too
large

%MWxy.i.10:X14

STS_AT_UNSYMETRICAL_PT

Autotuning diagnostics
procedure too non-symmetrical

%MWxy.i.10:X15

STS_AT_INTEGRATING_PT

Autotuning diagnostics integrating process

%MWxy.i.11

ORDER _COMMAND

Command order

%MDxy.i.12

PARAM_COMMAND

Command parameter

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Process control language objects


Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table describes the different process control language objects of the cascade
loop.
Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%MFxy.i.14

AT_STEP

10.0

Size of autotuning scale

%MFxy.i.16

AT_TMAX

100.0

Autotuning scale period

%MFxy.i.18

AT_PERF

0.5

Criteria for autotuning stability

%MFxy.i.20

T_ECH_M

0.3

Master loop sampling period

%MFxy.i.22

OUTFF_M

No Object

Value of Feed forward action on


physical scale

%MFxy.i.24

OUT_MAN_M

No Object

Command value

%MFxy.i.26

DEV_M

No Object

Setpoint process value deviation

%MFxy.i.28

PV_M

No Object

Value of process value on physical scale

%MFxy.i.30

SP_M

No Object

Value of setpoint on physical scale

%MFxy.i.32

PV_INF_M

0.0

Low process value limit

%MFxy.i.34

PV_SUP_M

100.0

High process value limit

%MFxy.i.36

KP_M

1.0

Proportional co-efficient

%MFxy.i.38

TI_M

0.0

Integral time

%MFxy.i.40

TD_M

0.0

Derived time

%MFxy.i.42

OUTBIAS_M

0.0

Bias on PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.44

INT_BAND_M

0.0

Integral band

%MFxy.i.46

DBAND_M

0.0

Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.48

KD_M

10.0

Filtering the derived item

%MFxy.i.50

SP_MIN_M

0.0

Low master setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.52

SP_MAX_M

100.0

High master setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.54

PV_LL_M

5.0

Very low process value threshold

%MFxy.i.56

PV_L_M

5.0

Low process value threshold

%MFxy.i.58

PV_H_M

95.0

High process value threshold

%MFxy.i.60

PV_HH_M

95.0

Very high process value threshold

%MFxy.i.62

RATIO_M

1.0

Ratio value

%MFxy.i.64

RATIO_MIN_M

0.0

Minimum Ratio value

%MFxy.i.66

RATIO_MAX_M

100.0

Maximum Ratio value

%MFxy.i.68

RATIO_BIAS_M

0.0

Value of Ratio bias

353

Process control language objects

354

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%MFxy.i.70

DEV_L_M

0.0

Low deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.72

DEV_H_M

0.0

High deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.74

T_FILTER_M

0.0

Process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.76

K_FILTER_M

1,0

Multiplication coefficient of process value filtering

%MFxy.i.78

FILT_OUT_M

Value of filter output

%MFxy.i.80

SQRT_OUT_M

%MFxy.i.82

E2_IN_M

1428.0

Abcissae of first pulse of Segment


S2

Output value of square root

%MFxy.i.84

E3_IN_M

2857.0

Abcissae of first pulse of Segment


S3

%MFxy.i.86

E4_IN_M

4285.0

Abcissae of first pulse of Segment


S4

%MFxy.i.88

E5_IN_M

5714.0

Abcissae of first pulse of Segment


S5

%MFxy.i.90

E6_IN_M

7143.0

Abcissae of first pulse of Segment


S6

%MFxy.i.92

E7_IN_M

8571.0

Abcissae of first pulse of Segment


S7

%MFxy.i.94

E2_OUT_M

14.28.0

Coordinate of first pulse of Segment S2

%MFxy.i.96

E3_OUT_M

28.57

Coordinate of first pulse of Segment S3

%MFxy.i.98

E4_OUT_M

42.85

Coordinate of first pulse of Segment S4

%MFxy.i.100

E5_OUT_M

57.14

Coordinate of first pulse of Segment S5

%MFxy.i.102

E6_OUT_M

71.43

Coordinate of first pulse of Segment S6

%MFxy.i.104

E7_OUT_M

85.71

Coordinate of first pulse of Segment S7

%MFxy.i.106

R_RATE_M

0.0

Setpoint ascent speed limit

%MFxy.i.108

D_RATE_M

0.0

Setpoint descent speed limit

%MFxy.i.110

SPEED_LIM_OUT_M

%MFxy.i.112

INP_INFR1_M

Value of setpoint speed limiter


output
0.0

Low scale of the master loop R1


setpoint
TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%MFxy.i.114

INP_SUPR1_M

100.0

High scale of the master loop R1


setpoint

%MFxy.i.116

INP_INFR2_M

0.0

Low scale of the master loop R2


setpoint

%MFxy.i.118

INP_SUPR2_M

100.0

High scale of the master loop R2


setpoint

%MFxy.i.120

T1_FF_M

0.0

Filtering time for Feed forward


process value

%MFxy.i.122

T2_FF_M

0.0

Filtering time for Feed forward


process value

%MFxy.i.124

OUT_FF_INF_M

0.0

Low limit of Feed forward action

%MFxy.i.126

OUT_FF_SUP_M

100.0

High limit of Feed forward action

%MFxy.i.128

KP_PREV_M

No Object

Value before proportional co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.130

TI_PREV_M

No Object

Value before integral co-efficient


autotuning

%MFxy.i.132

TD_PREV_M

No Object

Value before derived co-efficient


autotuning

%MFxy.i.134

OUT1_E

No Object

Value of output command 1

%MFxy.i.136

OUT2_E

No Object

Value of output command 2

%MFxy.i.138

T_ECH_E

0.3

Slave loop sampling period

%MFxy.i.140

OUT_MAN_E

No Object

Slave loop command value

%MFxy.i.142

DEV_E

No Object

Setpoint process value deviation

%MFxy.i.144

PV_E

No Object

Value of process value on Physical scale

%MFxy.i.146

SP_E

No Object

Value of setpoint on Physical


scale

%MFxy.i.148

PV_INF_E

0.0

Low process value limit

%MFxy.i.150

PV_SUP_E

100.0

High process value limit

%MFxy.i.152

KP_E

1.0

Proportional co-efficient

%MFxy.i.154

TI_E

0.0

Integral time

%MFxy.i.156

TD_E

0.0

Derived time

%MFxy.i.158

OUTBIAS_E

0.0

Bias on PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.160

INT_BAND_E

0.0

Integral band

%MFxy.i.162

DBAND_E

0.0

Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.164

KD_E

10.0

Filtering the derived item

355

Process control language objects

356

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%MFxy.i.166

OUTRATE_E

0.0

Limit of output variation speed

%MFxy.i.168

OUTRATE2_E

0,0

Limit of output 2 variation speed

%MFxy.i.170

OUT1_INF_E

0.0

Low limit of output 1

%MFxy.i.172

OUT1_SUP_E

100.0

High limit of output 1

%MFxy.i.174

SP_MIN_E

0.0

Low setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.176

SP_MAX_E

100.0

High setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.178

OUT2_INF_E

0.0

Low limit of Output 2

%MFxy.i.180

OUT2_SUP_E

100.0

High limit of Output 2

%MFxy.i.182

OUT1_TH1_E

0.0

Threshold 1 for Hot/Cold or Split


Range output 1

%MFxy.i.184

OUT1_TH2_E

50.0

Threshold 2 for Hot/Cold or Split


Range output 1

%MFxy.i.186

OUT2_TH1_E

50.0

Threshold 1 for Hot/Cold or Split


Range output 2

%MFxy.i.188

OUT2_TH2_E

100.0

Threshold 2 for Hot/Cold or Split


Range output 2

%MFxy.i.190

PV_LL_E

5.0

Very low process value threshold

%MFxy.i.192

PV_L_E

5.0

Low process value threshold

%MFxy.i.194

PV_H_E

95.0

High process value threshold

%MFxy.i.196

PV_HH_E

95.0

Very high process value threshold

%MFxy.i.198

DEV_L_E

0.0

Low deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.200

DEV_H_E

0.0

High deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.202

T_FILTER_E

0.0

Process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.204

K_FILTER_E

1.0

Multiplication coefficient of process value filtering

%MFxy.i.206

FILT_OUT_E

No Object

Value of filter output

%MFxy.i.208

SQRT_OUT_E

No Object

Output value of square root

%MFxy.i.210

THLD_E

1E+8

Totalizer limit

%MFxy.i.212

R_RATE_E

0.0

Setpoint ascent speed limit

%MFxy.i.214

D_RATE_E

0.0

Setpoint descent speed limit

%MFxy.i.216

SPEED_LIM_OUT_E

No Object

Value of setpoint speed limiter


output

%MFxy.i.218

T_MOTOR1_E

10.0

Open time for valve controlled by


the servo drive

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%MFxy.i.220

T_MINI1_E

0.0

Minimum open time for valve controlled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.222

T_MOTOR2_E

10.0

Open time for valve controlled by


the servo drive

%MFxy.i.224

T_MINI2_E

0.0

Minimum open time for valve controlled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.226

KP_PREV_E

No Object

Value before proportional co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.228

TI_PREV_E

No Object

Value before integral co-efficient


autotuning

%MFxy.i.230

TD_PREV_E

No Object

Value before derived co-efficient


autotuning

%MFxy.i.232

KS

1.0

IMC static gain

%MFxy.i.234

OL_TIME

1.0

Time constant in BO

%MFxy.i.236

T_DELAY

0.0

Current pure delay time

%MFxy.i.238

CL_PERF

0.1

BO / BF time report

%MFxy.i.240

T_MOTOR_B3

No Object

Open time for valve controlled by


the servo drive loop 3

%MFxy.i.242

T_MINI_B

No Object

Minimum open time for valve controlled by the servo drive loop 3

%MFxy.i.244

KP_PREV_B3

No Object

Value before proportional co-efficient autotuning loop 3

%MFxy.i.246

TI_PREV_B3

No Object

Value before integral co-efficient


autotuning loop 3

%MWxy.i.248

PV_SIM_M

No Object

Simulated process value value

%MWxy.i.249

PV_SIM_E

No Object

Simulated process value value

%MWxy.i.250

FF_SIM_M

No Object

Simulated Feed forward input

357

Process control language objects

11.5

Language objects associated with the self-selective loop

At a Glance
Subject of this
section

This section describes the language objects of the self-selective loops.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

358

Topic

Page

Configuration language objects

359

Fault and diagnostics language objects

365

Process control language objects

372

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Configuration language objects


Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table describes the configuration language objects associated with the auto-selector loop.
Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.0

CONFIG_0_C1

No Object

Word grouping the different


configuration bits of the C1 process value

%KWxy.i.0:X0

Filtering

Missing (0)

Filtering function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X1

Function generator

Missing (0)

Function generator of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X2

Totalizer

Missing (0)

Totalizer function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X3

Square root

Missing (0)

Square root function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X4

Alarms

Present

Alarm function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X8

PV_CLIP

Missing (0)

Lopping or non-lopping of the


process value

%KWxy.i.0:X9

EXTRAPOL

No (0)

Extrapolation of function generator

%KWxy.i.0:X10

PV_UNI_BIP

Unipolar (0)

Type of process value: unipolar


or bipolar

%KWxy.i.0:X11

PV_EXTERNE

Missing (0)

Choice of standard process value (0) / external process value


(1)

%KWxy.i.0:X13

Totalizer process
value unit

(X13=0, X14 =0): phys/ms


(X13=1, X14 =0): phys/s

%KWxy.i.0:X14

Totalizer process
value unit

(X13=0, X14 =1): phys/mn


(X13=1, X14 =1): phys/h

%KWxy.i.1

CONFIG_1_C1

No Object

Word grouping the different


configuration bits of the C1 Setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X0

SP_Simple

Selected (1)

Type of setpoint selected: Single

%KWxy.i.1:X1

SP_Selection

Not selected (0) Type of setpoint: Selection

%KWxy.i.1:X2

Speed_Limiteur

Not selected (0) Setpoint speed limiter

359

Process control language objects

360

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.1:X3

SP_SPP

Not selected (0) Type of setpoint selected: Programmer

%KWxy.i.1:X4

LR/L

Local Remote
(0)

Speed limiter either on the local


setpoint or in Remote/Local
mode

%KWxy.i.1:X8

Sel_Min

Missing (0)

Function selected in the event


of a Selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X9

Sel_Max

Missing (0)

Function selected in the event


of a Selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X10

Sel_Switch

Present on selection

Function selected in the event


of a Selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X11

R/L_INIT

Local (1)

Initial value of the Remote/Local


selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X12

R1/R2_INIT

R1 (0)

Initial value of the status of the


selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X13

SP_Ratio

Not selected (0) Type of setpoint selected: Ratio

%KWxy.i.1:X14

SP_Limiteur

Not present

Setpoint limiter (e.g.


PARAM_SP)

%KWxy.i.1:X15

SP_Folw

No tracking

Tracking (0)

%KWxy.i.2

CONFIG_2_C1

No Object

Word grouping the different


loop controller configuration bits
and C1 Feed forward

%KWxy.i.2:X0

PID

Always present

PID function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X1

ONOFF2

No Object

ON OFF 2 states branch of loop


controller

%KWxy.i.2:X2

ONOFF3

No Object

ON OFF 3 states branch of loop


controller

%KWxy.i.2:X3

SPLRG/HotCold

No Object

OR Hot/Cold and Split Range


presence bits

%KWxy.i.2:X4

Split/Range

Missing (0)

Split Range function for branch


selected

%KWxy.i.2:X5

Hot / Cold

Not selected

Hot/Cold function for the branch


selected

%KWxy.i.2:X6

ALARMES_DEV

Present

Alarm function on diversion of


the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X7

Feed Forward

Missing (0)

Presence of a Feed forward input

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.2:X8

BUMP

With bumps (1)

Management of bumps when


changing operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X9

PV_DEV

On process value (0)

Type of derived action

%KWxy.i.2:X10

MIX_PAR

PID parallel series

Mixed or parallel loop controller


type

%KWxy.i.2:X11

REV_DIR

PID backward
action (0)

Type of loop controller action

%KWxy.i.2:X12

MANU/AUTO_INIT

Auto (1)

Initial value of loop controller


operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X13

Lead lag

Missing (0)

Leadlag function of the Feed


forward branch

%KWxy.i.2:X14

FF_UNI_BIP

Unipolar

Type of Feed forward process


value: unipolar or bipolar

%KWxy.i.2:X15

IMC

Missing (0)

Model loop controller in branch


loop controller

%KWxy.i.3

Loop name

Loop i with i [0.9] Loop name

%KWxy.i.7

Loop unit

%KWxy.i.10

CONFIG_0_C2

No Object

Word grouping the different


configuration bits of the C2 process value

%KWxy.i.10:X0

Filtering

No object

Filtering function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X1

Function generator

No Object

Function generator of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X2

Totalizer

Missing (0)

Totalizer function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X3

Square root

Missing (0)

Square root function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X4

Alarms

Present

Alarm function of the process


value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X8

PV_CLIP

Missing (0)

Lopping or non-lopping of the


process value

%KWxy.i.10:X9

EXTRAPOL

No object

Extrapolation of function generator

%KWxy.i.10:X10

PV_UNI_BIP

Unipolar (0)

Type of process value: unipolar


or bipolar

Loop unit

361

Process control language objects

362

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.10:X11

PV_EXTERNE

Missing (0)

Choice of Standard Process


value (0) / External Process value (1)

%KWxy.i.10:X13

Totalizer process
value unit

(X13=0, X14 =0): phys/ms


(X13=1, X14 =0): phys/s

%KWxy.i.10:X14

Totalizer process
value unit

(X13=0, X14 =1): phys/mn


(X13=1, X14 =1): phys/h

%KWxy.i.11

CONFIG_1_C2

No Object

Word grouping the different


configuration bits of the C2 Setpoint

%KWxy.i.11:X0

SP_Simple

Selected (1)

Type of setpoint selected: Single

%KWxy.i.11:X1

SP_Selection

No Object

Type of setpoint selected: Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X2

SPEED_LIMITEUR

Missing (0)

Setpoint speed limiter

%KWxy.i.11:X3

SP_SPP

No Object

Type of setpoint selected: Programmer

%KWxy.i.11:X4

LR/L

Local Remote
(0)

Speed limiter either on the local


setpoint or in Remote/Local
mode

%KWxy.i.11:X8

SEL_MIN

No Object

Function selected for setpoint


type Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X9

SEL_MAX

No Object

Function selected for setpoint


type Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X10

SEL_SWITCH

No Object

Function selected for setpoint


type Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X11

R/L_INIT

Local (1)

Initial value of the Remote/Local


selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.11:X12

R1/R2_INIT

No Object

Initial value of the status of the


selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.11:X13

SP_RATIO

No Object

Type of setpoint selected: Ratio

%KWxy.i.11:X14

SP_LIMITEUR

Not present (0)

Setpoint limiter (e.g.


PARAM_SP)

%KWxy.i.11:X15

SP_FOLW

No setpoint

Tracking (0)

%KWxy.i.12

CONFIG_2_C2

No Object

Word grouping the different


loop controller configuration bits
and C2 Feed forward

%KWxy.i.12:X0

PID

Present (always)

PID function of the loop controller branch


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.12:X1

ONOFF2

No Object

ON OFF 2 states branch of loop


controller

%KWxy.i.12:X2

ONOFF3

No Object

ON OFF 3 states branch of loop


controller

%KWxy.i.12:X3

SPLRG/HOTCOLD

No Object

OR Hot/Cold and Split Range


presence bits

%KWxy.i.12:X4

Split/Range

No Object

Loop controller branch Split


Range function

%KWxy.i.12:X5

Hot / Cold

No Object

Hot/Cold function of the loop


controller branch

%KWxy.i.12:X6

ALARMES_DEV

Present

Alarm function on diversion of


the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.12:X7

Feed Forward

No Object

Presence of a Feed forward input

%KWxy.i.12:X8

BUMP

With bumps (1)

Management of bumps when


changing operating mode

%KWxy.i.12:X9

PV_DEV

On process val- Type of derived action


ue (0)

%KWxy.i.12:X10

MIX_PAR

PID parallel series

Mixed or parallel loop controller


type

%KWxy.i.12:X11

REV_DIR

PID backward
action (0)

Type of loop controller action

%KWxy.i.12:X12

MANU/AUTO_INIT

Auto (1)

Initial value of loop controller


operating mode

%KWxy.i.12:X13

Lead lag

No Object

Leadlag function of the Feed


forward branch

%KWxy.i.12:X14

FF_UNI_BIP

No Object

Type of Feed forward process


value: unipolar or bipolar

%KWxy.i.12:X15

IMC

Missing (0)

Model loop controller in branch


loop controller

%KWxy.i.13

CONFIG_3_C2

No Object

Word grouping the different output configuration bits

%KWxy.i.13:X0

Servo

Not selected

Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.13:X1

Servo2

Not selected

Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.13:X2

Analog 1

Not selected

Type of output selected: Analog

%KWxy.i.13:X3

Analog 2

Not selected

Type of output selected: Analog

%KWxy.i.13:X4

PWM1

Not selected

Type of output selected: PWM

%KWxy.i.13:X5

PWM2

Not selected

Type of output selected: PWM

363

Process control language objects

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.13:X8

POT_REV1

Direct (0)

Servo copy direction

%KWxy.i.13:X9

POT_REV2

Direct (0)

Servo copy direction

%KWxy.i.13:X10

POT_VAL1_INIT

No (0)

Presence of Servo copy

%KWxy.i.13:X11

POT_VAL2_INIT

No (0)

Presence of Servo copy

%KWxy.i.13:X12

ANALOG1_UNI_BIP Unipolar (0)

Type of analog output: unipolar


or bipolar

%KWxy.i.13:X13

ANALOG2_UNI_BIP Unipolar (0)

Type of analog output: unipolar


or bipolar

%KWxy.i.14

Loop name

Loop i with i [0.9] Loop name

%KWxy.i.18

Loop unit

%KWxy.i.21

CONFIG_0_G

No Object

Word grouping the different


configuration bits of the global
loop

Loop unit

%KWxy.i.21:X0

MANU/
AUTO_G_INIT

Manu (0)

Initial operating value of global


loop

%KWxy.i.21:X1

AM_G_PID

On the global
loop (0)

Managing A/M blocks initially:


on A/M block 0 on the global
loop

%KWxy.i.21:X8

MIN_MAX

Min (0)

Initial behavior of the auto-selector

%KWxy.i.21:X9

AS_INIT

Present (1)

Output obtained by restriction


on initialization = auto-selector
output

%KWxy.i.21:X10

DIR1_INIT

Missing (0)

Output obtained by restriction


on initialization = PID n1 output

%KWxy.i.21:X11

DIR2_INIT

Missing (0)

Output obtained by restriction


on initialization = PID n2 output

%KWxy.i.21:X2

364

At 1: A/M blocks on each PID

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Fault and diagnostics language objects


Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table describes the fault and diagnostics language objects associated with the
auto-selector loop.
Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.0

EXCH_STS

Exchange management
status

%MWxy.i.1

EXCH_ERR

Exchange report status

%MWxy.i.2

CH_FLT

Channel standard fault

%MWxy.i.2:X4

INTERNAL_FLT

Serious internal error

%MWxy.i.2:X5

CONF_FLT

Configuration fault

%MWxy.i.2:X6

MISSING_ADDR_2

Missing secondary loop


IMC register address

%MWxy.i.2:X7

WARN

Sum of warnings

%MWxy.i.2:X8

STS_ERR_CALC_CORR_B2

Loop controller branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.2:X9

STS_ERR_FLOT_CORR_B2

Loop controller branch


floating point error

%MWxy.i.2:X10

STS_ERR_CALC_PV_B2

PV branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.2:X11

STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_B2

PV branch floating point


error

%MWxy.i.2:X12

STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_B2

PV1 branch scale incorrect

%MWxy.i.3

CH_STATUS2

Channel state

%MWxy.i.3:X0

STS_ERR_CALC_OUT

OUT branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.3:X1

STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT

OUT branch floating point


error

%MWxy.i.3:X2

STS_ERR_TH_SPLRG

Split Range function


thresholds incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X3

STS_ERR_CALC_CONT

Secondary branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.3:X4

STS_ERR_COPY_POS

Missing position copy address

%MWxy.i.3:X6

MISSING_ADDR_1

Missing main loop IMC


register address

365

Process control language objects

366

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.3:X8

STS_ERR_CALC_CORR_1

Loop controller branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.3:X10

STS_ERR_CALC_PV_1

PV branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.3:X11

STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_1

PV branch floating point


error

%MWxy.i.3:X12

STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_1

PV branch incorrect scale

%MWxy.i.3:X13

STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1

C1 branch incorrect scale

%MWxy.i.3:X14

STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT2

C2 branch incorrect scale

%MWxy.i.3:X15

STS_ERR_SCALE

OR scale errors

%MWxy.i.4

STATUS1_C1

Word grouping the different Process value/Setpoint


status bits of the main loop

%MWxy.i.4:X0

STS_HOLD_TOT_C1

Totalizer function freeze

%MWxy.i.4:X1

STS_PV_SIM_C1

Simulated process value

%MWxy.i.4:X2

STS_PV_H_LIM_C1

High limit on process value

%MWxy.i.4:X3

STS_PV_L_LIM_C1

Low limit on process value

%MWxy.i.4:X4

STS_SP_H_LIM_C1

High limit on setpoint

%MWxy.i.4:X5

STS_SP_L_LIM_C1

%MWxy.i.4:X6

STS_L_R_C1

Low limit on setpoint

%MWxy.i.4:X7

STS_R1_R2_C1

Remote2 Setpoint (1)


Remote1 Setpoint (0)

%MWxy.i.4:X8

STS_ALARMS_C1

OR logic of process value


alarms

%MWxy.i.4:X9

STS_HH_C1

Very high alarm

R/L Init

Remote Setpoint (1) Local


Setpoint (0)

%MWxy.i.4:X10

STS_H_C1

High alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X11

STS_L_C1

Low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X12

STS_LL_C1

Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X13

STS_DEV_H_C1

High alarm for Process value/Setpoint deviation (>0)

%MWxy.i.4:X14

STS_DEV_L_C1

Low alarm for Process value/Setpoint deviation (<0)

%MWxy.i.4:X15

STS_THLD_DONE_C1

Totalizer threshold
reached

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.5

STATUS2_C1

No Object

Word grouping the different Loop controller status


bits of the main loop

%MWxy.i.5:X0

STS_AT_RUNNING_C1

Autotuning in progress

%MWxy.i.5:X1

STS_M_A_C1

PID operation state

%MWxy.i.5:X2

STS_FF_SIM_C1

Simulation state of Feed


forward process value

%MWxy.i.5:X6

STS_TOP_NEXT_CYCLE

Sampling pulse on next cycle

%MWxy.i.5:X7

STS_TOP_CUR_CYCLE

Sampling pulse in current


cycle

%MWxy.i.5:X8

STS_TR_S

Tracking in progress on the


global loop

%MWxy.i.5:X9

STS_M_A

Global Manu / Auto

%MWxy.i.5:X10

STS_RAISE1

Open command (global


loop)

%MWxy.i.5:X11

STS_LOWER1

Close command (global


loop)

%MWxy.i.5:X12

STS_RAISE2

Output 2 branch open


command (global loop)

%MWxy.i.5:X13

STS_LOWER2

Output 2 branch close


command (global loop)

%MWxy.i.5:X14

STS_OUT_L_LIM

Upper limit reached for the


PID output selected (global
loop)

%MWxy.i.5:X15

STS_OUT_H_LIM

Low limit reached for the


PID output selected (global
loop)

%MWxy.i.6

STATUS3_C1

%MWxy.i.6:X0

Xi_WARN_C1

Xi parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X1

Yi_WARN_C1

Yi parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X2

RATIO_WARN_C1

RATIO_MIN and
RATIO_MAX parameter
check error

No Object

Word grouping end of different diagnostics warnings (process value,


setpoint, Feed forward)
main loop

367

Process control language objects

368

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.6:X3

FF_CALC_WARN_C1

Feed forward calculation


error

%MWxy.i.6:X4

FF_FLOAT_WARN_C1

Feed forward floating point


error

%MWxy.i.6:X5

OUT_FF__WARN_C1

OUTFF_INF and
OUTFF_SUP parameters
check error

%MWxy.i.6:X8

INP_INFR1_WARN_C1

INP_INFR1 and
INP_SUPR1 parameters
check error

%MWxy.i.6:X9

INP_INFR2_WARN_C1

INP_INFR2 and
INP_SUPR2 parameters
check error

%MWxy.i.6:X10

SP_MIN_WARN_C1

SP_MIN and SP_MAX parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X11

SP_CALC_WARN_C1

Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.6:X12

SP_FLOAT_WARN_C1

Setpoint floating point error

%MWxy.i.6:X13

OVER_TOT_WARN_C1

Error on totalizer overflow

%MWxy.i.7

STATUS1_C2

%MWxy.i.7:X1

STS_PV_SIM_C2

Process value simulation


status

%MWxy.i.7:X2

STS_PV_H_LIM_C2

High limit on process value


branch (PV_SUP)

%MWxy.i.7:X3

STS_PV_L_LIM_C2

Low limit on process value


branch (PV_INF)

%MWxy.i.7:X4

STS_SP_H_LIM_C2

High limit on setpoint


branch

%MWxy.i.7:X5

STS_SP_B_LIM_C2

Low limit on setpoint


branch

%MWxy.i.7:X6

STS_L_R_C2

%MWxy.i.7:X8

STS_ALARMS_C2

Sum of process value


alarms

%MWxy.i.7:X9

STS_HH_C2

Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X10

STS_H_C2

High alarm

No Object

R/L Init

Word grouping the different Process value/Setpoint


status bits of the Secondary loop

Remote Setpoint (1) Local


Setpoint (0)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.7:X11

STS_L_C2

Low alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X12

STS_LL_C2

Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X13

STS_DEV_H_C2

High threshold for Process


value/Setpoint deviation
(>0)

%MWxy.i.7:X14

STS_DEV_L_C2

Low threshold for Process


value/Setpoint deviation
(<0)

%MWxy.i.7:X15

STS_THLD_DONE_C2

Totalizer threshold
reached

%MWxy.i.8

STATUS2_C2

No Object

Word grouping the different loop controller/setpoint


status bits of the Secondary loop

%MWxy.i.8:X0

STS_AT_RUNNING_C2

Autotuning in progress

%MWxy.i.8:X1

STS_M_A_C2

PID operation state

%MWxy.i.8:X8

INP_INFR1_WARN_C2

INP_INFR1 and
INP_SUPR1 parameters
check error

%MWxy.i.8:X10

SP_MIN_WARN_C2

SP_MIN and SP_MAX parameter check error

%MWxy.i.8:X11

SP_CALC_WARN_C2

Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.8:X9

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

%MWxy.i.8:X12

SP_FLOAT_WARN_C2

Setpoint floating point error

%MWxy.i.8:X13

OVER_TOT_WARN_C2

Totalizer overflow error

%MWxy.i.9

STATUS3

%MWxy.i.9:X0

STS_POT_VAL1

Servo with copy operation


(global loop)

%MWxy.i.9:X1

STS_POT_VAL2

Servo with copy operation


(global loop)

%MWxy.i.9:X2

STS_RAISE STOP1

Open limit reached on Servo drive (global loop)

%MWxy.i.9:X3

STS_LOWER STOP1

Close limit reached on Servo drive (global loop)

%MWxy.i.9:X4

STS_RAISE STOP2

Open limit reached on Servo drive (global loop)

No Object

Word grouping the different output bits

369

Process control language objects

370

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

%MWxy.i.9:X5

STS_LOWER STOP2

Close limit reached on Servo drive (global loop)

%MWxy.i.9:X8

STS_AS

Selector positioned on the


auto-selector

%MWxy.i.9:X9

STS_DIR1

Selector positioned on
PID1 output

%MWxy.i.9:X10

STS_DIR2

Selector positioned on
PID2 output

%MWxy.i.9:X11

STS_SEL_PID1

1: Selected output = PID1


output
0: Selected output = PID2
output

%MWxy.i.10

STATUS4

No Object

Comment

Word grouping autotuning


diagnostics

%MWxy.i.10:X0

AT_FAILED

Autotuning failed

%MWxy.i.10:X1

AT_ABORTED

Autotuning diagnostics interrupted

%MWxy.i.10:X2

AT_ERR_PARAM

Autotuning diagnostics parameter error

%MWxy.i.10:X3

AT_PWF_OR_EFB_FAIL

Autotuning diagnostics
system error or power failure

%MWxy.i.10:X4

AT_ERR_SATUR

Autotuning diagnostics
process value saturation

%MWxy.i.10:X5

AT_DV_TOO_SMALL

Autotuning diagnostics insufficient process value


deviation

%MWxy.i.10:X6

AT_TSAMP_HIGH

Autotuning Diagnostics
sampling pulse period too
long

%MWxy.i.10:X7

AT_INCONSIST_RESP

Autotuning diagnostics inconsistent response

%MWxy.i.10:X8

AT_NOT_STAB_INIT

Autotuning diagnostics: initially unstable process value

%MWxy.i.10:X9

AT_TMAX_TOO_SMALL

Autotuning diagnostics
grade period too small

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Address

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MWxy.i.10:X10 AT_NOISE_TOO_HIGH

Autotuning diagnostics
process value noise too
loud

%MWxy.i.10:X11 AT_TMAX_TOO_HIGH

Autotuning diagnostics
grade period too long

%MWxy.i.10:X12 AT_OVERSHOOT

Autotuning diagnostics
overshoot above 10%

%MWxy.i.10:X13 AT_UNDERSHOOT

Autotuning diagnostics
non-minimum phase too
large

%MWxy.i.10:X14 AT_UNSYMETRICAL_PT

Autotuning diagnostics
procedure too non-symmetrical

%MWxy.i.10:X15 AT_INTEGRATING_PT

Autotuning diagnostics integrating process

%MWxy.i.11

ORDER_COMMAND

Order Command

%MDxy.i.12

PARAM_COMMAND

Parameter Command

371

Process control language objects

Process control language objects


Description

372

This table describes the process control language objects associated with the autoselector loop channel.
Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MFxy.i.14

AT_STEP

10.0

Autotuning step function


amplitude

%MFxy.i.16

AT_TMAX

100.0

Autotuning step function


duration

%MFxy.i.18

AT_PERF

0.5

Autotuning stability criterion

%MFxy.i.20

T_ECH

0.3

Sampling period (common


to the two PID)

%MFxy.i.22

OUT1

No object

Heat/Cool or Split Range


output 1 command value

%MFxy.i.24

OUT2

No object

Heat/Cool or Split Range


output 2 command value

%MFxy.i.26

OUTD

No object

Global loop command variation value

%MFxy.i.28

OUT_MAN

No object

Value of global command


(loop controller output value selected after processing via OUTRATE and
limitations)

%MFxy.i.30

OUTFF_C1

No Object

Value of Feed forward action on main loop Physical


scale

%MFxy.i.32

OUT_MAN_C1

No object

Main loop command value

%MFxy.i.34

DEV_C1

No Object

Main loop process value


setpoint deviation

%MFxy.i.36

PV_C1

No Object

PV value on physical scale

%MFxy.i.38

SP_C1

No Object

Setpoint value on Physical


scale

%MFxy.i.40

PV_INF_C1

0.0

Process value low limit

%MFxy.i.42

PV_SUP_C1

100.0

Process value high limit

%MFxy.i.44

KP_C1

1.0

Proportional coefficient

%MFxy.i.46

TI_C1

0.0

Integral time

%MFxy.i.48

TD_C1

0.0

Derivative time
TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MFxy.i.50

OUTBIAS_C1

0.0

Bias on main loop PID loop


controller output

%MFxy.i.52

INT_BAND_C1

0.0

Integral band

%MFxy.i.54

DBAND_C1

0.0

Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.56

KD_C1

10.0

Derivative filtering

%MFxy.i.58

SP_MIN_C1

0.0

Setpoint low limit

%MFxy.i.60

SP_MAX_C1

100.0

Setpoint high limit

%MFxy.i.62

PV_LL_C1

5.0

Process value threshold


very low

%MFxy.i.64

PV_L_C1

5.0

Process value threshold


low

%MFxy.i.66

PV_H_C1

95.0

Process value threshold


high

%MFxy.i.68

PV_HH_C1

95.0

Process value threshold

%MFxy.i.70

RATIO_C1

1.0

Ratio Value

%MFxy.i.72

RATIO_MIN_C1

0.0

Minimum Ratio value

%MFxy.i.74

RATIO_MAX_C1

100.0

Maximum Ratio value

%MFxy.i.76

RATIO_BIAS_C1

0.0

Ratio bias Value

%MFxy.i.78

DEV_L_C1

-5.0

Deviation low threshold

%MFxy.i.80

DEV_H_C1

5.0

Deviation high threshold

%MFxy.i.82

T_FILTER_C1

0.0

Process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.84

K_FILTER_C1

1.0

Multiplication coefficient of
process value filtering

%MFxy.i.86

FILT_OUT_C1

No object

Filtering output value

%MFxy.i.88

SQR_OUT_C1

No object

Square root output value

%MFxy.i.90

E2_IN_C1

1428.0

Segment S2 input value

%MFxy.i.92

E3_IN_C1

2857.0

Segment S3 input value

%MFxy.i.94

E4_IN_C1

4285.0

Segment S4 input value

%MFxy.i.96

E5_IN_C1

5714.0

Segment S5 input value

%MFxy.i.98

E6_IN_C1

7143.0

Segment S6 input value

%MFxy.i.100

E7_IN_C1

8571.0

Segment S7 input value

%MFxy.i.102

E2_OUT_C1

14.28

Segment S2 output value

%MFxy.i.104

E3_OUT_C1

28.57

Segment S3 output value

%MFxy.i.106

E4_OUT_C1

42.85

Segment S4 output value

%MFxy.i.108

E5_OUT_C1

57.14

Segment S5 output value

373

Process control language objects

374

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MFxy.i.110

E6_OUT_C1

71.43

Segment S6 output value

%MFxy.i.112

E7_OUT_C1

85.71

Segment S7 output value

%MFxy.i.114

THLD_C1

1E+8

Totalizing limit

%MFxy.i.116

R_RATE_C1

0.0

Setpoint speed increase


limit

%MFxy.i.118

D_RATE_C1

0.0

Setpoint speed decrease


limit

%MFxy.i.120

SPEED_LIM_OUT_C1

No object

Setpoint velocity limiter


output value

%MFxy.i.122

INP_INFR1_C1

0.0

Main loop R1 setpoint low


scale

%MFxy.i.124

INP_SUPR1_C1

100.0

Main loop R1 setpoint high


scale

%MFxy.i.126

INP_INFR2_C1

0.0

Main loop R2 setpoint low


scale

%MFxy.i.128

INP_SUPR2_C1

100.0

Main loop R2 setpoint high


scale

%MFxy.i.130

T1_FF_C1

0.0

Feed forward process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.132

T2_FF_C1

0.0

Feed forward process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.134

OUT_FF_INF_C1

0.0

Feed forward process value low limit

%MFxy.i.136

OUT_FF_SUP_C1

100.0

Feed forward process value high limit

%MFxy.i.138

KP_PREV_C1

No Object

Value before proportional


co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.140

TI_PREV_C1

No Object

Value before integral coefficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.142

TD_PREV_C1

No Object

Value before derived coefficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.144

OUT_MAN_C2

No Object

Secondary loop command


value

%MFxy.i.146

DEV_C2

No Object

Process value/setpoint deviation

%MFxy.i.148

PV_C2

No Object

PV value on physical scale

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MFxy.i.150

SP_C2

No Object

Setpoint value on Physical


scale

%MFxy.i.152

PV_INF_C2

0.0

Process value low limit

%MFxy.i.154

PV_SUP_C2

100.0

Process value high limit

%MFxy.i.156

KP_C2

1.0

Proportional coefficient

%MFxy.i.158

TI_C2

0.0

Integral time

%MFxy.i.160

TD_C2

0.0

Derivative time

%MFxy.i.162

OUTBIAS_C2

0.0

Bias on PID loop controller


output

%MFxy.i.164

INT_BAND_C2

0.0

Integral band

%MFxy.i.166

DBAND_C2

0.0

Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.168

SP_MIN_C2

0.0

Setpoint low limit

%MFxy.i.170

SP_MAX_C2

100.0

Setpoint high limit

%MFxy.i.172

PV_LL_C2

5.0

Process value threshold


very low

%MFxy.i.174

PV_L_C2

5.0

Process value threshold


low

%MFxy.i.176

PV_H_C2

95.0

Process value threshold


high

%MFxy.i.178

PV_HH_C2

95.0

Process value threshold


very high

%MFxy.i.180

DEV_L_C2

-5.0

Deviation low threshold

%MFxy.i.182

DEV_H_C2

5.0

Deviation high threshold

%MFxy.i.184

SQRT_OUT_C2

No object

Square root output value

%MFxy.i.186

THLD_C2

1E+8

Totalizing limit

%MFxy.i.188

R_RATE_C2

0.0

Setpoint speed increase


limit

%MFxy.i.190

D_RATE_C2

0.0

Setpoint speed decrease


limit

%MFxy.i.192

SPEED_LIM_OUT_C2

No object

Setpoint velocity limiter


output value

%MFxy.i.194

INP_INFR1_C2

0.0

Secondary loop R1 setpoint low scale

%MFxy.i.196

INP_SUPR1_C2

100.0

Secondary loop R1 setpoint high scale

375

Process control language objects

376

Address

Parameter name

Default
value

Comment

%MFxy.i.198

KP_PREV_C2

No Object

Value before proportional


co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.200

TI_PREV_C2

No Object

Value before integral coefficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.202

TD_PREV_C2

No Object

Value before derived coefficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.204

OUTRATE

0.0

Output 1 speed limit

%MFxy.i.206

OUTRATE2

0.0

Output 2 speed limit

%MFxy.i.208

OUT1_INF

0.0

Low limit of Output 1

%MFxy.i.210

OUT1_SUP

100.0

High limit of Output 1

%MFxy.i.212

OUT2_INF

0.0

Low limit of Output 2

%MFxy.i.214

OUT2_SUP

100.0

High limit of Output 2

%MFxy.i.216

OUT1_TH1

0.0

Threshold 1 for Hot/Cold or


Split Range output 1

%MFxy.i.218

OUT1_TH2

50.0

Threshold 2 for Hot/Cold or


Split Range output 1

%MFxy.i.220

OUT2_TH1

50.0

Threshold 1 for Hot/Cold or


Split Range output 2

%MFxy.i.222

OUT2_TH2

100.0

Threshold 2 for Hot/Cold or


Split Range output 2

%MFxy.i.224

T_MOTOR1

10.0

Open time for servo drive


controlled valve

%MFxy.i.226

T_MINI1

0.0

Minimum open time for


servo drive controlled
valve

%MFxy.i.228

T_MOTOR2

10.0

Open time for servo drive


controlled valve

%MFxy.i.230

T_MINI2

0.0

Minimum open time for


servo drive controlled
valve

%MFxy.i.232

KS

1.0

IMC static gain

%MFxy.i.234

OL_TIME

1.0

Time constant in BO

%MFxy.i.236

T_DELAY

0.0

Current pure delay time

%MFxy.i.238

CL_PERF

0.1

Ratio OL/CL

%MFxy.i.240

No Object

%MFxy.i.242

No Object

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Address

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Parameter name

Default
value

%MFxy.i.244

No Object

%MFxy.i.246

No Object

Comment

%MWxy.i.248

Simulated PV_C1

No Object

Simulated process value

%MWxy.i.249

Simulated PV_C2

No Object

Simulated process value

%MWxy.i.250

Simulated FF_C1

No Object

Simulated Feed forward input

377

Process control language objects

11.6

Language objects associated with the setpoint


programmer

At a Glance
Subject of this
section

This section describes the language objects associated with the setpoint programmers.

Whats in this
Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

378

Topic

Page

Configuration language objects

379

Fault and diagnostics language objects

387

Process control language objects

391

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Configuration language objects


Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table describes the configuration language objects associated with the setpoint
programmer.
Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.0

CONFIG_1

%KWxy.i.0:X0

Guaranteed dwell time

No (0)

Confirmation of guaranteed
dwell time function (0: no, 1:
yes)

%KWxy.i.0:X1

Dwell type

Holding type on guaranteed


dwell time: 2 bits

%KWxy.i.0:X2

Dwell type

%KWxy.i.0:X3

Start

With bumps
(0)

Start with bumps (0: SP0) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.0:X4

Retry

Non-continuous (0)

Retry of continuous profile (1)


or non-continuous (0)

%KWxy.i.0:X5

Retry type

With bumps
(0)

Retry with bumps (0: SPi) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.1

CONFIG_2

%KWxy.i.1:X0

Guaranteed dwell time

No (0)

Confirmation of guaranteed
dwell time function (0: no, 1:
yes)

%KWxy.i.1:X1

Dwell type

Holding type on guaranteed


dwell time: 2 bits

%KWxy.i.1:X2

Dwell type

%KWxy.i.1:X3

Start

With bumps
(0)

Start with bumps (0: SP0) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.1:X4

Retry

Non-continuous (0)

Retry of continuous profile (1)


or non-continuous (0)

%KWxy.i.1:X5

Retry type

With bumps
(0)

Retry with bumps (0: SPi) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.2

CONFIG_3

Word which brings together


the different configuration bits
for profile 1

Word which brings together


the different configuration bits
for profile 2

Word which brings together


the different configuration bits
for profile 3

379

Process control language objects

380

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.2:X0

Guaranteed dwell time

No (0)

Confirmation of guaranteed
dwell time function (0: no, 1:
yes)

%KWxy.i.0

CONFIG_1

%KWxy.i.2:X1

Dwell type

%KWxy.i.2:X2

Dwell type

%KWxy.i.2:X3

Start

With bumps
(0)

Start with bumps (0: SP0) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.2:X4

Retry

Non-continuous (0)

Retry of continuous profile (1)


or non-continuous (0)

%KWxy.i.2:X5

Retry type

With bumps
(0)

Retry with bumps (0: SPi) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.3

CONFIG_4

%KWxy.i.3:X0

Guaranteed dwell time

No (0)

Confirmation of guaranteed
dwell time function (0: no, 1:
yes)

%KWxy.i.3:X1

Dwell type

Holding type on guaranteed


dwell time: 2 bits

%KWxy.i.3:X2

Dwell type

%KWxy.i.3:X3

Start

With bumps
(0)

Start with bumps (0: SP0) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.3:X4

Retry

Non-continuous (0)

Retry of continuous profile (1)


or non-continuous (0)

%KWxy.i.3:X5

Retry type

With bumps
(0)

Retry with bumps (0: SPi) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.4

CONFIG_5

%KWxy.i.4:X0

Guaranteed dwell time

No (0)

Confirmation of guaranteed
dwell time function (0: no, 1:
yes)

%KWxy.i.4:X1

Dwell type

Holding type on guaranteed


dwell time: 2 bits

Word which brings together


the different configuration bits
for profile 1
Holding type on guaranteed
dwell time: 2 bits

Word which brings together


the different configuration bits
for profile 4

Word which brings together


the different configuration bits
for profile 5

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.4:X2

Dwell type

%KWxy.i.4:X3

Start

With bumps
(0)

Start with bumps (0: SP0) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.4:X4

Retry

Non-continuous (0)

Retry of continuous profile (1)


or non-continuous (0)

%KWxy.i.4:X5

Retry type

With bumps
(0)

Retry with bumps (0: SPi) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.5

CONFIG_6

%KWxy.i.5:X0

Guaranteed dwell time

No (0)

Confirmation of guaranteed
dwell time function (0: no, 1:
yes)

%KWxy.i.5:X1

Dwell type

Holding type on guaranteed


dwell time: 2 bits

%KWxy.i.5:X2

Dwell type

%KWxy.i.5:X3

Start

With bumps
(0)

Start with bumps (0: SP0) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.5:X4

Retry

Non-continuous (0)

Retry of continuous profile (1)


or non-continuous (0)

%KWxy.i.5:X5

Retry type

With bumps
(0)

Retry with bumps (0: SPi) or


bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.6

USED_PF1

Number of 1st segment of profile 1

%KWxy.i.7

USED_PF2

Number of 1st segment of profile 2

%KWxy.i.8

USED_PF3

17

Number of 1st segment of profile 3

%KWxy.i.9

USED_PF4

25

Number of 1st segment of profile 4

%KWxy.i.10

USED_PF5

33

Number of 1st segment of profile 5

%KWxy.i.11

USED_PF6

41

Number of 1st segment of profile 6

%KWxy.i.12

NB_SEG_PF1

Number of used segments in


profile 1

Word which brings together


the different configuration bits
for profile 6

381

Process control language objects

382

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.13

NB_SEG_PF2

Number of used segments in


profile 2

%KWxy.i.14

NB_SEG_PF3

Number of used segments in


profile 3

%KWxy.i.15

NB_SEG_PF4

Number of used segments in


profile 4

%KWxy.i.16

NB_SEG_PF5

Number of used segments in


profile 5

%KWxy.i.17

NB_SEG_PF6

Number of used segments in


profile 6

%KWxy.i.18

NO_SEG_RT1

Number of start segment for


repetition of profile 1

%KWxy.i.19

NO_SEG_RT2

Number of start segment of


retry of profile 2

%KWxy.i.20

NO_SEG_RT3

17

Number of start segment of


retry of profile 3

%KWxy.i.21

NO_SEG_RT4

25

Number of start segment of


retry of profile 4

%KWxy.i.22

NO_SEG_RT5

33

Number of start segment of


retry of profile 5

%KWxy.i.23

NO_SEG_RT6

41

Number of start segment of


retry of profile 6

%KWxy.i.24

CONF_SEG1

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.25

CONF_SEG2

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3)of
segment

%KWxy.i.26

CONF_SEG3

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.27

CONF_SEG4

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.28

CONF_SEG5

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.29

CONF_SEG6

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.30

CONF_SEG7

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.31

CONF_SEG8

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.32

CONF_SEG9

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.33

CONF_SEG10

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.34

CONF_SEG11

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.35

CONF_SEG12

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.36

CONF_SEG13

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.37

CONF_SEG14

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.38

CONF_SEG15

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.39

CONF_SEG16

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
segment

%KWxy.i.40

CONF_SEG17

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.41

CONF_SEG18

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

383

Process control language objects

384

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.42

CONF_SEG19

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.43

CONF_SEG20

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.44

CONF_SEG21

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.45

CONF_SEG22

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.46

CONF_SEG23

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.47

CONF_SEG24

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.48

CONF_SEG25

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.49

CONF_SEG26

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.50

CONF_SEG27

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.51

CONF_SEG28

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.52

CONF_SEG29

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.53

CONF_SEG30

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 03) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.54

CONF_SEG31

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.55

CONF_SEG32

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.56

CONF_SEG33

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.57

CONF_SEG34

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.58

CONF_SEG35

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.59

CONF_SEG36

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.60

CONF_SEG37

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.61

CONF_SEG38

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.62

CONF_SEG39

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.63

CONF_SEG40

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.64

CONF_SEG41

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.65

CONF_SEG42

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 03) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.66

CONF_SEG43

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.67

CONF_SEG44

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

385

Process control language objects

386

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

%KWxy.i.68

CONF_SEG45

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.69

CONF_SEG46

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.70

CONF_SEG47

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.71

CONF_SEG48

Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5)


Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of
the segment

%KWxy.i.72

SPP_NAME1

%KWxy.i.73

SPP_NAME2

%KWxy.i.74

SPP_NAME3

%KWxy.i.75

SPP_NAME4

8 characters over 4 times 2


bytes

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Fault and diagnostics language objects


Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table describes the fault and diagnostics language objects associated with the
setpoint programmer.
Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

MWxy.i.0

EXCH_STS

Exchange in progress

MWxy.i.1

EXCH_ERR

Exchange in progress report

MWxy.i.2

CH_FLT

Channel standard fault

MWxy.i.2:X7

WARN

Sum of errors

MWxy.i.2:X8

ERR_CALC

Calculation error

MWxy.i.2:X9

ERR_FLOAT

Floating point error

MWxy.i.3

STATUS2

State of check output, SPP


freeze, profile state

MWxy.i.3:X0

STOR0

State of check 0 output

MWxy.i.3:X1

STOR1

State of check 1 output

MWxy.i.3:X2

STOR2

State of check 2 output

MWxy.i.3:X3

STOR3

State of check 3 output

MWxy.i.3:X4

STOR4

State of check 4 output

MWxy.i.3:X5

STOR5

State of check 5 output

MWxy.i.3:X6

STOR6

State of check 6 output

MWxy.i.3:X7

STOR7

State of check 7 output

MWxy.i.3:X8

STS_SPP_HOLD

Setpoint programmer function


freeze

MWxy.i.3:X9

STS_INIT

1: all profiles are in INIT

MWxy.i.3:X10

STS_RUN

1: the profile in progress is in


RUN mode

MWxy.i.3:X11

STS_STOP

1: the profile in progress is in


STOP mode

MWxy.i.3:X12

STS_HOLD_PG

1: the guaranteed dwell time


function is inhibited

MWxy.i.3:X15

STS_ERR_SEG

Parameter error on current


segment

MWxy.i.4

STATUS3

MWxy.i.4:X0

WRN1_RMP_SP

Indicates errors on profiles 1


to 4
No Object

Profile 1 ramp has 2 identical


setpoints

387

Process control language objects

388

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

MWxy.i.4:X1

WRN1_RMP_0

No Object

Profile 1 ramp has zero speed

MWxy.i.4:X2

WRN1_PLR_SP

No Object

A profile 1 dwell time has 2


different setpoints

MWxy.i.4:X3

WRN1_PLR_THLD

No Object

Configured guaranteed dwell


time on profile 1 and THLD
zero

MWxy.i.4:X4

WRN2_RMP_SP

No Object

Profile 2 a ramp has 2 identical setpoints

MWxy.i.4:X5

WRN2_RMP_0

No Object

Profile 2 ramp has zero speed

MWxy.i.4:X6

WRN2_PLR_SP

No Object

A profile 2 dwell has 2 different setpoints

MWxy.i.4:X7

WRN2_PLR_THLD

No Object

Configured guaranteed stop


time on profile 2 and THLD
zero

MWxy.i.4:X8

WRN3_RMP_SP

No Object

Profile 3 ramp has 2 identical


setpoints

MWxy.i.4:X9

WRN3_RMP_0

No Object

Profile 3 ramp has zero speed

MWxy.i.4:X10

WRN3_PLR_SP

No Object

A profile 3 dwell has 2 different setpoints

MWxy.i.4:X11

WRN3_PLR_THLD

No Object

Configured guaranteed dwell


time on profile 3 and THLD
zero

MWxy.i.4:X12

WRN4_RMP_SP

No Object

Profile 4 ramp has 2 identical


setpoints

MWxy.i.4:X13

WRN4_RMP_0

No Object

Profile 4 ramp has zero speed

MWxy.i.4:X14

WRN4_PLR_SP

No Object

A profile 4 dwell has 2 different setpoints

MWxy.i.4:X15

WRN4_PLR_THLD

No Object

Configured guaranteed dwell


time on profile 4 and THLD
zero

MWxy.i.5

STATUS4

MWxy.i.5:X0

WRN5_RMP_SP

No Object

Profile 5 ramp has 2 identical


setpoints

MWxy.i.5:X1

WRN5_RMP_0

No Object

A profile 5 ramp has zero


speed

MWxy.i.5:X2

WRN5_PLR_SP

No Object

A profile 5 dwell has 2 different setpoints

Indication of errors on profiles


5 and 6

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

MWxy.i.5:X3

WRN5_PLR_THLD

No Object

Configured guaranteed dwell


time on profile 5 and zero
THLD

MWxy.i.5:X4

WRN6_RMP_SP

No Object

Profile 6 ramp has 2 identical


setpoints

MWxy.i.5:X5

WRN6_RMP_0

No Object

A profile 6 ramp has zero


speed

MWxy.i.5:X6

WRN6_PLR_SP

No Object

A profile 6 dwell has 2 different setpoints

MWxy.i.5:X7

WRN6_PLR_THLD

No Object

Configured guaranteed dwell


time on profile 6 and zero
THLD

MWxy.i.6

Reserved

MWxy.i.7

CMD_ORDER

Command order (single word)

MDxy.i.8

CMD_PARAM

Command parameter (double


word)

MWxy.i.10

CUR_PF

No Object

Current profile number

MWxy.i.11

SEG_OUT

No Object

Current segment number

MWxy.i.12

CUR_ITER

No Object

Number of current retry

MWxy.i.13

NB_RT_PF1

Number of profile 1 retry

MWxy.i.14

NB_RT_PF2

Number of profile 2 retry

MWxy.i.15

NB_RT_PF3

Number of profile 3 retry

MWxy.i.16

NB_RT_PF4

Number of profile 4 retry

MWxy.i.17

NB_RT_PF5

Number of profile 5 retry

MWxy.i.18

NB_RT_PF6

MWxy.i.19

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Number of profile 6 retry

Type of segments currently


being carried out
Type of maintain on guaranteed dwell time: 2 bits
Bits coding:
l Top: X2=0 et X1=1
l Bottom: X2=1 et X1=0
l Top and Bottom: X2=1 et
X1= 1
l No guaranteed dwell time:
X2=0 et X1=0

MWxy.i.19:X1

Type of dwell

MWxy.i.19:X2

Type of dwell

389

Process control language objects

390

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

MWxy.i.19:X3

Guaranteed dwell time

1 : the guaranteed dwell time


is configured or a segment is
currently being carried out

MWxy.i.19:X4

Dwell time

1 : dwell time is in progress

MWxy.i.19:X5

Type of ramp

1 : a rising ramp is in progress

MWxy.i.19:X6

Ramp type

1 : a falling ramp is in
progress

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

Process control language objects


Description

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

This table describes the process control language objects associated with the setpoint programmer.
Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

MFxy.i.20

SP

No object

Calculated setpoint (output) value

MFxy.i.22

TOTAL_TIME

No object

Value of total time elapsed (including freeze times)

MFxy.i.24

CUR_TIME

No object

Value of total time elapsed on the


segment in progress (including
freeze times)

MFxy.i.26

THLD_PF1

0.0

Value of the guaranteed dwell time


threshold of profile 1

MFxy.i.28

THLD_PF2

0.0

Value of the guaranteed dwell time


threshold of profile 2

MFxy.i.30

THLD_PF3

0.0

Value of the guaranteed dwell time


threshold of profile 3

MFxy.i.32

THLD_PF4

0.0

Value of the guaranteed dwell time


threshold of profile 4

MFxy.i.34

THLD_PF5

0.0

Value of the guaranteed dwell time


threshold of profile 5

MFxy.i.36

THLD_PF6

0.0

Value of the guaranteed dwell time


threshold of profile 6

MFxy.i.38

SP0_PF1

0.0

Value of initial setpoint of profile 1

MFxy.i.40

SP0_PF2

0.0

Value of initial setpoint of profile 2

MFxy.i.42

SP0_PF3

0.0

Value of initial setpoint of profile 3

MFxy.i.44

SP0_PF4

0.0

Value of initial setpoint of profile 4

MFxy.i.46

SP0_PF5

0.0

Value of initial setpoint of profile 5

MFxy.i.48

SP0_PF6

0.0

Value of initial setpoint of profile 6

MFxy.i.50

SP1

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


1

MFxy.i.52

VAL1

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 1

MFxy.i.54

SP2

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


2

MFxy.i.56

VAL2

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 2

391

Process control language objects

392

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

MFxy.i.58

SP3

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


3

MFxy.i.60

VAL3

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 3

MFxy.i.62

SP4

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


4

MFxy.i.64

VAL4

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 4

MFxy.i.66

SP5

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


5

MFxy.i.68

VAL5

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 5

MFxy.i.70

SP6

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


6

MFxy.i.72

VAL6

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 6

MFxy.i.74

SP7

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


7

MFxy.i.76

VAL7

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 7

MFxy.i.78

SP8

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


8

MFxy.i.80

VAL8

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 8

MFxy.i.82

SP9

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


9

MFxy.i.84

VAL9

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 9

MFxy.i.86

SP10

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


10

MFxy.i.88

VAL10

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 10

MFxy.i.90

SP11

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


11

MFxy.i.92

VAL11

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 11

MFxy.i.94

SP12

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


12
TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

MFxy.i.96

VAL12

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 12

MFxy.i.98

SP13

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


13

MFxy.i.100

VAL13

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 13

MFxy.i.102

SP14

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


14

MFxy.i.104

VAL14

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 14

MFxy.i.106

SP15

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


15

MFxy.i.108

VAL15

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 15

MFxy.i.110

SP16

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


16

MFxy.i.112

VAL16

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 16

MFxy.i.114

SP17

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


17

MFxy.i.116

VAL17

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 17

MFxy.i.118

SP18

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


18

MFxy.i.120

VAL18

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 18

MFxy.i.122

SP19

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


19

MFxy.i.124

VAL19

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 19

MFxy.i.126

SP20

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


20

MFxy.i.128

VAL20

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 20

MFxy.i.130

SP21

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


21

MFxy.i.132

VAL21

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 21

393

Process control language objects

394

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

MFxy.i.134

SP22

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


22

MFxy.i.136

VAL22

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 22

MFxy.i.138

SP23

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


23

MFxy.i.140

VAL23

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 23

MFxy.i.142

SP24

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


24

MFxy.i.144

VAL24

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 24

MFxy.i.146

SP25

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


25

MFxy.i.148

VAL25

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 25

MFxy.i.150

SP26

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


26

MFxy.i.152

VAL26

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 26

MFxy.i.154

SP27

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


27

MFxy.i.156

VAL27

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 27

MFxy.i.158

SP28

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


28

MFxy.i.160

VAL28

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 28

MFxy.i.162

SP29

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


29

MFxy.i.164

VAL29

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 29

MFxy.i.166

SP30

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


30

MFxy.i.168

VAL30

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 30

MFxy.i.170

SP31

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


31
TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Process control language objects

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

MFxy.i.172

VAL31

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 31

MFxy.i.174

SP32

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


32

MFxy.i.176

VAL32

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 32

MFxy.i.178

SP33

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


33

MFxy.i.180

VAL33

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 33

MFxy.i.182

SP34

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


34

MFxy.i.184

VAL34

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 34

MFxy.i.186

SP35

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


35

MFxy.i.188

VAL35

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 35

MFxy.i.190

SP36

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


36

MFxy.i.192

VAL36

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 36

MFxy.i.194

SP37

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


37

MFxy.i.196

VAL37

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 37

MFxy.i.198

SP38

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


38

MFxy.i.200

VAL38

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 38

MFxy.i.202

SP39

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


39

MFxy.i.204

VAL39

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 39

MFxy.i.206

SP40

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


40

MFxy.i.208

VAL40

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 40

395

Process control language objects

396

Address

Parameter name

Default value

Comment

MFxy.i.210

SP41

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


41

MFxy.i.212

VAL41

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 41

MFxy.i.214

SP42

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


42

MFxy.i.216

VAL42

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 42

MFxy.i.218

SP43

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


43

MFxy.i.220

VAL43

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 43

MFxy.i.222

SP44

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


44

MFxy.i.224

VAL44

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 44

MFxy.i.226

SP45

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


45

MFxy.i.228

VAL45

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 45

MFxy.i.230

SP46

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


46

MFxy.i.232

VAL46

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 46

MFxy.i.234

SP47

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


47

MFxy.i.236

VAL47

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 47

MFxy.i.238

SP48

0.0

Setpoint to be reached by segment


48

MFxy.i.240

VAL48

0.0

Value of the time or speed for segment 48

MFxy.i.242

TIME_SEG

0.0

Value of time remaining on the current segment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

B
AC

Index

Numerics
3 single loop controller
Process control objects, 334
3 single loop controllers
Default and diagnostics objects, 325
3 single loops loop controller
Configuration objects, 321

A
Adjust
Feed forward, 191
Adjustment
Dead time, 207
Model loop controller, 204, 205, 206
PID, 196
Time constant, 209
Adjustment screen, 234, 247
Alarm pages, 241, 255
Alarm screens, 241, 255
Auto Selector loop
Introduction, 47
Auto-selector
Process control objects, 372
Auto-selector loop
Configuration objects, 359
Fault and diagnostics object, 365

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 9/15/00

Autotuning
Autotuning process, 145
Diagnostics, 148
Duration of division too long, 152
Duration of division too short, 151
Inconsistent response, 150
Insufficient variation, 149
Integrating process, 153
Large overshoot process, 152
Noise too high, 150
Non-mimimum phase process, 152
Non-symmetrical process, 152
Operating modes, 147
Parameters, 142
Performance criterion, 146
Process value not initially stabilized, 151
Reasons for aborting, 149
Saturation of the process value, 149
Step function parametering, 145
Stopping after a system fault, 149
Autotuning screen, 236

B
Behavior of loops during I/O errors, 285
BIAS, 131

397

Index

Branch
Analog output, 63
Command, 58
Feed Forward, 57
Loop controller, 58
Output, 63
Process value, 53
PWM output, 66
Servo drive output, 64
Setpoint, 55
Summary, 67
Browsing, 226
Built-in functions
Introduction, 49
Bumpless start, 74

D
Data storage, 218
Dead band on deviation, 130, 139
Debug
Feed forward gain adjustment, 192
Leadlag adjustment, 193
Debugging
Screen description, 212
Setpoint programmer, 216
Delayed model output, 139
Derivative action, 129, 202
Direct action, 129, 138
Distribution of process control handling, 276

F
C
Cascade loop
Configuration objects, 340
Fault and diagnostics objects, 346
Introduction, 46
Process control objects, 353
Closed loop adjustment, 197
Cold autotuning, 140
Command parameter
3 single loops loop controller, 298
Auto selector loop, 298
Cascade loop, 298
Setpoint programmer, 298
Configuration
Inputs, 179
Methodology, 178
Multi-station, 187
Outputs, 179
Control loops command word, 302
Control outputs, 73
Control screen, 245
Controlling Servo output without position
copy in manual mode, 282
Corrector
ON OFF 3 states, 123
PID, 126

398

Feed forward
Alarm on deviation, 118
Leadlag, 116
Scaling, 114
Front panel screen, 232

H
Handling process control operations
according to the PLC operating mode, 279

I
Inputs
Configuration, 179
Installation
Methodology, 34
Integral action, 201
Integral band, 130
Integrating processes, 139
Inverse action, 129, 138

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 9/15/00

Index

L
Loop controller
Autotuning, 140
Heat/Cool, 61, 157
IMC, 60
mixed PID, 127
Model loop controller, 135
ON OFF 2 states, 59, 121
ON OFF 3 states, 59
parallel PID, 128
PID, 60
Split Range, 61, 154
Loop controllers
At a Glance, 39
Exchange zone, 183
Parametering, 23, 25
Structure, 41, 43
Loop sampling, 276

M
Man-Machine Interface
Methods of use, 185
Model, 224
Model loop controller
Parameters, 138
Monitoring screen, 231, 243
Multitasking application, 278
Optimizing operation functions, 278

O
Open loop adjustment, 198
Operating, 221
Operating modes
3 Single Loops, 288
Auto selector loop, 291
Cascade loop, 289
Process Loop, 287
Operating pages, 224
Optimizing processor loading, 276

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 9/15/00

Output
Bipolar format, 173
Output address assignment, 173
Output format, 173
Output limiter, 171
Output range, 173
PWM, 167
Scaling, 169
Servo, 161
Unipolar format, 173
Output scaling
Scale factor, 169
Outputs
Configuration, 179

P
Parameters
Modification, 214
PID
Detailed equations, 132
Parameters, 129
Process control
Installing XBT, 35
Processors, 19
Software tools, 20
Process control channels
At a Glance, 39
Process control handling
Cold restart, 280
PLC power-up, 279
Processor in RUN mode, 279
Switching to STOP mode, 279
Warm restart, 280
Process control loop
Global parameters, 81
Process control loops
Auto / Manual switching, 284
Autotuning execution, 283
Control in manual mode, 282
Execution in automatic mode, 282
Manual / Auto switching, 284
Tracking mode execution, 283
Process controllers
Global parameters, 81

399

Index

Process loop
Configuration objects, 307
Error and diagnostics objects, 311
Introduction, 44
Process control object, 316
Process value
First order filtering, 88
Function generator, 91
Input format, 86
Level alarms, 96
Scale limiter, 95
Scaling, 94
Square root, 90
Totalizer, 98
Processors
Features, 19
Profile, 76
Proportional action, 200
PWM, 66
Function period, 168
Resolution, 168
Time base, 168

Setpoint programmer
Bumpless start, 74
Configuration object, 379
Control outputs, 73
Description, 69
Fault and diagnostics object, 387
Guaranteed dwell time, 71
initialization, 80
Link to other loops, 78
Operation monitoring, 80
Parameters, 79
Process control objects, 391
Profile execution, 76
Setpoint programmer command word, 304
Setpoint programmer screen, 237, 238, 240,
249, 251, 254
Single loop
Introduction, 45
Synchronization
Trigger bits, 277
Synchronizing pre- and post- processing,
277

SERVO, 64
Servo
Actuator opening time, 163
Automatic mode with position copy, 164
Automatic mode without copy position,
165
Manual mode without position copy, 166
Minimum pulse period, 163
Position stops, 163
Pulse period, 163
With copy position, 162
Without copy position, 162
Servo drive without output copy, 139
Setpoint
Ratio, 102
Scaling, 105
Selection, 104
Setpoint limiter, 107
Speed limiter, 111
Tracking setpoint, 109

Trend screen, 233


TXBT-F, 222
TXBT-F02 screens, 242

400

W
Warm autotuning, 141

X
XBT Loading, 229
XBT-F, 221, 222
XBT-F01 screens, 230
XBT-F02 screens, 242

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 9/15/00

Anda mungkin juga menyukai